Home

K266/-K294 Satellite Navigation

Contents

1. OA EAE EUM U Satellite Configuration Depending on the selected Data Source Frequency Number is either configurable or read only If the frequency number is read directly from the Almanac or the RINEX file i e if you use Real Navigation Data as data source frequency number is read only With Pattern PRBS or Data List you can set the value Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt FNUMber on page 215 Orbit Type R amp S SMBV only enabled for BeiDou satellites only Indicates the orbit type the BeiDou satellite is using The BeidDu global satellite navi gation systems uses a constellation of 35 satellites with following orbits GEO 5 geostationary orbit satellites with SV ID 1 5 MEO 27 middle earth orbits global satellites IGSO 3 Inclined Geosynchronous Satellite Orbit regional satellites visible only in China and Australia Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt ORBit on page 217 Modulation Displays the modulation used for modulating the carrier signal Remote command subsystem SATellite st MODulation on page 217 Power Reference For mixed Signal s like C A P displays the signal used as a reference by power cal culation The power reference is fixed to C A for mixed signals For signals modulated only with the P code
2. AsewV VV V RN Assistance Data Generation Parameter Unit delta n semi circles sec Mo semi circles Cuc radians e Cus radians A meters1 2 Toe sec Fit Interval Flag boolean AODO sec Cis radians lo semi circles C meters omega semi circles OMEGAdot semi circles sec Idot semi circles sec The generated xs nav comma separated format is conformant to the format appen ded to standards 3GPP 34 108 v 8 0 0 3GPP TS 51 010 1v 7 7 0 and and 37 571v10 0 The file contains one row per satellite See section chapter 2 10 8 Generating GNSS Assistance Data on page 39 for description of the workflow for generation of assistance data Remote command subsystem ADGeneration NAVigation CREate on page 266 Generate UTC File Access the Select UTC File dialog for saving the generated UTC file The generated UTC file is a file with extension xs utc and the selected file name The file contains all standard UTC parameters SatID A 0 A 1 delta t LS t ot WN_t WN_LSF DN and Delta t LSF that are necessary to transform GNSS time to the normal UTC time The generated UTC file contains one entry per standard See chapter 2 10 8 Generating GNSS Assistance Data on page 39 for description of the workflow for generation of assistance data Remote command s
3. H t m new Assistance Data Settings Usage Query only lt subsystem gt ADGeneration lt GNSS gt SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou SVID SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou LOCation SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass SVID SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass LOCation SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo SVID SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo LOCation SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS SVID SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData SYNChronize lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS SYNChronize Synchronizes the affected parameters Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Usage Event Manual operation See Synchronize All Synchronize on page 132 subsystem ADGeneration MODE Mode Defines the type of assistance data to be loaded Parameters Mode GPS GALileo GLONass BElDou RST GPS Example See example Generating of GPS as
4. d Q Qr Navigation Data Parameters Year integer Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 Month integer Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Example See example Selecting Real Navigation Data on page 175 Manual operation See Date dd mm yyyy on page 67 lt subsystem gt NAVigation SiMulation TIME Hour Minute Second Defines the exact simulation start time in UTC time format This setting is only available for lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA set to RNData and lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation TBASis set to UTC Parameters lt Hour gt integer Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 lt Minute gt integer Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 lt Second gt float Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 Example See example Selecting Real Navigation Data on page 175 Manual operation See Time hh mm ss xxx on page 67 lt subsystem gt NAVigation SiMulation WNUMber Week Enters the week number WN the navigation signal is generated for This setting is only available for subsystem NAVigation SIMulation TBASis setto GPS or GST and subsystem NAVigation DATA set to RNData Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 177 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Obscuration and Auto Multipath Parameters Week integer The weeks are numbered starting from a reference point
5. Q X H NN Functional Overview of the Basic Realtime GNSS Options GPS Galileo GLONASS and BeiDou Simulation Mode Static Auto Localization User Localization Required Options Function Power Mode User Auto Auto and User R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 Exchange of Satellites no automatic manual R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 Maximum Number of Satellites up to 12 24 up to 12 24 up to 12 24 R amp S SMBV K91 K96 Motion Files no yes yes R amp S SMBV K92 Motion Smoothening Extract attitude from motion file Time Conversion Configuration yes no yes R amp S SMBV K92 Navigation Message Configuration configurable read only configurable R amp S SMBV K92 Atmospheric Configuration yes yes yes R amp S SMBV K92 Static Multipath Configuration no no yes R amp S SMBV K92 Automatic Multipath amp Osculation sce no yes yes R amp S SMBV K92 and narios R amp S SMBV K102 Antenna Pattern Body mask entry no yes yes R amp S SMBV K102 Attitude Body rotation angle files no yes yes R amp S SMBV K92 and User defined vehicle spinning R amp S SMBV K103 Hardware in the loop HIL no yes yes R amp S SMBV K92 motion only and R amp S SMBV K103 motion and attitude 2 1 3 GNSS System Configurations Instrument equipped with the GNSS basic options GPS Galileo GLONASS and Bei Dou can be configured to generate the signal of hybrid GNSS satellite cons
6. QA A H HQ S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands Subevsiemz HIT SGCOhNetellatton enne nnne nenne rere nnns 277 lt subsystem beier CET TT 279 lt subsystem gt RTRATIHUDdE EE 280 lt subsystem gt SPOT NHOTime In lt subsystem gt SMOD AUTO queries the time period that will pass from the simula tion start before the next handover will be executed The time of the upcoming handover is calculated as Next Handover Time simula tion start Time lt NHoTime gt Return values lt NHoTime gt integer Default unit seconds Example See example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Example SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation DATE Response 2012 8 20 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation TIME Response 16 0 0 SOURCe1 BB GPS SPOT NHOTime Response 750 s 750 sec 12 min 30 sec Hence the next handover is expected at 12 30 min after 16 00 00 on 20 08 2012 that is the Next Handover Time is 16 12 30 Usage Query only Manual operation See Next Constellation Change on page 143 lt subsystem gt RT HWTime Queries the time elapsed since the simulation start Return values lt ElapsedTime gt float Range 0 to INT_MAX Increment 0 001 RST 0 Example See example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt AZIMu
7. m H P uC subsystem NAVigation ALManac GLONass TOAPplicability TIME subsystem NAVigation ALManac GPS DATE BEQGin sesenta 196 SubevstemzNAVioation A Manac GPS DATEENDN nennen nennen nnns entren 196 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GPS F ILE esee ener nere nnrnnnree nnne trennen 195 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GPS TOAPpDplicability TOVeek 198 SubevstemzNAVioation Al Manac GPS TOAbolicabiltv WNU Mer 198 SubesvstemczNAVioaton Al Manac GPS WNU Mier 199 RE E Ek Ae E le RR NK lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA DSELect lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA PATTern subsystem NAVigation RINex OGNGGSEILE eene eene enne nnne n nnne 199 ubevstemzNAVioation HlNex GNGG GTATe ener rennes n ennt nennen 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex BEIDou F LE cessere nennen nemen neren nnne 199 SubsevstemzNAVioation HiNex BEIDouGTATe enne nnne nene n nnns rennen nnn 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex GALileo F ILE eessssssssssseseeeeee ener nennen nnns nnne 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex GALileo STATe essent rsen e nnne 199 SubevstemzNAVioation HiNexv GL OhassElE ennemis 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex GLONass STATe ssssssssssssssesese eene enne eene nnne en rnnn entente nnn 200 lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GPS FILE lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GPS
8. n Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 310 Satellite Navigation List of Commands ns lt subsystem gt CLOCk MODE 290 lt subsystem gt CLOCK MUL MT 290 subsystem CLOCK SOURCE siisii he tec eee pedet ec utate au Duda y eu Eae e Pe anid 290 eubevstemz CL OCkSvhNChrontzaton EstECute eene nee nennen enne nnne 291 subsystem CLOCKk SYNChronization MODE esses eene enne nenne sentes n rnnn rne nnns enne 291 lt subsystem gt DU e DEE 163 subsystem FILTer OSAMpling encre runter rh ka tnihi nt ana Pene Saat ai aana Vaa EE Nai 164 SE EE Re e E EE 213 subsystem GOConstellatioh 2 2 crederet crine ee radon edi dise EE eiae e Dee daga 213 subsystem HDOP 213 subsystem HYBRid GNSS STATe esses enne nenne nennen nennen ness tnter 193 subsystem HvBbRd BEIDoutSTATel nennen nennen nnne tnter 193 subsystem HYBRid GALileo STATe essere nnne nneen renes nenne etri nns 193 lt subsystem gt HYBRId GLONasS STATe nnne eene ennnnn riaka daak a aasi 193 subsystem HYBRid GPS STATS erit e iea adaa eda dada hatin a eda ag uda de 193 subsystem LOCation CATalog sessi aiii ai aeaiee N aaen iiaa ieaiai SENEESE 170 ubevstemz LO
9. Usage Query only Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE Queries the time of Ephemeris in the current day Return values Hour integer Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 lt Minute gt integer Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 248 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands GC n ed Navigation Message Configuration Second float Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris URA lt SvAcc gt Provides the predicted satellite user range accuracy URA Parameters lt SvAcc gt integer Range 0 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris XN X n subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris YN Y n subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ZN Z n Sets the OX OY OZ position coordinates of the current satellite at TOE tb i e the middle of Tb Interval The coordinates correspond to the PZ 90 coordinate system Parameters lt Z n integer Range 67
10. Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 210 Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings Response 20531267 5147461 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel PRBias 0 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel TSHift Response 70060 0902627953 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel DSHift Response 1146 05037064872 SOURCe1 BB GPS SATellitel ICPHase Response 6 25362425028864 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel FREQuency Response 1575421146 05037 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel CACRate Response 1023000 74418801 SOURce1 BB GPS SVID19 GPS MPAT STATe Response 0 SOURCe1 BB GPS SATellitel STATe Response 1 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite5 STANdard Response BEID SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite5 SIGNal Response B1C SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite5 SVID Response 33 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite5 ORBit Response MEO SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite7 STANdard Response GLON SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite7 SIGNal Response RCA SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite7 SVID Response 14 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite7 FNUMber Response 7 SOURCe1 BB GPS SATellite7 SCRate Response 511000 SOURCe1 BB GPS STATe ON SOURce1 BB GPS HDOP Response 1 12895407129922 SOURcel BB GPS PDOP Response 2 15878433755758 ll ele LECHEN 212 oculi E HER 212 el EU el EE 213 xo cucine 213 subsystem o AD Modul AO TE 213 SUbevslemz GOConstellatton senes nnns nnn nunen eneee 213
11. 85 X KID M 123 249 XDDOT fioe tto rer rnt eet een 123 249 XDOT E 123 250 xtd file datavectorhastimestamp ssssssseesess 296 Parameter and tags ss timeresolution ornnes Mo MM waypointformat sesssssssseseseeeneen Y Y EE 123 249 bci 72 VD DOW E 123 249 Rer 123 250 Z Z ect 123 249 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 323 ZDDOT EE 123 249 Vapor o 123 250
12. 213 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CABCAGeo lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CABCAIgso lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CABCAMEO cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseaaeeeseaeeesesaeeeeesaeeeseaeeesseaeeeseneeeeeeneeeneaee 225 ubsevetemz POWerINTerCAE Det rrei eideann eda edia aaa aeiiaaie diende pda iias 225 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CARCA eene iiaiai ni aa Daa EiS aaaea aE 225 subsystem POWerINTerbGtandard A 225 ug pecu c T RQ d p wdFRFFM ser Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 313 Satellite Navigation List of Commands J n lt subsystem gt POWer INTer PZERo ubsveiemz POWer INTbRaGbG CA AAA 226 subsystem POWer INTRa GPS PSTandard sse eene nnne eerte rnnt sena 226 eubevstemz POWer NTbRaGbGbZEhRo nennt nennen een nnr etre ters ennr seti tn enne 226 lt subsystem gt POWer MOD TEE 222 ubsveiemz POWerREterence DIS Tanced 224 eubevstemz POWerRterence GATelltte nnne 223 ubevstemz POWerREterence GlONal eene enne nennen nenrs nen nnr snnt 223 lt subsystem gt POWer REFerence S TANCAalmd eene ener ener en nrnn nen nnn snnt nnn nennen 223 lt subsystem gt POWer REFerence POWer wi 222 lt subsystem gt POWer RE RE 225 su bsystems PRESE e bs rcr ti edd beat a Ue a ee
13. sss subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRC sss subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRS esses subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUC sss subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUS esses subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ECCentricity 235 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris HEALth lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IDOC ss subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOE sssssssss subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOT sess subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo esses subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris MZERo esses uacuum T HO F P P B m Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 315 Satellite Navigation List of Commands m H P uC lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMES
14. 122 ariete eene enne dde nean kb a Dae nan Aaaa 287 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime 1 leere ce ide ete enden esa aiie PRA 288 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime eese nnne nena 288 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern esses enne nenne renes nnns 288 lt subsystem gt TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt PULSe DIVider ararannnnnnnnnnnnonannvnnnvnnnnenerererernrnnn 288 SUbsvsiemz TRHlGoer OUTPButzchz PUlL GekbREOuency reene 289 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe WIDTh essen 289 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch MODE Mode Defines the signal for the selected marker output Note In instruments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K96 disabled subsystem UMGPs and enabled satellites constellation with more than 12 satellites only one marker signal is available Parameters Mode PULSe PATTern RATio PPS PP2S TRIGger DISabled PPS10 RESTart PULSe PATTern RATio Reqular marker signals PPS PP2S PPS10 A marker signal is generated for every start of second every second second or respectivelly every tenth second GPS time The pulse width is defined with the subsystem TRIG OUTP PULSe WIDTh command TRIGger A marker signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs DISabled Generation of a marker signal is deactivated Restart R amp S WinIQSIM2 only The signal is generated continuously A trigger event cau
15. 237 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODE 237 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODE 237 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODNav 237 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZEROo 237 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZEROo 237 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo 237 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZEROo 237 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris LTPData 238 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris MZERO 238 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris MZERO 238 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris MZERO 238 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris MZERO 238 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris NDELta 238 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris NDELta 238 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris NDELta 238 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage
16. CCORrection GAMN on page 245 Delta TAU n Time difference between navigation RF sig lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass nal transmitted in L2 and navigation RF sig NMESsage PAGE lt us gt nal transmitted in L1 band CCORrection DTAU on page 245 En Age of operation information subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection EN on page 245 Galileo INAV Parameters Comprises the parameters of the Integrity navigation message I NAV provided by E5b and E1 B signals and supporting Safety of Life Service The I NAV message carries extended system integrity information gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 126 Satellite Navigation User Interface Table 3 18 INAV Parameters Navigation Message Configuration Parameter Description SCPI command B GD E1 E5B E1 E5b Broadcast Group Delay BGD E1 E5b lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV BGD on page 243 T OC E1 E5B Clock correction data reference Time of Week t E1 E5b lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV TOC on page 245 a f2 E1 E5B SV clock drift rate correction coefficient ap E1 E5b lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV AF gr0 on page 243 a f1 E1 E5B SV clock drift correction coefficien
17. Maximum Number Of Satellites 4 DI Duration Elev gt 5 03 53 31 2 Pseudorange 24 234 744 978 km v d Pseudor Bias 0 000 m Y GPS CIA 29 B Time Shift 82 697 691 Chips Doppler Shift 2 687 66 kHz Init Carr Phase 3 58 Fig 3 5 Example Power Configuration in Auto Power Mode Note The power values displayed in Auto power mode correspond to the start of the simulation t0 The power levels change automatically as function of the satellite receiver distance but the display is not updated Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 95 Satellite Navigation User Interface EU XK H Satellite Configuration Tip Select GNSS General Settings gt Real Time SPOT and select Display Type gt Power View The displayed power levels are updated in real time Power levels at the beginning of the simulation t t0 e Reference Power 115 dBm The reference power is the nominal power of the reference satellite at the start time and location the power of all other satellites are simulated as relative power to the power of the reference one e Reference Satellite Sat 4 e Number of Satellites 4 e Tor all satellites static Multipath Off e Sat 1 Displayed Powersay4 cia 1 58 dB e Sat 2 Displayed Powersatz e1 pef 1 46 dB e Sat 3 Displayed Powersauo ener 1 49 dB e Sat 4 Displayed Powersatt4
18. is displayed Latitude Sets the latitude of the reference location Longitude Sets the longitude of the reference location Remote command n a Deviation Sets the deviation in terms of meters from the Reference Location and determines the radius of the Map View display Remote command Theis Trajectory View Settings This settings section is available in the Trajectory View display and comprises the settings for customization of the displayed Azimuth and Elevation trajectories Satellite Standard Determines the navigation standard the Satellite SV ID is belonging to Remote command determined by the lt GNSS gt block of the SCPI command Satellite SV ID Determines the SV ID of the satellite for that the Azimuth and Elevation trajectories are displayed Remote command determined by the suffix in the SVID lt ch gt block of the SCPI command Time Offset Determines the time offset as number of days and number of hours Remote command n a Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 144 Satellite Navigation User Interface Trigger Marker Clock Settings Time Window Sets the time window the trajectories are displayed in i e determines the resolution of the x axis of the Trajectory View Remote command n a 3 14 Trigger Marker Clock Settings To access this dialog select Main Dialog gt Trigger Marker o The trigger and clock functions are available for R amp S SMBV instruments only
19. SV accuracy URA Index lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris URA on page 241 SV Health IODC This value does not have an impact on the actual health status of the generated satel lite Issue of Data Clock lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris HEALth on page 236 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMES sage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris I DOC on page 236 IODE Issue of Data Ephemeris lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMES sage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IDOE on page 237 As this parameter affects the satellite s orbit the value selected here also has an impact on the satellite s parameters Time Shift Doppler Shift and Duration Eleva tion gt 2 5 5 7 5 10 The value of these parameters will be upda ted automatically GPS Ephemeris Parameters The ephemeris parameters correspond to the SV ID and navigation standard displayed with the parameter SV ID Standard and to the navigation page determined by the Current Page Index Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 121 Satellite Navigation User Interface Table 3 13 GPS Ephemeris Parameters Navigation Message Configuration Parameter Description SCPI command Code on L2 Type of code for L2 This value does not have any impact on the actual used ranging code of the generat
20. eese 260 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass LOCation COORdinates DMS esses 261 ubevstemz ADGeneratton Gl OhaseslOCGaton GvNcChrontze 259 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass LOCation URADius essent 262 up uc OO FF MFP sa Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 309 Satellite Navigation List of Commands m H P uC lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass SVID SYNChronize subsystem ADGeneration GLONass SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCK sese 257 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass SVID ch SAData sse enne 258 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass SVID ch STATe sse enne 259 ubevstemz ADGeneratton Gl Oase GvhNChrontze nnne nennen 259 ubevstemz ADGenerattonGl Oase TOoAiata DATE 263 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass TOAData DURation sese 264 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass TOAData RESolution sssssseeeeeeeeeen 264 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAlataGvhNChrontze nen 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TBASis is ubevstemz ADGenerattonGl Oase TOoAiata TIME lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAlataTOuWeek enne 264 eubevstemz ADGeneraton GL OhNass TOAlata
21. 08 39 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow 8 Generate the required assistance data almanac file ionospheric file etc The generated assistance data files are stored in the selected folder Refer to the description of the corresponding file for description of the file format used 2 10 9 Generating Multipath Scenarios 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 according to General Workflow Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt User Localization Select Satellite Configuration gt Sat gt Multipath RON Select the Number of Taps and configure the additional Time Shift Power Doppler Shift and Carrier Phase per tap 5 Select Multipath Configuration gt State gt On The graph displays the selected propagation conditions amp GPS Satellite 4 Multipath Configuration Number Of Taps 3 Doppler Carrier j Shit Phase IHz frad 0 500 00 300 1 00000 5 00 0 00000 3 00 Power dB 0 5 1 0 15 Time Shift Chips Fig 2 7 Example of Multipath Configuration 6 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt On The instrument will generate the GNSS signal of satellites that experience static multipath propagation 2 10 10 Generating GPS Signal Modulated with P Code 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 according to General Workflow 2 In the GNSS System Configuration dialog enable Activate GNSS Standards gt GPS PE Operating Manual 1173 14
22. 2012 8 20 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation TIME 16 0 0 n x C SOURCe1 BB GPS STATe 1 up um T Or J M P eee Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 267 S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands SOURce1 BB GPS SPOT UPDate OFF SOURCe1 BB GPS RT HWTime Response 36 16 sec elapsed time since simulation start SOURCe1 BB GPS SPOT NHOTime Response 750 s 750 sec 12 min 30 sec hence the next handover is expected at 12 30 min after 16 00 00 on 20 08 2012 that is the Next Handover Time is 16 12 30 SOURCe1 BB GPS RT SCONstellation GPS 1702 144050 Response 12 62 64 G9 G27 E15 E16 E26 E27 R12 R22 B25 B34 716 constalation with 12 satellites SOURCe1 BB GPS RT OCONstellation GPS 1609 65455 Response 12 G9 E16 R12 E27 B25 R22 G2 G4 E26 G27 B34 E15 SOURCe1 BB GPS RT RLOCation COORdinates DMS GPS 1702 144050 Response 144 57 59 195 EAST 37 48 37 615 SOUT 100 037 SOURCe1 BB GPS RT RLOCation COORdinates DECimal GPS 1702 144050 Response 144 966443 37 810449 100 037 SOURCe1 BB GPS RT RATTitude Response 0 0 1 54474 SOURCe1 BB GPS RT GALileo SVID27 TAP1 POWer ABSolute GST 1702 144100 Response 118 836975193809 SOURCe1 BB GPS RT GALileo SVID27 AZIMuth GST 1702 144100 Response 37 5699690788219 SOURCe1 BB GPS RT GALileo SVID10 ELEVation GST 1702 1441
23. FrequencyNumber integer Range 7 to 24 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Frequency Number on page 105 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 215 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands CON a S C I pege Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt FREQuency Queries the currently valid values for Doppler shifted carrier frequency Return values lt Frequency gt float Default unit Hz Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Usage Query only Manual operation See Resulting Start Frequency on page 108 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt CPHase Code Sets the initial code phase in chips while working in static simulation mode and using arbitary navigation data source Parameters Code float Range 0 to 20459 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Manual operation See Initial Code Phase on page 107 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt ICPHase lt ICPhase gt Sets the initial carrier phase This setting is only available for lt subsystem gt SMODeSTATic The parameter is updated automatically for USER and AUTO Parameters lt ICPhase gt float Range 0 to 6 28 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Initial Carrie
24. e invalid command lt Subsystem gt STAT Placeholder lt GNSS gt The placeholder lt GNSS gt is introduced to simplify the description of group of com mands with similar syntax Depending on the navigation standard to be controlled replace this placeholder lt GNSS gt with GPS GALileo GLONass Or BEIDou Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 155 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands T R P H Example SCPI command subsystem HYBRid GNSS STATe e Entry Standard GPS replace the placeholder lt subsystem gt with SOUR BB GPS e In a hybrid GNSS configuration the navigation standard of the entry point GPS is always enabled To enable the Galileo satellites replace the placeholder lt GNSS gt with GALileo SOUR BB GPS HYBR GAL STAT e invalid commands Subsystem HYBR GAL STAT SOUR BB GPS HYBR GNSS STAT Common Suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description SOURce lt hw gt 1 available baseband signals OUTPut lt ch gt 1 4 available markers Ter R amp S SMBV supports two markers EXTernal lt ch gt 1 2 external trigger connectors SVID lt ch gt 1 37 for GPS satel distinguishes between the SV IDs lites Note The SV ID must correspond to a healthy satellie 1 50 for Galileo sat ellite TAP lt us gt 1 1
25. subsystem UCRF zs lt Subsystem gt UMGPS m 193 ubevstemz VEHide CAT aog PR Detfined eene nennen nennen enne nnn 166 subsystem VEHicle CATalog USERQ sess nre en reset retener senes enne 166 lt Subsystem gt VEMICISsF c M 166 lt subsystem gt VEHICIO FY EEN 166 lt subsystem gt WAVeform CREate swwmruisnssisssbasornannesensonsansenvenernasnasaserensersnsnnennnennsonnsanenssnenedsnns nnnensessnnkeee 164 lt subsystem gt TRIGger SEQUuence rere errore tir nre tenore n eA ER uina 282 ug pecu c LL MRMF P eee Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 319 Satellite Navigation Index Index Symbols puo 296 Vs 300 A A GLONASS TEStSCENANOS nto o neris 21 A GNSS Data Formal ES 134 T StSCENANOS EE 21 A GPS T st sCenarioS i torre tede 20 A GPS 2G 3G protocol and conformance test cases 20 Acquisition file Format A GNSS or A GPS sse 134 Activate anti spoofing flag Additional Doppler Shift ssssssssssssssss Additional POWeF nre tet rris Additional Time Shift Chips Age of Ephemeris Page Di 123 246 Algorithm Handover EE Ecl as Prediction oett ne irren re rhe Projection Resampling Smoothening sirisser ivisu adisi tenerte inta 28 Al
26. A TE Used Algorithms This section provides reference information on the algorithms applied by the genera tion of the GNSS signal Detailes on the Smoothening Algorithm An important parameter in the smoothening application is the proximity parameter which specifies the maximum deviation from the user s input waypoints This parame ter also specifies the number of inserted waypoints along the great circle in case the user s input waypoints are far away from each other This is done to ensure that the smoothened trajectory will not transverse the earth s surface The smoothening is based on a modified version of linear segment parabolic blend algorithm LSPB to specify the motion dynamics between two waypoints and geomet ric blend to change the direction of motion LSPB provides continuity in velocity limited acceleration but suffers from infinite Jerk The modified LSPB guarantees the continuity in acceleration limited Jerk between waypoints Control points are inserted between each two waypoints and the motion is planned between these control points using fifth order polynomial regression which guarantees the continuity of the velocity and acceleration at the control points The acceleration at the starting and the reached waypoint is zero this will guarantee the continuity when entering a blend to change the direction of motion since the blend is represented by a sixth order polynomial with zero initial and final accelera
27. Generating GNSS Assistance Data on page 39 2 4 Realtime Option Extension to 12 24 Satellites R amp S SMBV K91 K96 These options extend the maximum number of simulated satellites e Instrument equipped with the option R amp S SMBV K91 is enabled to generate the signal of up to 12 configurable satellites Any hybrid 12 satellite configuration is possible for example a combination like 10 C A GPS 1 Galileo E1 1 GLONASS R C A The available satellites depend on the availability of the basic options respectively on the enabled standards in the GNSS System Configurations and the selected RF Band e The R amp S SMBV K96 requires the option R amp S SMBV K91 and further extends the maximum number of simulated satellites Instruments equipped with this combination are enabled to generate the signal of up to 24 GPS C A Galileo E1 Glonass R C A and BeiDou B1 C A satellites if the respecitvely GNSS basic option or a combination there of is available The option R amp S SMBV K96 does not enhance the number of P code satellites taps 2 4 4 Channel Budget There is a limitation of the maximum number of simulated satellites depending on whether P code signal and BeiDou satellites are enabled in the GNSS system configu ration or not Without satellites using position accuracy P Code signals The generation of up to 24 GPS C A Galileo E1 and or GLONASS satellites hybrid signal is possible when no P Code signals are activated For
28. Off The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and starts with sample 0 i e the complete signal is outputted This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument Calculated signal Signal at the output Processing time Remote command subsystem TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 284 External Delay Sets the trigger signal delay in chips on external triggering This enables the instrument to be synchronized with the device under test or other external devices Remote command subsystem TRIGger EXTernal ch DELay on page 286 External Inhibit Sets the duration for inhibiting a new trigger event subsequent to triggering The input is to be expressed in chips Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 149 Satellite Navigation User Interface O G M UME EEMR O O e Trigger Marker Clock Settings In the Retrigger mode every trigger signal causes signal generation to restart This restart is inhibited for the specified number of chips Remote command subsystem TRIGger EXTernal ch INHibit on page 286 3 14 2 Marker Mode The marker output signal for synchronizing external instruments is configured in the marker settings section Marker Mode Marker Mode Selects a m
29. PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA 240 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA 240 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA 240 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA 240 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SVConfig 240 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE 241 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE 241 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE 241 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE sss 241 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris URA 241 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris URA 241 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris URA ssse 241 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV AF oz 241 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE xus FNAV BGD euususs 241 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV ESADVS sssss 242 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV E5AHS seeesesess 242 subsystem SVID ch
30. R amp S SMBV only Stops signal generation This button appears only with Running signal generation in the Armed Auto and Armed Retrigger trigger modes Signal generation can be restarted by a new trigger internally with Execute Trigger or externally Remote command subsystem TRIGger ARM EXECute on page 283 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 147 Satellite Navigation User Interface Trigger Marker Clock Settings Execute Trigger R amp S SMBV only Executes trigger manually A manual trigger can be executed only when an internal trigger source and a trigger mode other than Auto have been selected Remote command subsystem TRIGger EXECute on page 284 Trigger Source Selects trigger source This setting is effective only when a trigger mode other than Auto has been selected Internal The trigger event is executed by Execute Trigger External The trigger event is executed with the aid of the active edge of an external trigger signal The trigger signal is supplied via the TRIGGER connector The polar ity the trigger threshold and the input impedance of the TRIGGER input can be set in the Global Trigger Clock Settings dialog Remote command subsystem RIGger SOURce on page 284 Sync Output to External Trigger enabled for Trigger Source External Enables disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event For or two or more R amp S SM
31. Remote command n a Number of Navigation Pages Requires installed assistance option e g Assistance GPS R amp S SMBV K65 Several navigation pages are available per satellite If RINEX file is used the value of this parameter is retrieved from the file A RINEX file may contains ephemeris information for up to 24h Since the ephemeris are update every two hours the RINEX file contains a maximum number of 12 navigation pages Remote command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE COUNt on page 230 Current Page Index Requires installed assistance option e g Assistance GPS R amp S SMBV K65 Select a specific page from all available navigation pages Number of Navigation Pages and enables the set of ephemeris parameters of this page for configuration Remote command n a Real Time Projection enabled in User Localization mode and disabled Satellite Configuration gt Global Ephemeris Real Time Projection Enables the instrument to internally perform a projection of the navigation message whenever this message is approaching its validity limit When using RINEX file containing information for up to 24 hours the navigation page to be used is selected in the way that the simulation start time is within the time span from TOE to TOE 2h i e TOE lt Current Simulation Time lt TOE 2h It may however happen that the required consecutive navigation page is missing in the RINEX file
32. SCPI command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMES sage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SORA on page 240 OMEGA 0 Longitude of Ascending Node of Orbit Plane at Weekly Epoch lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OZERo on page 239 io Inclination Angle at Reference Time lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo on page 237 Omega Argument of Perigee lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OMEGa on page 239 OMEGA DOT Rate of Right Ascension lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ODOT on page 238 IDOT Rate of Inclination Angle lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOT on page 236 Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correc tion Term to the Argument of Latitude lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMES sage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUC on page 234 Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Argument of Latitude lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMES sage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUS on page 235 C rc Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correc tion Term to the Orbit Radius 1 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeri
33. SOURCe1 BB GPS APATtern CATalog PREDefined Response Bus Car Small Isotropic MMEM CDIR var user antenna patterns SOURCe1 BB GPS APATtern CATalog USER Response ant pat 3ant SOURce1 BB GPS APATtern FILE var user antenna patterns ant pat 3ant SOURce1 BB GPS APATtern LIST Response 1 2 3 three antennas with antenna IDs 1 2 and 3 are defined select the antenna with antenna ID 2 SOURCe1 BB GPS APATtern ID 2 switch the antenna in real time after elapsing the specified time SOURce1 BB GPS RT UPDate ANTenna 12500 1 subsystem VEHicle CATalog PREDefined sse ener 166 lt subsystem gt VEFMI de GATalbgiUSER Line aina c2 e da pea tcu ey Rain gc RR FR dan NRRP REQUE 166 subsystemesVEFlcleJFIBE EE 166 subsystem VEMICIE T d E 166 subsystem APATtern CATalog PREDefined essere 167 lt subsystem JAPATterm KE E E 167 lt ssubsystem ER E 167 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 165 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands OMMEM HH E s User Environment Antenna Pattern and Body Mask subsystem APDA Ten ANTenna LIST 167 subsystem APDA Ten ANTennalD eene nennen nennen nnn nnns nent nn tren 168 subsystem RT UPDate ANTenDn a iicet inrer decre tek ere Pudor RR ERR A Urn e SEENEN 168 lt subsystem gt VEHicle CATalog PREDefined Queries the nam
34. Sets the geographic reference location in degrees minutes and seconds Parameters lt LongitudeDeg gt integer Defines the longitude degrees Range 0 to 180 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LongitudeMin gt integer Defines the longitude minutes Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LongitudeSec gt float Defines the longitude seconds Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 lt LongitudeDir gt EAST WEST Defines the longitude direction RST EAST lt LatitudeDeg gt integer Defines the latitude degrees Range 0 to 90 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LatitudeMin gt integer Defines the latitude minutes Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LatitudeSec gt float Defines the latitude seconds Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 261 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands ee Assistance Data Settings lt LatitudeDir gt NORTh SOUTh Defines the latitude direction RST NORT Altitude float Defines the altitude in meters above sea level Range 10000 to 1600000 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Reference Location on page 132 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou LOCation URADius lt Radius gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo LOCation URADius Radius lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass LOCatio
35. Suburban area URB1 Urban canyon LTUNnel MTUNnel Long tunnel Multiple tunnel BR1 BR2 Bridge 1 2 P1M P10M P1H Parking 1min 10min 1h HIGHway Highway CUTTing Cutting RST USER Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Type on page 73 subsystem OBSCuration ENVironment Environment Selects a near environment model for obscuration amp auto multipath Parameters Environment LOS VOBS RPL FULL GSR LOS Line of Sight LOS VOBS Vertical Obstacles RPL Roadside Planes FULL Full Obscuration GSR Ground Sea Reflection RST LOS Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Near Environment on page 74 subsystem OBSCuration PMODel lt PhysicalModel gt Selects the physical effects to be simulated on the GNSS signal i e obscuration only OBSCuration or obscuration and multipath propagation OMPath Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 181 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Obscuration and Auto Multipath Parameters lt PhysicalModel gt OBSCuration OMPath RST OMP Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Options R amp S SMBV K101 OMPath requires R amp S SMBV K92 Manual operation See Physical Model on page 75 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration VOBS
36. The Trigger In section is where the trigger for the signal is set Various parameters will be provided for the settings depending on which trigger source internal or exter nal is selected The current status of signal generation Running or Stopped is indicated for all trigger modes amp GPS Trigger Marker Clock Retrigger KA p Source External Sync Output To Ext Trigger jv On External Delay 0 00 C A Chips External Inhibit 0 C A Chips The Marker Mode section is where the marker signals at the MARKER output con nectors are configured The Marker Delay section is where a marker signal delay can be defined either with out restriction or restricted to the dynamic section i e the section in which it is possi ble to make settings without restarting signal and marker generation Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 145 Satellite Navigation User Interface 3 14 1 Trigger Marker Clock Settings Marker Mode Pes M GPS Pulse Width 1 C A Chips v ovot Ratio m On Time 1 C A Chips v Off Time 1 C A Chips DI Marker Delay Current Range Without Recalculation g uc p M R n 0 C A Chips JDEEERERUNEEERETDSDEN 0 2000C A Chips cr D ee EECH 0 C A Chips nnucnegonnpononmnmmpm 0 2000C A Chips Fix Marker Delay To Current Range The Clock Settings section is where the clock source is selected and in the case of an external s
37. 0 1 OFF ON RST ON Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Set Length to Infinite on page 80 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL SCALe lt ReferenceScale gt Defines whether the obstacles positions are defined as distance in km or as time in S Parameters lt ReferenceScale gt TIME DISTance RST DIST Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Reference Scale on page 83 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL RWINdow lt RepWindow gt Sets the repeating period in km or s of repeating objects Parameters lt RepWindow gt integer Range 0 to 1000 RST 10 Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Repetition Window on page 83 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL RWINdow STATe State Enables the repetition of the defined objects Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST OFF Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Repetition Window on page 83 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 185 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands O U M C m Obscuration and Auto Multipath lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL AREA COUNt Sets the number of the ob
38. 3 13 2 3 13 3 3 13 4 3 14 3 14 1 User MUSA CG mc 55 GNSS Main ET BEE 55 General Settings for GNSS Simulation sse 56 User sini 62 NAVIGATION Dab E 65 Advanced Confoguraton nenne ennemis 68 Localization Data ee cte Le Leere eren rin aana aaa 68 Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings eeeeeenn 73 COMMON SettiNS 0 0 eee eee cece reenter eee aiaiai kadanin kaiaia en nennen nnne enn 73 Vertical Obstacles Gettings emnes 76 Roadside Planes Gettings cece eerste eee eiieee eee eieeeeeeeineeeeeesieeeeeesineeeeeeee 79 Full Obscuration Gettngs eene 82 Ground Sea Reflection sse ener nenne 84 GNSS System Almanac Configuration Settings esee 86 Time Conversion Configuration eese nennen nennen nennen nen nnn 89 Satellite Configuratlon eterne enn rennen eene naa nne cauaa Dee uua anta 91 Power Conftouraton eene enne nn nnne nnn nennen 92 General Satellites Gettmgs emen 100 Configuration of the Satellite Constellaton tennessee eteeeeeeeee 102 Individual Satellite Gettings emen 105 Global Signal Configuration eene enne 109 Atmospheric Configuration ssrrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvennnnnnnenennnennn 111 Satellites Power Tuning 1 niei rr reticere neueren nnn nana n nonna nnn anna ans 113 Navi
39. 96660799206 37 8166564261776 100 00000240095 966574759635 37 66600575235 66587635456 66580370574 66572578565 66466260761 44 966666334601 37 8166633061788 100 000000009313 44 966662392613 37 8166632247233 100 000000039116 44 966658453002 37 8166630889914 100 00000008475 44 966654516955 37 8166628990241 100 000000149943 44 966650585658 37 8166626548785 100 000000235625 44 966646660296 37 8166623566284 100 000000339001 44 966642742053 37 8166620043635 100 000000461936 44 966638832109 37 81666159819 100 000000603497 44 966634931642 37 8166611382304 100 000000762753 567 00 000001138076 00 000001588836 00 000001840293 00 00000211224 00 00000580959 ug pu c P d dFRFM H BR IE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 293 Satellite Navigation Annex n H a User Environment Files A 1 1 2 Vector Trajectory File Format This file format uses a script containing the commands defined in the following table Command Description REFERENCE lon Lat alt Specifies the Cartesian Reference of the ENU coordinates system Given as a geodetic WGS84 point longitude Latitude Altitude START EN U Velocity Start location i e initial current location in the ENU Cartesian coordi nate of center REFERENCE East North
40. ADGeneration GPS TOAData TOWeek Return values lt Block gt lt Rx Time of Week gt lt Satellite ID that corresponds to the record gt lt Zero Order Doppler Term gt lt 1st order Doppler Term gt lt Uncertainty Doppler gt lt Code Phase or half Chip index at epoch Time of Transmission GPS Sat Time gt lt Integer Code Phase or ms unit index at epoch Time of Transmission GPS Sat Time gt lt Corresponding Bit number modulo 4 at epoch Time of Transmission GPS Sat Time gt lt Correlator Code phase Search Radius gt lt Azimuth Angle of the Satellite in ENU ortho normal coordinate System centered at reference point gt lt Eleva tion Angle of the Satellite in ENU orthonormal coordinate Sys tem centered at reference point gt The returned value is exactly one row of the acquisition assis tance data file 2G 3G that can be generated by the command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration ACQuisition CREate Example SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis UTC SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME 17 04 00 000 sets the time of assistance data SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS SVID2 ACQuisition BLOCk 0 1 queries the acquisition data for SV ID 2 and time offset of 0 1s i e at UTC Time 17 04 00 0 1 s Response 589925 5 3733 3371910282908 0 0 599 18 1 11 225 32801752395233 11 17712126071662 Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K65 K107 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 256
41. ALM GAL DATE BEG Response 2010 11 07 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt DATE END lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac BEIDou DATE END lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GALileo DATE END lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GPS DATE END This setting is ony available for GPS and Galileo satellites Queries the end date of the week span of the selected almanac file for the navigation standard The file is selected using lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt FILE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 196 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a A A P Almanac RINEX Configuration Return values Year integer Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 Month integer Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 Day integer Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Example BB GPS NAV ALM GAL DATE END Response 2010 11 14 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GLONass TOAPplicability DATE Queries the date of applicability of the selected almanac file for the navigation stand ard Note This setting is available for Glonass It is no longer supported for GPS and Gali leo satellites To get the applicability data of GPS and Galileo satellites refer to the commands lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt TOAPplicability TOWeek on page 198 and lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt TOAPplicability WNUMber on
42. GPS TOAData DATE Year Month Day Enabled for UTC or GLONASS time basis lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis Enters the date for the assistance data in DMS format of the Gregorian calendar Parameters Year integer Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 Month integer Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 Day integer Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Date dd mm yyyy on page 133 subsystem ADGeneration BElDou TOAData TIME Hour Minute Second subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData TIME Hour Minute Second subsystem ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TIME Hour Minute Second subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME Hour Minute Second Enabled for UTC or GLONASS time basis lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis Enters the exact start time for the assistance data in UTC time format Parameters Hour integer Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 Minute integer Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 lt Second gt float Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Time hh mm ss on page 133 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 263 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Assistance Data Settings subsystem ADGeneration BElDou TOAData DURat
43. INTer PZERo on page 225 Set to Standard Inter Standard Tuning Sets the power relation between the signals belonging to the different navigation stand ard according to the relation determined in the specifications Table 3 10 Inter Standard Tuning Parameter Value GPS C A CALILEO E1 DEF 1 25 dB GPS C A GLONASS R C A 3 03 dB GPS C A BeiDou GEO B C A 4 5 dB GPS C A BeiDou MEO B C A 4 5 dB GPS C A BeiDou IGSO B C A 4 5 dB Remote command subsystem POWer INTer PSTandard on page 225 GPS C A GALILEO E1 DEF GPS C A GLONASS R C A GPS C A BeiDou GEO MEO IGSO B C A Inter Standard Tuning Sets the power relation between the signals belonging to the different navigation stand ards Use the Set to Standard function to preset the values The power level of the GPS signal C A is used as reference Remote command subsystem POWer INTer CAE1Def on page 225 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CARCA on page 225 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CABCAGeo on page 225 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CABCATgso on page 225 subsystem POWer INTer CABCAMeo on page 225 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 115 Satellite Navigation User Interface Navigation Message Configuration 3 10 Navigation Message Configuration instruments equipped with one of the assisted options e g Assisted GPS R amp S SMBV K65 The parameters of the Navigation Message Configuration dia
44. Links to useful sites on the R amp S internet Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming The online help contains help on operating the R amp S SMBV and all available options Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF for mat on the Documentation CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and an example of setup are descri bed The manual includes also general information e g Safety Instructions Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option These manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the Operating Manual for the base unit all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore it provides an introduction to remote control and a complete description of the remote control commands with pro gramming examples Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also given In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer t
45. OFF ON RST 0 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Global Ephemeris Real Time Projection on page 102 lt subsystem gt SATellite COUNt lt SatCount gt Defines the maximum number of satellites that can be simulated The minimum allowed number depends on the selected simulation mode see lt subsystem gt SMODe on page 160 Configurations with one satellite are allowed only for subsystem SMODeSTATic For subsystem SMODeAUTO or USER four satellites or more are required Note Generating the navigation signal with more than 6 satellites is enabled only for instruments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K91 more than 12 satellites require option R amp S SMBV K96 The number of satellites determines the value range of the suffix for subsystem SATellite st commands Parameters lt SatCount gt integer Range 1 to 24 Increment 1 RST 1 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Options R amp S SMBV K91 more than 6 satellites R amp S SMBV K96 more than 12 satellites Manual operation See Maximum Number of Satellites on page 103 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt CACRate Queries the currently valid values for the chip rate Return values lt CACRate gt float Default unit Hz Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12
46. Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 194 Almanac RINEX Configuration subsystem NAVigation ALManac BEIDou DATE END esses 196 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GALileo DATE END eese 196 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GPS DATE END A 196 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GLONass TOAPplicability DATE suus 197 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GLONass TOAPplicability TIME suus 197 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS TOAPplicability TOWeek sss 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac BEIDou TOAPpDplicability TOWeek 198 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GALileo TOAPDplicability TOWeek 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GPS TOAPpDplicability TOWeek sess 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS TOAPplicability WNUMber sss 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac BEIDou TOAPDplicability WNUMber sss 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GALileo TOAPDplicability WNUMhber 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GPS TOAPpDplicability WNUMber usus 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS WNUMBber cesses 199 subsystem NAVigation ALManac BEIDou WNUMber eise 199 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GALileo WNU
47. Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 lt Hour gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 lt Minutes gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 lt Seconds gt float required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 lt WeekNumber gt integer required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 529947 Increment 1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 270 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands OUU A U es S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands lt TimeOfWeek gt float required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 Return values lt Azimuth gt float Example See example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt ELEVation lt subsystem gt RT BEIDou SVID lt ch gt ELEVation lt TimeBasis gt Year lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt lt subsystem gt RT GALileo SVID lt ch gt ELEVation lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt lt subsystem gt RT GLONass SVID lt ch gt ELEVation lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day g
48. Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Assistance Data Settings subsystem ADGeneration GALileo SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCk TimeOffset lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass SVID lt ch gt ACQuisition BLOCk lt TimeOffset gt Queries part of the current assistance data settings Query parameters lt TimeOffset gt Int Sets the offset of time to the beginning of the acquisition data generation set with the command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TIME or the command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TOWeek Return values lt Block gt lt Rx Time of Week gt lt Satellite ID that corresponds to the record gt lt Zero Order Doppler Term gt lt 1st order Doppler Term Uncertainty Doppler m s gt lt Code Phase ms gt lt Inte ger Code Phase ms gt lt Correlator Code phase Search Radius ms gt lt Azimuth Angle of the Satellite in ENU orthonormal coor dinate System centered at reference point gt lt Elevation Angle of the Satellite in ENU orthonormal coordinate System centered at reference point gt The returned value is exactly one row of the acquisition assis tance data file 2G 3G that can be generated by the command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration ACQuisition CREate Example SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TBASis GLO SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GLONass TOAData DATE 2012 8 20 SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TIME 19 00 00 000 sets
49. See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 246 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands H 1 A es Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris P lt P gt Reliability measure of system time conversion parameters Parameters lt P gt integer 00 TAU_C and TAU GPS relayed from control segment 01 TAU C from control segment TAU GPS calculated on board GLONASS M satellite 10 TAU_C on board Glonass M satellite and TAU_GPS relayed from CS 11 TAU_C and TAU GPS calculated on board Glonass M satel lites Range 0 to 3 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SEType lt Type gt Selects the satellite ephemeris type Parameters Type GLO GLOM RST GLOM Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TALignment lt TbAlign gt Sets TOE to be aligned to an even or odd scale of 15 min for Age of Ephemeris 30 or 60 min The parameters Tb Interval subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TINTerval and TOE lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE depend on this
50. TOAPplicability TOWeek lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac BE IDou TOAPplicability TOWeek lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GALileo TOAPplicability TOWeek lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GPS TOAPplicability TOWeek Determines the Time of Week TOW the selected almanac is used for time of applica bility Return values lt Tow gt float Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt TOAPplicability WNUMber lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac BE IDou TOAPplicability WNUMber lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GALileo TOAPplicability WNUMber lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GPS TOAPbplicability WNUMber This setting is only available for Galileo and GPS satellites Determines the Week Number for which the selected almanac is used for time of applicability Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 198 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a c PH Almanac RINEX Configuration Return values lt WN gt integer Range 0 to 9999 0 53 Increment 1 RST 1488 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt WNUMber lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac BEIDou WNUMber lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GALileo WNUMber lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GPS WNUMber This setting is ony available for GPS and Galileo satellites Queries the week number of the selected almana
51. The enabled Real Time Projection assures the automatic projection of the navigation message i e the ephemeris set will contain valid data again Note Real Time Projection have to be disabled if assistance data will be generated Remote command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage RTPRojection on page 231 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 118 Satellite Navigation User Interface XA UJ jp Navigation Message Configuration Set To Almanac enabled only in User Localization mode The navigation message s parameters will be calculated according to the selected almanac Using this option as basis for further reconfiguration is recommended Remote command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PRESet on page 230 Project Navigation Message enabled only in User Localization mode Triggers the projection of the parameters of the navigation message The values of the TOE and TOC are calculated according to the selected current simulation time for System Time UTC as selected with the parameters Date dd mm yyyy and Time hh mm ss xxx The updated values of the ephemeris and clock correction are dis played Note Use this function prior to the generation of assistance data if RINEX files are not used The projection affects the parameters of the signal at the exact moment the satel
52. Time Shift Chips aes Time WiNJOW EE TOE eebe TOE tb Total POWET Trajectory description sseeeeee 296 Trajectory View Trigger Delay icone net rete ee nene anes ene Trigger Inhibit renornrrnnornrnnnnnnvonnnnnrnnannrnnnnnarnnnnnnrnnnnnnen Trigger Mode si LN SE No EEE EE Retrigger E Ia cs le GE CET 62 Trigger Source i Tropospheric Models severon rnt 112 Tunnels How to simlate rernm erro kane 44 Type ObSCUration ice rti cte eei ERR een 73 U Uninterrupted location fix 17 Update RF Frequency EE Urban canyon How to simulate 00 2 2 eeceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeaeeeseeaeeeteaees 44 Berni WEE 100 User in 150 V Vehicle DOSGRIPUGIN goce 63 ll m E 63 undi RE 72 TYPE 63 Vehicle description Vehicle description file Smoothening algorithm eeseeesess 28 Velocity Component description seeeseeesess 296 Velocity magnitude Definition in a xtd file seesssesss 296 Vertical obstacles CI DIO CIS cece se EE 76 Cutting T9 Highway CEDE 79 lie 79 Urban Canyon E 76 View Ww Waypoint Smooth movement rnsnnrnnnvnnnvennnvnnnnrennvnnnvrervvenenensnsene 70 Waypoint format Parameter definition in a xtd file waypointformat 296 Week Number tnr tnter 67 WGS84
53. Undo All Save Obstacles Configuration Table Standard functions for adding appending and removing table rows undo and save changes 3 3 4 Full Obscuration Settings This model is enabled in instrument equipped with option R amp S SMBV K92 This section comprises the parameters necessary to configure areas in that the satel lite signal is fully obscured like in tunnels Examples of predefined environments based on full obscuration are Bridge Parking and Tunnel Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 82 Satellite Navigation User Interface Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings EH GPS Obscuration and Auto Multipath Type Multiple Tunnels ear Environment Full Obscuration v Physical Model Obscuration only Reference Scale Distance km T Repetition Window 10 000 km 3 4 E 6 ri 8 3 4 5 5 7 8 0 0 5 H FL GEN SERT EN EE RE ME MT TE TET EG GEN BORES fr Position km Viewport from 0 000 fem to 10 000 fam Zoom Out Reference Scale Defines whether the obstacles positions are defined as distance in km or as time in S Note Changing between the two scale without saving the configuration leads to data loss Remote command subsystem OBSCuration FULL SCALe on page 185 Repetition Window Enables the repetition of the defined objects and determines the repetition period in km Remote command subsystem OBSCuration FULL RWINdow STATe on
54. Urban can yon vehicle type vehicle s aerodynamics vehicle s motion and attitude as well as antenna pattern With the User Environment parameters you can configure the near field parameters Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 62 Satellite Navigation User Interface t GNSS Main Dialog To access this settings 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS 2 Select Simulation Mode Auto Localization User Localization 3 Navigate to User Environment Vehicle Type Sets the vehicle type e g Pedestrian Land Vehicle Ship Aircraft Spacecraft HIL Hardware in the Loop The selected vehicle type determines e the GNSS application e g automotive with Pedestrian and Land Vehicle e the main elements of the vehicle as vehicle description file localization data Obscuration and Multipath models and antenna pattern body mask When changing the selected vehicle type a corresponding predefined vehicle descrip tion files as well as motion files if necessary are selected in order to ensure that the simulated receiver motion maps to the vehicle type and the particular application e g aeronautics with Aircraft Aircraft Spacecraft A vehicle motion profile is pre selected Simulation with a static loca tion simulation is not possible HIL Hardware in the Loop There are no predefined files available T
55. amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S AMU200A is abbreviated as R amp S AMU R amp S9SMATE200A is abbreviated as R amp S SMATE R amp S SMBV100A is abbreviated as R amp S SMBV R amp S9SMJ100A is abbreviated as R amp S SMJ R amp S9SMU200A is abbreviated as R amp S SMU R amp S SMW200A is abbreviated as R amp S SMW R amp S WinIQSIM2 is abbreviated as R amp S WinlQSIM2 Satellite Navigation Contents 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 12 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 2 1 7 2 1 8 2 1 9 2 1 10 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 32 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 4 2 4 1 2 5 2 5 1 2 52 2 5 3 2 5 4 2 5 5 Contents Preface 9 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eren nnne nennen ennt nin nn nennen nnn nn 9 Typographical ConventiOnS ssrrrrnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 10 General DescripfiOn eeececce cocer eere eene see ceto EEEREReEeE Eete es 11 Functional Overview of the Basic Realtime GNSS Options GPS Galileo GLO NASS and BeiDOU
56. amp s bsystemi SATellite GRIPEN muiden edel 214 Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings lt subsystem gt SATellite COUN 0 cccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeee nese eee ee ees nennt nh nh nene nnne n nnns sns 214 SUbsvsiemz GATelite at CAChate e essent nnns nennen 214 subsystem SATellite st DSHifi c rode denne hedera Laune eek dende 215 lt s bsystem gt SATellitesst gt DURGUN eene nennt 215 lt s bsystem gt SA Telitesst gt FNUMBET nirani aaa aaa nh nnn nennt 215 subsystem SATellite st FREQUuency cien ledeesecaleceseenaladeuestadsdueeereveeteerens 216 subsystemPisSATellitessi CPHase ou ici Eno si ne exor ad area Pa krana 216 subsystem SATellite st ICPHase essere nnne rerit nennen 216 subsystem gt SATellte lt stPORAET mm TTT 216 lt s bsystem gt SATellite lt sst gt MODUIA OM eee iaieiiea kiada 217 amp subsystemP SAT elite ssi ORBI E 217 es bsysteme SA Telitesst gt PRANG 2 2e pacco dao asas cuan End gane pede dae a aaa aa 217 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PRBIAS vn nise Fk tuo teca duree deities 218 amp subsystemb Re 218 subsystem SATellite st SIGNal sisse nennen nnnm nn nennen 218 lt s bsystem gt SATelitesst gt STANdard trennen enne nnns 218 subsystem SATellite st S FATe 1 trier A cene cng Rad EHE OREL EEN SEMI crea 219 lt subsysten gt SATelile lt st SYD ET 219 SE e
57. fcode GPS Galileo 1 023 MHZ and foode Beibou 2 046 MHz e Glonass on L1 E1 band fresutting Tcode 1 t fooppier foanat k 562500 Hz e Glonass on L2 band fresutting Tcode S 1 poppler I foanat k 437500 Hz Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt CACRate on page 214 Resulting P Code Chip Rate R amp S SMBV only Indicates the currently valid values for the chip rate of the P code The relevant change to the chip rate of the P code is carried out automatically if the Doppler shift is changed The resulting P chip rate is calculated according to the following fp resutting fp 1 t poppler foana where fang is as set with parameter RF Band and fp is fixed to 10 230 MHz Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PCRate on page 216 3 7 Global Signal Configuration To access this settings 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS 2 Select Simulation Mode gt Auto Localization 3 Select Satellite Configuration gt Global Signal Configuration Use the provided settings to determine the type of signal a SV ID will use in the moment the corresponding satellite becomes visible Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 109 Satellite Navigation User Interface Global Signal Configuration amp GPS Global Signal Configurations m EK SY ID Signal Coupling On GPS Configuration Signals The dialog displays
58. gt lt property datavectorhastimestamp yes gt lt property coordsystem geod wgs84 gt lt property endbehaviour return gt lt property duration 2 0 gt lt general gt lt waypoints gt lt waypointvector lt waypointvector data 0 05 144 lt waypointvector data 0 10 144 lt waypointvector data 0 15 144 lt waypointvector data 0 20 144 lt waypointvector data 0 25 144 lt waypointvector data 0 30 144 lt waypointvector data 0 35 144 lt waypointvector data 0 40 144 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 66632247233 100 000000039116 gt 66630889914 100 00000008475 gt 66628990241 100 000000149943 gt 66626548785 100 000000235625 gt 66623566284 100 000000339001 gt 66620043635 100 000000461936 gt 666159819 100 000000603497 gt 66611382304 100 000000762753 gt I Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 299 Satellite Navigation Annex I D User Environment Files waypointvector data 0 45 144 96663104183 37 8166606246233 100 000000941567 gt waypointvector data 0 50 144 966627163843 37 8166600575235 100 000001138076 waypointvector data 0 55 144 96662329885 37 8166594371019 100 000001354143 gt A 1 2 lt waypoints gt trajectory Vehicle Description Files Used for Smoothening The vehicle description files use the file extension xvd The following is a simple
59. like the Google Earth Google Maps etc For description of the file format refer to the Google Earth documentation Moving vs motion All these file formats describe a moving receiver and are suitable for the simulation of a movement from one waypoint to the next Howerver only the more extensive file format xtd is suitable to describe a motion including high dynamics e g velocity and attitude In instruments equipped with the R amp S SMBV K103 option this file format simulates additionally a body rotation and atti tude profile of the receiver s vehicle See also chapter 2 8 Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Spinning and Attitude Simulation R amp S SMBV K103 on page 33 Static Multipath Signal Generation The instrument provides the possibility to simulate the GNSS signal of one or more sat ellites that undergoes static multipath propagation effects The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 9 Generating Multipath Scenarios on page 40 Configuration of the Atmospheric Parameters In instruments equipped with the option GNSS enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 the iono spheric navigation parameters and both ionospheric and tropospheric models of the installed GNSS standards are enabled for configuration A possible application of the activation and deactivation of the ionospheric and tropo spheric models is to simulate the variation in the pseudorange of the corresponding GNSS satellites The ionospheric navigat
60. muraverevenererernrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnenernrnnnrnnnn 204 SubsvstemzNAVigoaton TCOhverslon UTCSuAZERo nent 204 SubsvstemzNAVigoaton TCOhverslon UTCSu DATEN 204 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SLSTransition S TATe sss 205 SubsvstemzNAVigoaton TCOhlverslon LEAP DATE 205 SubsvstemzNAVigoaton TCOhlverslon LEAPR GtConds eene 205 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SIGN cesses 205 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SYNC sss 206 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion lt GNSS gt AONE lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion BEIDou AONE lt AOne gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GALileo AONE lt AOne gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GLONass AONE lt AOne gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GPS AONE lt AOne gt For lt subsystem gt SMODe STATic or USER defines the 15 order term of polynomial A4 Parameters lt AOne gt integer Range 8388608 to 8388607 Increment 1 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the time conversion and leap sec onds settings on page 201 Manual operation See Time Conversion Parameters on page 90 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion lt GNSS gt AZERo lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion BEIDou AZERo lt AZero gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GALileo AZERo lt AZero gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GLONass AZERo lt AZero gt lt subsystem g
61. subsystem POWer REFerence SATellite RST USER Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Manual operation See Power Mode on page 98 lt subsystem gt POWer REFerence POWer lt ReferencePower gt Sets the power level that is used as a reference for the calculation of the power level of the satellites Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 222 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands H 9 He U Power Tuning and Power Settings Parameters ReferencePower float Range 145 to 20 Increment 0 01 RST 30 Default unit dBm Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Manual operation See Reference Power on page 99 lt subsystem gt POWer REFerence SATellite lt Sat gt Sets the satellite used as a reference for the calculation of the power levels of the sat ellites in auto power mode Value 1 corresponds to N A Parameters lt Sat gt integer Range 1 to 24 Increment 1 RST 1 Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Manual operation See Reference Satellite on page 99 lt subsystem gt POWer REFerence STANdard lt Standard gt Queries sets the reference standard Parameters lt Standard gt GPS GALileo GLONass BElDou RST GPS Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Ma
62. subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TOC sssssssssssss subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris AODO sese subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIC sssssssss subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIS sssssssss subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CLTMode esses subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRC suse subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRS esses lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUC us subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUS sss subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ECCentricity sssse 235 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris F IFLag esee 235 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth sees 236 uae uL T MO KR p FGr sEii Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 318 Satellite Navigation List of Commands a lt subsystem
63. time is defined e With lt datavectorhastimestamp yes gt the time stamp of a waypoint is retrieved from the lt waypointvector data as the first data vector parameter e With lt datavectorhastimestamp no gt the time stamp is internally calculated based on the follwoing rule The time stamp of first waypoint is T 0 the time stamp of the waypointy is Ty N 1 lt timeresolution gt lt coordsystem gt Defines the coordinate system enu cart ecef or geod wgs84 used by the definition of the waypointvector data lt timeresolution gt If lt datavectorhastimestamp no gt applies implicitly time stamps to waypoints Otherwise the time stamp is retrieved automatically see lt datavectorhastimestamp gt lt enurefpoint gt Coordinates of the reference waypoint in ENU format lt endbehaviour gt Determines the behavior of the moving object at the end of the trajectory The possible values are jump return stop lt attitudeunit gt Defines the unit rad or deg the attitude is expressed in lt noofway points gt Number of the used waypoints vectors Use the parameter to minimize the size of the waypoint without actually deleting the waypoints EES Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 297 Satellite Navigation Annex Van n User Environment Files Container T
64. 0000000400 0 x 2831 0 0000000 00 0 x 246 0000000300 0 x 246 0 0000006 00 Ox 2431 00000006400 0 x 2431 0 000000e 09 BeiDou Satellite x 2830 1 792908e 04 x 2840 0 000000e 00 x 2830 0 000000e400 GLONASS Satellite Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 Clock Correction Parameters 0 x01 0 000000e 00 18000 x 23 1 4400000 05 0x2 86 0 000000e 00 4096 x 2450 3 637979e 12 1482850 x 2438 1726276904 BeiDou Satellite 117 Satellite Navigation User Interface TOa wnn e B_GD E1 5B T OC E1 58 a f2 E1 E5B a fi E1 58 a f0 E1 58 E1B DVS E58 DVS E18 HS E5B HS lt lt lt Hide Details Navigation Message Configuration INAV Parameters FNAV Parameters lt lt lt Hide Details 0 x 232 0 000000e 00 B GD E1 E5A 0 x 2 32 0 000000e 00 1020 x 60 6 1200000 04 T OC E1 E5A D x 60 0 000000e 00 0 x 2 59 0 0000008 00 a Q E1 E5A O x 2 59 0 000000e 00 256 x 2446 3 637979e 12 a fl E1 E5A 0 x 2 46 0 0000008 00 2686976 x 2 34 1564026e 04 a f0 E1 E5A D x2 34 0 000000e 00 mms E5A DVS 7 E5A HS 0 e K 0 Ss Galileo Satellite Galileo Satellite SV ID Standard Displays the SV ID and the navigation standard the navigation message is related to
65. 05 1 1 1 15 12 Receiver Position km Viewport from 0 000 km to 1 200 km v Zoom Out Fig 3 3 Roadside planes settings on the basis of a predefined suburban area Receiver Height Offset Determines the start position of a receiver in terms of height offset relative to the refer ence point used to define the roadside planes Tip Use this parameters to redefine thethe vehicle s height relative to the configured obstacles geometry without changing the obstacles definition in the table Obstacles Configuration Table Remote command subsystem OBSCuration RPL ROFFset HEIGht on page 184 Repetition Window Enables the repetition of the defined objects and determines the repeating period in km Remote command subsystem OBSCuration RPL RWINdow STATe on page 184 subsystem OBSCuration RPL RWINdow on page 184 Set Length to Infinite If enabled assumes planes with infinite width Enable this parameter if a cutting sce nario is simulated Remote command subsystem OBSCuration RPL ILENgth on page 184 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 80 Satellite Navigation User Interface a Hr mr EEE EEE En i ri Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings Planes File Provides an access to the standard File Select dialog to select a user defined description file xs buil Remote command subsystem OBSCuration RP CATalog PRI EDefined on page 183 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration R
66. 08 214 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands TP H P Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings Usage Query only Manual operation See Resulting Start Chip Rate on page 109 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt DSHift lt DopplerShift gt Defines the Doppler shift of the simulated signal of the satellite Parameters lt DopplerShift gt float Range 100 0e3 to 100 063 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit Hz Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Doppler Shift on page 108 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt DURation Queries the time the satellite s elevation is higher than 2 5 5 7 5 or 10 starting at the first simulation moment of the satellite of interest as selected with the command subsystem SEMask Return values Duration float Default unit s Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Usage Query only Manual operation See Duration Elev gt 2 5 5 7 5 10 on page 106 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt FNUMber lt FrequencyNumber gt The command sets or queries the frequency number depending on the used data source The parameter corresponds to the sub carrier used to modulate the GLONASS satellite Parameters
67. 1 1 1eeccre nicer eiert aKa dn tana dn EREA 13 Real time oeneratton eene ener enne nnne nenne 13 Multi satellite GNSS eional mmm eren 13 GNSS System Configurations eene 15 Multiple almanace enne nn nennen rennen nennen 15 On the fly configuration of the satellites copnstelatton nn 16 Signal generation with projection of the ephemeris navigation data 16 Dynamic exchange of satellites mem 16 Flexible power configuration and automatic dynamic power control 17 Simulation of uninterrupted location TN 17 Real Time S P O T dsplawy eene nmn nnne 18 Realtime Option GPS P Code R amp S SMBV K93 eene 18 Enhancements of Realtime Assisted GNSS Options GPS Galileo and GLONASS eene cui MER teni ment EE 19 Support of RINEX nes 19 Full Set of Pre defined Test Scenarios as Basis for A GPS A GLONASS A GNSS Pro tocol and Conformance Test Cases eene enne 20 Custom build Scenarios cape Led tek bert elk Mec Re e Rd dg 22 Generation of assistance data 22 Realtime Option Extension to 12 24 Satellites R amp S SMBV K91 K96 23 Channel Bu dgel 1 1 cerdo ASSEN deter daa dee reta aic Dia don ida 23 Functional Overview of Realtime Option GNSS Enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 26 Moving Scena S REO 26 Static Multipath Signal Generation 27 Configuration of the Atmospheric Parameters 27 Time Conversion Configuraton nennen nenne 27 Leap Second Sim
68. 1600000 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example See example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt RT RLOCation COORdinates DMS lt TimeBasis gt Year lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Queries the coordinates of the receiver location in DMS format for the selected moment of time The required query parameters depend on the selected time basis Query parameters lt TimeBasis gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC lt Year gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 275 Satellite Navigation Day Hour Minutes Seconds lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Return values lt LongitudeDeg gt lt LongitudeMin gt lt LongitudeSec gt lt LongitudeDir gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 Remote Control Commands S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 float required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 integer required for TimeBasis Range 0 to 529947 Increment 1 G
69. 24 Modernized Glonass Satellites touring the globe Together with GPS up to 54 GNSS Satellites are provided which will improve the availability and consequently the navigation performance in high urban areas Lower L Band Upper L Band MHz 9 do N d Ai pl aam WAN Gr US 9 ce be AT AS Jo a oN qa S 2 A S OX O 6 DO x9 1G PN PP mar UN ME NP EN UN GPS navigation bands Galileo navigation bands fGIBONASSIVIgatiombanidS BeiDou navigation bands Fig 2 1 GNSS frequency bands e COMPASS BeiDou The fully deployed BeiDou Navigation Satellite System BDS is a Chinese satellite navigation system This navigation system is also know as BeiDou 2 and is expec ted in 2020 The BDS is a global satellite navigation systems that uses a constella tion of 35 satellites to cover the globe This constellation includes 5 geostationary orbit satellites GEO and 30 non geostationary satellites 27 in medium earth orbit MEO and 3 in inclined geosynchronous orbit IGSO The BDS uses frequency allocated in the E1 E2 E5B and E6 bands e Assisted GNSS A GNSS Assisted GNSS A GNSS was introduced to different mobile communication standards to significantly reduce the Time To First Fix TTFF of a user equipment UE containing a GNSS receiver This is achieved by transmitting information assistance data mainly about the satellites directly from a base station to the UE For example a stand alone GPS receiver needs about 30 60 seconds
70. 264 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton GL Ohass TOADataTOWeek nennen 264 subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData TOWeek essent 264 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData WNUMBber esses 265 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData WNUMBber cesses 265 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass TOAData WNUMber sse 265 subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData WNUMBber cesses 265 subsystem ADGeneration ACQuisition DFO Rmat essere 265 subsystem ADGeneration ACQuisition CREate cesis 265 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton Al ManacChHRtate nennen 266 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration UTC CRE ate senem 266 Subsvstemz ADGeneratonNAvVlgoation ChRtate rn nenentrerereeorerene 266 subsystem ADGeneration IONospheric CREate essen 267 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands H r gcc Assistance Data Settings subsystem ADGeneration BElDou SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCk lt TimeOffset gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS SVID lt ch gt ACQuisition BLOCk lt TimeOffset gt Queries part of the current assistance data settings Query parameters lt TimeOffset gt Int Sets the offset of time to the beginning of the acquisition data generation set with the command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME or the command lt subsystem gt
71. 264 eubevstemz ADGeneratton BE IDou TOAData WN Mier 265 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo LOCation COORdinates DECimal sese 260 ubevstemz ADGeneratton GA jeo LOCaton COObRdnates DMS 260 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo LOCation S Y NChronize eese 259 ubevstemz ADGeneratton GA jeo LOCaton URADus nennen 262 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo SVID SYNChronize sse 259 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCKQ eene 257 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo SVID ch SAData essen 257 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo SVID ch STATe sse nennen nnne 259 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo S Y NChronize esee nennen 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData DATE 262 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData DURation esses 264 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData RESolution essen 264 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData GvhNChrontze sss 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData Bas enne nnne 262 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData TIME 263 ubevstemz ADGenerattonGAl jeo TOADataTOWeek nennen nnns 264 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOADataWhNlUlMier nennen nena 265 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass LOCation COORdinates DEdCimal
72. 440m with rounded corners defined in table 1 1 and figure 1 1 The initial reference is first defined followed by acceleration to final speed of 100 km h in 250 m The UE then maintains the speed for 400 m This is followed by deceleration to final speed of 25 km h in 250 m The UE then turn 90 degrees with turning radius of 20 m at 25 km h This is followed by acceleration to final speed of 100 km h in 250 m The sequence is repeated to complete the rectangle Table 1 1 Trajectory Parameters for Moving Scenario and Periodic Update Performance test case Parameter Distance m Speed km h lias hs los los 20 25 hz ha loo bog 250 25 to 100 and 100 to 25 lia 400 100 log 900 100 PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 294 Satellite Navigation Annex User Environment Files bib lg lag la Fig 1 1 Moving Scenario The following is the content of the waypoint file The start tag MOVEMENT FILE is a mandatory element for each movement descrip tion If this tag is omitted the instrument interprets the coordinates described in the waypoint file as static one KkkkKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK MOVEMENT FILE KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK a oe All empty lines or statements starting with will be ignored oe oe This file format is used to load a continuous movement File into the signal generator Enter the WGS 84 Reference Point s Coordinates S REFERENC
73. 571 v10 0 The file lists all possible satellites available from the source almanac file See chapter 2 10 8 Generating GNSS Assistance Data on page 39 for description of the workflow for generation of assistance data Remote command subsystem ADGeneration ALManac CREate on page 266 Generate lonospheric File Access the Select lonospheric File dialog for storing the generated ionospheric model The generated ionospheric file is file with extension xs ion and specified file name The parameters listed in this file see the example in table 3 21 are according to the parameters used for describing the near satellite ionospheric model e With GPS Klobuchar parameters are exported e With Galileo Galileo lonosphere parameters are exported e With GLONASS file is empty since GLONASS satellites do not transmit any infor mation about the ionosphere Table 3 21 Contents of the generated ionospheric file GPS Parameter Unit alpha 0 seconds alpha 1 sec semi circles alpha 2 sec semi circles 2 alpha 3 sec semi circles 3 beta 0 seconds Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 135 Satellite Navigation User Interface Assistance Data Generation Parameter Unit beta 1 sec semi circles beta 2 sec semi circles 2 beta 3 sec semi circles 3 See chapter 2 10 8 Generating GNSS Assistance Data on page 39 for description of the workflow for generation of assistance dat
74. 7 SV Accuracy URA Index F_T SV Health B_n 1_n o Age of Ephemeris Page P1 omn zl Tb Index 2 Tb Interval 10 30 00 11 00 00 TOE tb 10 45 00 P c Xn 1257 134 Yn 26 572 678 Zn 449713 XDOT n 33809635 YDOT n 200273 ZDOT n 114440 XDDOT n v YDDOT n e ZDDOT n Io x 2 11 6 138350e 02 x 2411 1 297494e 04 x 2411 2 195661e404 x 2420 3 232608e 00 x 2420 1 995776e 00 x 2420 1 091404e400 x 2830 0 000000e400 x 2830 0 000000e 00 x 2830 0 000000e 00 GLONASS Satellite p clock Correction Parameters lt lt lt Hide Details IT GD 0 x 231 00000006400 1 OG 31950 x24 5 1120002 05 ap 0 x 2455 0 0000002 00 afl 8 x23 0 000000e 00 ao Ox 2431 0 000000e 00 GPS Satellite Clock Correction Parameters lt lt lt Hide Details TAU n a 0 192512 GAMMA n a fl v Delta TAU n v En vo lt lt lt Hide Details SV Accuracy URA Index SV Health ODC IODE TOE MO Delta N e SARTA OMEGA 0 io omega OMEGA_DOT IDOT C uc C us C rc C rs C ic C is Ephemeris Parameters 18000 x 29 1 440000e 05 1588 446 504 x 2431 7 3967806 01 0x2 43 00000006300 70561792 x 2433 8214474e 03 2768220717 x 2 19 52799626403 656194945 x 2 31 3055648601 656 175559 x 2 31 3 055556e 01 334053012 x 2 31 1 555555e 01 22976 x 2 43 2 612069e 09 0x2 3 0 0000006 00 0x2 3
75. 710 0 User Def 710 0 User Def Mat Prop Permittivity D 710 0 User Def 0 EN 710 0 User Def ne 710 0 User Def D Delete Undo All 710 0 User Def 510 0 User Dei Save Direction axis Obstacles Configuration Table Determines the alignment of the vertical obstacle parallel to OX or to the OY axis First Edge X Y Coordinates m Obstacles Configuration Table For vertical obstacles sets the coordinate of the start point first edge of the obstacle in meters First edge has the lowest coordinate value on its direction axis The coordi nate is interpreted on the OX or OY axis Length Height Obstacles Configuration Table Defines the obstacles length and height in meters The obstacle is parallel to the Direction axis Material Obstacles Configuration Table Defines the material the obstacle is build from Available are Glass Concrete Wood Gypsum Formica Marble Dry Wall Brick Permittivity Power Loss Obstacles Configuration Table Displays defines the material property permittivity or power loss for the selected mate rial This value is a measure for the reflection caused by the obstacle Alignment Filter Obstacles Configuration Table Filters the display of all obstacles for that the selected criteria is fulfilled Material Property Obstacles Configuration Table Define whether the material is defined by it
76. 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Example Configuring a RINEX file The following examples use GPS entry standard SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation RINex GPS FILE var user Lists GNSS GPS Rinex GPS Week585 Day0 10n SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation RINex GPS IMPort SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation RINex GPS UUAState SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation RINex GPS STATe ON Some commands of the following description do not apply to the GLONASS satellites If so it is explicitly pointed out subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS FILE essen 195 SubsvstemzNAVigaton AL ManacBE IDouEILE nennen 195 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GALileo FILE eeeesesee eene 195 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GLONass FILE eevvvovororvrernrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenennenennnnenen 195 lt s bsystem gt NAVigatio AL ManacGPSEILE aiaa aa iaa aia aiaa 195 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS DATE BEGIn esee 196 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac BEIDou DATE BEGIN cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenenenes 196 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GALileo DATE BEGIN ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeananaeaes 196 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GPS DATE BEGin rnnnnnnnnnonnnonnvnvnnnvenevnrererarnrnrnnnnn 196 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt DATE END AA 196 apu c C LC C C d F M F BSINT
77. Accuracy URA Index Ia SV Health In lope 0 100E 0 TOE 0 x 24 0 000000e 00 M0 0 x 2 31 0 000000e 00 Delta N 0 x 2 43 0 000000e 00 e 0 x 233 0 000000e 00 SQRT A 100000 x 2 9 1 907349e 01 OMEGA 0 0 x 231 0 000000e 00 io x 231 0 0000008 00 omega D x 2431 0 000000e 00 OMEGA DOT 0 x 29 43 0 000000e 00 IDOT 0 x 243 0 000000e 00 C uc 0 x 2 29 0 000000e 00 C us 0 x 20 29 0 000000e 00 C rc 0 x 2 5 0 000000e 00 C rs 0 x 245 0 000000e 00 C ic 0 x 2 29 0 000000e 00 C is 0 x 2 29 0 000000e 00 SF1 Reserved 1 0 SF1 Reserved 2 0 SEI Reserved 3 0 SF1 Reserved 4 0 aono SV Config Ia GPS Satellite User Interface Navigation Message Configuration Ephemeris Parameters Hide Details SISA In IODnav o 10Da 0 TOE sto Mo Io Delta N o e Io SQRT A 2852483236 OMEGA D 763549932 io 668 106 027 omega Io OMEGA DOT 46442 IDOT o C uc o C us o C rc D C rs o C ic o C is o x 60 6 120000e 04 x 2431 0 000000e 00 x 2443 0 000000e 00 x 2433 0 000000e 00 X 2 19 5 440680e403 x 2 31 3 555556e 01 x 2 31 3 111111e 01 x 2431 0 000000e 00 x 2843 5 279844e 09 x 243 0 000000e 00 x 2429 0 000000e 00 x 2429 0 000000e 00 x 2 5 0 000000e400 x 2 5 0 000000e 00 x 2429 0 000000e 00 x 2429 0 000000e 00 Galileo Satellite Ephemeris Parameters lt lt lt Hide Details Satellite Ephemeris Type M GLONASS M
78. CD Communications Digital Selective Calling DSC CM Computer Memory Data outdated CS Communications Satellite CT Communications Radio Telephone MF HF CV Communications Radio Telephone VHF CX Communications Scanning Receiver DE DECCA Navigation DF Direction Finder EP Emergency Position Indicating Beacon EPIRB ER Engine Room Monitoring Systems GP Global Positioning System GPS GL GLONASS HC Heading Magnetic Compass HE Heading North Seeking Gyro HN Heading Non North Seeking Gyro ll Integrated Instrumentation IN Integrated Navigation LA Loran A LC Loran C Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 306 Satellite Navigation Annex m D AA A 4 1 Used Algorithms ID Meaning MP Microwave Positioning System outdated OM OMEGA Navigation System Example of NMEA File GPVTG T M 0 000 N 0 000 K A 23 GPGGA 215810 00 3540 00066 N 13944 99611 E 1 04 1 61 6 8 M 39 4 M 5E GPGSA A 3 06 09 04 10 2 47 1 61 1 87 01 GPGSV 4 1 14 29 48 312 26 47 312 06 35 302 47 09 18 238 47 71 GPGSV 4 2 14 27 47 312 13 50 118 04 72 181 47 30 48 312 76 GPGSV 4 3 14 14 39 070 10 12 050 47 31 48 312 07 64 349 12 GPGSV 4 4 14 25 47 312 28 48 312 7E SGPGLL 3540 00066 N 13944 99611 E 215810 00 A A 69 GPZDA 215810 00 28 04 2023 00 00 64 SGPRMC 215811 00 A 3540 00066 N 13944 99611 E 0 000 280423
79. CItMode REServed PCODe CACode REServed Reserved for future use PCODe Carrier L2 f L2 1 2276 GHz is modulated by P code BPSK CACode Carrier L2 f_L2 1 2276 GHz is modulated by C A code BPSK RST PCODe Manual operation See GPS Ephemeris Parameters on page 121 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRC lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRC lt Crc gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRC lt Crc gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRC Crc Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correction Term to the Orbit Radius Parameters Crc integer Range 32768 to 32767 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRS lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRS lt Crs gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRS lt Crs gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRS lt Crs gt Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Orbit Radius Parameters lt Crs gt integer Range 32768 to 32767 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUC lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUC lt Cuc gt lt su
80. Configuration Time Conversion Parameters Scale Factor 2 30 2 20 Scaled Value 0 000000e 00 0 000000e 00 0 000000e 00 at o 0 0 Scale Factor 24 50 24 50 24 50 0 000000e 00 0 000000e 00 0 000000e 00 Scale Factor ee 3600 Scaled Value 8 640000e 04 0 000000e 00 0 000000e 00 me Um 0 Leap Second Configuration Current Leap Seconds Ref 1980 Simulate Leap Second Transition jv On Next Leap Second Date 21 08 2012 S 1 Y UTC UTC SU UTC SU Reference Date 20 08 2012 0 x2 10 0 000 0 s 0 x216 0 000 000 s msd The time conversion is performed according to the following formula turc tg delta tyrc modulo 86400 where delta tyrc and fg are as follows delta tyrc delta t stAgtA te Tort 604800 WN WN and te taps OF tGalileo The GNSS implementation in the R amp S WinIQSIM2 is a simplified offline version of the real time one and provides the capability to generate an one satellite generic signal Therefore the time conversion parameters table is adjusted accordingly to one satellite in R amp S WinIQSIM2 You find the differences explicitly stated in the description Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 89 Satellite Navigation User Interface W m C amp eQqet Time Conversion Configuration Time Conversion Parameters Configuration of the time conversion p
81. Day gt integer Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Usage Query only Options R amp S SMx AMU K294 R amp S SMBV K94 Manual operation See UTC UTC SU on page 91 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 204 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands RORE U m Time Conversion Configuration lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SLSTransition STATe State Enables disables the simulation of the leap second transition Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST Off Manual operation See Leap Second Configuration on page 90 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion LEAP DATE Year Month Day Defines the date of the next UTC time correction Parameters Year integer Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Example See example Configuring the time conversion and leap sec onds settings on page 201 Options R amp S SMBV K92 Manual operation See Leap Second Configuration on page 90 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SEConds Seconds Defines the currently used leap second Parameters lt Seconds gt float Range 0 to 50 Increment 1 RST 15 Example See example Configuring the time conversion and leap sec onds settings on page 201 Manual operation See Leap Second Configuration on page 90 lt
82. Environment Files LINE 0 250 1 44675925925925925926 ARC 0 920 90 LINE 250 0 1 44675925925925925926 LINE 900 0 0 LINE 250 0 1 44675925925925925926 ARC 1400 920 90 LINE 0 250 1 44675925925925925926 LINE 0 400 0 LINE 0 250 1 44675925925925925926 ARC 1400 20 90 LINE 250 0 1 44675925925925925926 LINE 900 0 0 NE 250 0 1 44675925925925925926 SsEnd of Trajectory description A 1 1 3 NMEA Files as Source for Movement Information The NMEA movement information receiver fix location extracted from a standard NMEA file can be used as a source for the generation of the movement file of interest Refer to chapter A 3 NMEA Scenarios on page 306 for detailed description of the NMEA file format A 1 1 4 Trajectory Description Files The trajectory description files are supported by instruments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K92 For some of the file contents including attitude information the option R amp S SMBV K103 is additionally required The trajectory description files use the file extension xtd See example Trajectory description files in lt positiononly gt waypoint format on page 298 for a simple example of the file format The table 1 2 describes the used tags and parameters Table 1 2 Format of xtd file Container Tag name Parameter Description general info name Name of the trajectory Operating Manual 1173 1
83. GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV K essen 242 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV TOC sse 243 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us INAV AF gz 243 Subsvsiemz SGVlD schzs GAl ijeohMtGeagel DAGE uszINAV DBGD eneren 243 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE xus INAV E1BDVS ss 243 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E1BHS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 244 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us INAV E5BDVS uss 244 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us INAV EB5BHS sesess 244 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us INAV TOC eese 245 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection DTAU 245 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection EN 245 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection GAMN 245 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TAUN 246 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris AOEP 246 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth 246 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris P 247 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPH
84. KLOBuchar RST NONE Manual operation See lonospheric Model on page 112 subsystem ATMospheric lONospheric KLOBuchar ALPHa ch0 Alpha Sets the parameter alpha 0 alpha 3 of the satellite s navigation message Suffix ch0 0 3 Parameters Alpha integer Range 128 to 127 RST 0 Manual operation See Klobuchar Parameters on page 112 subsystem ATMospheric lONospheric KLOBuchar BETA ch0 Beta Sets the parameter beta O0 beta 3 of the satellite s navigation message Suffix lt ch0 gt 0 3 Parameters Beta integer Range 128 to 127 RST 0 Manual operation See Klobuchar Parameters on page 112 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric GPS lONospheric ALPHa lt ch0 gt Alpha Sets the parameter alpha 0 alpha 3 of the satellite s navigation message Suffix ch0 0 3 Parameters Alpha float Range 128 to 127 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GPS BeiDou lonospheric Parameters on page 112 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 251 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands De X v M m nPrq Atmospheric Configuration lt subsystem gt ATMospheric GPS lONospheric BETA lt ch0 gt Beta Sets the parameter beta 0 beta 3 of the satellite s navigation message Suffix ch0 0 3 Parameters Beta float Range 128 to 127 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GP
85. NAVigation ALManac GALileo FILE lt Almanac gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GLONass FILE lt Almanac gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GPS FILE lt Almanac gt Defines the almanac file for the navigation standard For details see Almanac Configuration on page 87 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands N J P H pe Almanac RINEX Configuration Parameters Almanac string The file name is sufficient to select a predefined almanac file or almanacs in the default directory The complete file path with file name and extension is required to select almanac files stored elsewhere Example See example Selecting an Almanac file on page 194 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt DATE BEGIn lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac BEIDou DATE BEGin lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GALileo DATE BEGin lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GPS DATE BEGin This setting is ony available for GPS and Galileo satellites Queries the start date of the week span of the selected almanac file for the navigation standard The file is selected using lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt FILE Return values lt Year gt integer Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Example BB GPS NAV
86. ODOT sess subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OMEQGa sess 239 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OZERo esses 239 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA ssssssssss 240 ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIDouNME Gsaoel PAG us TEPHemens TOE eerren 241 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris URA sese 241 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou bOMWer nnne nnns hints st nnnts AiE eaa NEn 220 subsystem GVlD zchz BEIDou GIN 220 subsystem SVID ch GALileo LIST 201 Subevstemz GVlD zchzs GAlleoMbPAThSTATe nee een ener nnne erret 207 Subevstemz GVlD zchzs GA leo MPAThTAP COUN enne nennen nnne 208 ubevstemz GVlD zchz GA leoMbPAThTAb ousz Case eene nennen 208 subsystem SVID ch GALileo MPATh TAP us DSHift essen 208 uacuum F dp FMFFF P P ts Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 316 Satellite Navigation List of Commands m H P uC lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo MPATh TAP lt us gt POWer is subsystem SVID ch GALileo MPATh TAP us TSHift essere lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch
87. OX axis is to the east and OY to North a value of 90 corresponds to OX orientation to the north and OY to West A compass sign shows the current direction to the north Remote command subsystem OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset MORientation on page 182 Obstacles File Provides an access to the standard File Select dialog to select a user defined obsta cles description file xs obst Remote command subsystem OBSCuration VOBS CATalog PREDefined on page 183 subsystem OBSCuration VOBS CATalog USER on page 183 subsystem OBSCuration VOBS FILE on page 183 View Type Change the display orientation of the model The available view types depend on the current near environmental model Table 3 4 Graphical representation of the urban canyon Side View OX Side View OY Wee Gong ewe veo E 30 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 450 600 650 700 750 500 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200 1250 Obstacles Fie 40 8 9 0 2 20 4 60 a 100 120 140 160 180 20 220 240 Obstacles Configuration Table Each vertical obstacle is defined in one table row The row index indicates the obstacle on the display view PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 78 Satellite Navigation User Interface 3 3 3 Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings 1st Edge 1st Edge Per 4 Hide Editor lt lt lt X Coord Y Coord Length Height mit Im im e Im Im tivity Ae Dir Filter Au D
88. P 0 T Display Type Trajectory Vie Real Time Information Time UTC 07 11 2010 17 09 00 400 Rec Loc 48 15450 N 11 58688 E 500 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 0 63 1 13 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 16 14 Azimuth deg Trajectory View Settings Satellite Standard Satellite SV ID 2 Time Offset Odays 00 00 00 J E A Time Window 24 hour DI 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Time h Elevation deg To query the satellite s position for the selected time use the SCPI commands lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt AZIMuth on page 269 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 141 Satellite Navigation User Interface Real Time S P O T lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt ELEVation on page 271 Example The figures in this section show the Real Time S P O T Sky View display of the same custom build GPS Galileo and GLONASS hybrid GNSS scenario with automatic exchange of the satellites but the second one is made around 15 min later compare the value of the parameter Time in both figures Sky View Start moment Sky View 15 min later E4 GPS Real Time SPOT DER Display Type Sky View E Real Time Information Rec Loc 48 14550 N 11 57726 E 500 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 1 00 1 99 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 04 15 E GPS Real Time S P 0 T Display Type Sky View M Sky View Real Time Information Rec Loc 48 15
89. P and C A P signals in the Satellite Configuration dialog Remote command subsystem UMGPs on page 193 GPS Anti Spoofing Enables Anti Spoofing flag in the GPS navigation message Remote command subsystem SATellite ASPoofing on page 193 Almanac Configuration Displays the settings of the selected almanac files per navigation standard One alma nac file can be selected per navigation standard Predefined or user almanac files can be loaded The following almanac files are supported e GPS and Galileo SEM files with data extension xxx a13 YUMA almanac files with data extension xxx alm These files describe GPS and Galileo almanacs whereas xxx denotes the day of a year Note Current GPS almanac data can be downloaded via the Internet and stored on the hard disk of the instrument U S Coast Guard Navigation Center GPS Homepage http www navcen uscg gov pageName gpsAlmanacs e Glonass Almanac files with data extension xxx agl Refer also to the download ftp site for Glonass almanacs ftp ftp glonass iac ru MCC ALMANAC When an almanac file is selected the time information of the file Week SEM and TOA is indicated in the table If RINEX file is not enabled the satellite specific informa tion ephemeris is also taken from the almanac The SEM and TOA are indicated in Greenwich Mean Time Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 87 Satellite Navigation User Interface OE
90. ROFFset X lt XOffset gt lt subsystem gt OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset Y lt YOffset gt lt subsystem gt O0BSCuration VOBS ROFFset HEIGht lt HeightOffset gt Determines the start position of a receiver in terms of height and X Y offset Parameters lt XOffset gt float Range 1500 to 1500 Increment 0 1 RST 0 lt YOffset gt float Range 1500 to 1500 Increment 0 1 RST 0 lt HeightOffset gt float Range 0 to 500 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example see example Selectng a vertical obscuration environment on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Receiver Offset on page 77 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset MORientation lt MapOrientation gt Represents the map orientation Parameters lt MapOrientation gt float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example SOURce1 BB GPS OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset MORientation 90 OX orientation to the north Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 182 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands A D U Obscuration and Auto Multipath Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Map Orientation on page 78 subsystem OBSCuration VOBS CATalog PREDefined subsystem OBSCuration RPL CATalog PREDefined Queries the names of the predefined files in the system directory Listed are only predefined obstacles descr
91. STATe lt subsystem gt NAVigation RIN X IMPOSt cccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeseaaeeeseaeeeseaeeesecaeeeseeeeeseneeeeeas subsystem NAVigation RINex UFNState esses en eren ense n ree nnns lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex UUAS tate eene enne nnne nnnn nennen sen rntn enne ubevstemzNAVioation GlMulaton DATE lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation BAS enne nennen rennen nena lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation TIME lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation TOWeeK nennen enne trennen rens nenne lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation WNUMber o lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion lt GNSS gt AONE emen nennen nnne subsystem NAVigation TCONversion GNSS AZERO sss enne nnne nnns enne eubevstemczNAVioaton TCOhNversion ONG TOTAL SubevstemzNAVioation TCOhversion OGNGG WNOT eene en nene subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion BEIDou AONE enne nnne nennt subsystem NAVigation TCOhNversion BE IDouAZERo rennen nennen subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion BEIDou TO subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion BEIDou WNOT rennen nennen nennt nnns nnne lt subsystem gt NAVigation T CONversion GALileo AONE s SubevstemzNAVioation TCOhversion GA eo AZERo subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion GA eo Of SubesvstemczNAVioaton TCOhNversion GA eo WO subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion GL OhNass AONE nnne nnne nennen subsystem NAVi
92. Satellite ID that corresponds to the record Doppler 0 order Zero Order Doppler Term Hz Hz term Doppler 15 order 1st order Doppler Term Hz sec Hz sec term Doppler Uncer Uncertainty Doppler Hz m s tainty Code Phase Code Phase chips ms or half Chip index at epoch Time of Transmission GPS Sat Time Integer Code Integer Code Phase ms Phase or ms unit index at epoch Time of Transmission GPS Sat Time GPS Bit Number Corresponding Bit number NA modulo 4 at epoch Time of Transmission GPS Sat Time Code Phase Correlator Code phase Search chips ms Search Window Radius Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 138 Satellite Navigation User Interface O w Real Time S P O T Parameter Description Unit Unit GPS BeiDou GLOANSS Galileo Azimuth Azimuth Angle of the Satellite in deg deg ENU orthonormal coordinate System centered at reference point Elevation Elevation Angle of the Satellite deg deg in ENU orthonormal coordinate System centered at reference point See chapter 2 10 8 Generating GNSS Assistance Data on page 39 for description of the workflow for generation of assistance data Remote command subsystem ADGeneration ACQuisition CREate on page 265 3 13 Real Time S P O T The parameters of the Real Time S P O T are only configurable for R amp S SM
93. Satellite Status transmitted on E1 B E1 Bpys of the Integ rity navigation message I NAV provided by E5b and E1 B signals Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 243 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands cc J A men Navigation Message Configuration Parameters lt Dvs gt integer Range 0 to 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo INAV Parameters on page 126 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E1BHS lt HS gt Defines the Signal Health Status for E1 E1 By 5 of the Integrity navigation message I NAV provided by E5b and E1 B signals Parameters HS integer Range 0 to 3 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo INAV Parameters on page 126 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E5BDVS lt Dvs gt Defines the Data Validity Satellite Status transmitted on E5b E5bpys of the Integrity navigation message I NAV Parameters lt Dvs gt integer Range 0 to 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo INAV Parameters on page 126 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E5BHS Hs Defines the Signal Health Status for E5b E5bjs of the Integrity navigation message I NAV provided by E5b and E1 B signals Parameters Hs integer Range 0 to 3 Increme
94. The instrument receives the synchronisation and reference clock signal from another instrument working in a master mode RST NONE BB GPS CLOC SYNC MODE MAST Defines the current instrument as the master for synchronization of the connected instruments See Sync Mode on page 152 Satellite Navigation Annex User Environment Files A Annex A 1 A 1 1 A 1 1 1 User Environment Files The R amp S SMBV supports different file formats that describe a moving receiver This section focus on e Movement or Motion Files ee e Vehicle Description Files Used for Smoothening e Antenna Pattern Body Mask Eiles Movement or Motion Files Waypoint File Format This file format is a list of coordinates longitude latitude altitude and a respective resolution in milliseconds see example 3GPP Performance Test Scenario 3 Mel bourne WGS84 geodetic coordinates on page 293 Example 3GPP Performance Test Scenario 3 Melbourne WGS84 geodetic coordinates The resolution command at the beginning of the format specifies the sampling interval to be used for the WGS84 geodetic coordinates list The resolution gives the time in ms between two consecutive waypoints RESOLUTION 50 8 8 8 8 8 96663104183 37 8166606246233 100 00000094 966627163843 37 96662329885 37 8166594371019 100 000001354143 966619448018 37 966615612505 37 966611793469 37
95. The switching is scheduled only if the following rules are respected e the selected lt AntennaId gt is specified in the selected antenna pattern file e the SCPI command is sent at least 5 seconds ahead of the execution time speci fied with the parameter lt ElapsedTime gt e the execution of last successfully scheduled SCPI command subsystem RT UPDate ANTenna is completed e the selected AntennaId is different than the currently active antenna different from lt antennaId gt specified in the last executed SCPI command different from the initially selected AntennaId if this is the first command Note The listed prerequisites for correct real time antenna switching are mandatory If the SCPI command fails to abide by those rules it will be ignored Parameters lt ElapsedTime gt float Elapsed time from the simulation start time at which a switch to the defined AntennarId is performed Range 0 to 99999999 Increment 0 01 Default unit s Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 168 Localization Data lt Antennald gt integer Use the command lt subsystem gt APATtern ANTenna LIST to query the antenna IDs defined in the currently selected antenna pattern file Range 1 to 100 Increment 1 Example see example Selecting an antenna file on page 165 Usage Event Options R amp S SMBV K102 Manual operation See Antenna Pattern Body Mask File on page 64 4 4 Localization Data Example
96. Use Common RF Frequency on page 86 lt subsystem gt UMGPs lt State gt Enables the configuration of GPS signals modulates with P code see lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt SIGNal Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Options R amp S SMBV K93 Manual operation See Use Position Accuracy P Code GPS on page 87 lt subsystem gt SATellite ASPoofing State Activates anti spoofing flag in the GPS navigation message Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 193 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Almanac RINEX Configuration Example SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite ASPoofing ON Manual operation See GPS Anti Spoofing on page 87 4 9 Almanac RINEX Configuration Example Selecting an Almanac file The following examples use GPS entry standard It is assumed that a RF Band com mon for the GNSS standards is selected SOURCe1 BB GPS HYBRid GALileo STATe ON SOURcel BB GPS NAVigation ALManac GPS FILE GPS SEM585 txt SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation ALManac GALileo FILE GAL Yuma585 txt SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation ALManac GLONass FILE GLO 585 agl SOURce1 BB GPS SVID GPS LIST Response 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 SOURce1 BB GPS SVID GALileo LIST Response 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 SOURce1 BB GPS SVID GLONass LIST Response 1 2 5 8
97. and UP ENU coordinates are then provided m The last argument is the start velocity in m s ARC E N Angle Specifies a 2 Dimensional ARC East North with the first two argu ments representing the center of the ARC m in the Cartesian basis The last argument specifies the angle in degrees of the Arc Starting the current location Angle sign is significant since it indicates positive direction against clock movement or negative direction same as clock movement The end edge of the arc represents the new current location Velocity doesn t change when using an ARC command LINE AE AN Acceleration Specifies a 2 Dimensional Line starting the current location as the first edge and Current loc E AE Current loc N AN as the second edge m Constant acceleration deceleration can be specified in the last argument e g 0 means constant velocity Unit for acceleration is m s2 The second edge is again used as the current location for the next command The speed at this second edge is also used as the start speed for the next command STAY Time Stay at the current location for Time period ms Example Example of Waypoint File This example explains a waypoint file in the second format for the case of 3GPP Per formance Test Scenario 3 Melbourne as described in 3GPP 34 108 v 8 0 0 3GPP 34 171 v 7 0 1 The GPS signals simulate the GPS receiver moving on a rectangular trajectory of 940m by 1
98. are considered only in Auto Power Mode See chapter 3 6 1 Power Configuration on page 92 for information about the power calculation Intra Standard Tuning Intra Standard power settings are provided for GPS mixed signals The C A signal is allways used as Power Reference Set to 0 Intra Standard Tuning Sets the power relations between the signal components to 0 dB Remote command subsystem POWer INTRa GPS PZERo on page 226 Set to Standard Intra Standard Tuning Sets the power relation between the signals belonging to the same navigation standard according to the relation determined in the specifications Table 3 9 Intra Standard Tuning Parameter Value C A P 3 dB Remote command subsystem POWer INTRa GPS PSTandard on page 226 C A P Intra Standard Tuning Sets the power relation between the signals belonging to the same navigation stand ard Use the Set to Standard function to preset the values Remote command subsystem POWer INTRa GPS CAP on page 226 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 114 Satellite Navigation User Interface E U p Satellites Power Tuning Inter Standard Tuning The inter standard calculation is performed based on the GPS standard Set to 0 Inter Standard Tuning Sets the Inter Standard Power relations to 0 dB Remote command subsystem POWer
99. ee dee ae BIS Time Basis zs Tite of Week eer ner eicit cete Uncertainty Radius sssssssssss Week Number Assistance Data Generation sssssusssss 68 Assistance Mode eet eine tede iae 132 Attitude Fr m motion EET DET C 72 From SPINNING d recrute oe ettet cedo a eter ence 72 B Ln de E 72 beta D Dela 3 eiecit eder Reed 2d 112 Body mask File seledt e Eege 64 Bridge How to simulate rrnnrrrrrnrnrrnnnnvrrrnrrnrnnnnvrvrennnnrnnnnnrnnr 44 C C ic 119 C is 119 C rc 119 C rs 119 C uc 119 GUS essences 119 Carrier frequencies rrrsnrnrnrennnvnnvvrnnnvnnnvvennvensvensnvenrnressveee 59 Carrier Phase iiic cierra rig ber pe dera A aSa 130 City block How to simulate rrnnrrrrrnrnrrnnnnvrrrnrrnrrrnnvnvrenrnnrsnnnnrnnr 44 Clock Correction Ere o H 123 GLONASS 126 GPS 123 Clock Mode 152 Clock Multiplier 153 Clock parameters sse 62 Clock Source 152 Common RF frequency errnrrnnnnvrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnnnn 86 Constellation Table rrrrrrrrnnnrrrrrrrrrrnsnnvrrrrnrnrnnnnvvvvnnnennn 103 Conventions SCPI commands 2 etebeEeERSkeEEEEAE KEEN NEEN 155 Coordinate Definition in a xtd file rrrrrnnrrrrrrrrrrrnnrrrrnrrrrrsrnnnnr 296 First edO Enano a a a AAE 79 Cu
100. esee 208 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS MPATh TAP lt us gt CPHase rmnnunanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnerernrnrnrnnnnnnnn 208 subsystem SVID ch GNSS MPATh TAP us DSHift eee 208 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou MPATh TAP us DH 208 Subsvstemz SGVlD schzs GA ijeoMbPAThTAb ausz DH 208 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift uunnnnnonnnnnnnnrnnrrrernrnrnrnnnnnnnnen 208 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift rnnnnananoonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnrererarnrnrnnnnnn 208 Subsvsiemz GVlDschz OGNSGGz MPAThTAb auszs POVWer 209 Subsvstemz GVlD schzs BEIDouMDATHTAb ausz POMWer nen 209 subsystem SVID ch GALileo MPATh TAP us POWer sese 209 Subsvstemz GVlDschz GlO hass MPAThTAbausz POVWer 209 SUbsvstemz GVlDschz GPS MDAThTAb ausz POWer eere 209 subsystem SVID ch GNSS MPATh TAP us TSHift cesse 209 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou MPATh TAP us TSHift iiinis 209 Subsvsiemz SGVlDschzs GAl jeoMbPAThTAbausz TH 209 Subsvsiemz SGVlD schz GlOhass MPAThTAb auss TGHm nenen enererereeeeeree 209 SUbsvstemz GVlDschzs GPS MPDAThTAb ausz TH 209 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh STATe lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou MPATh STATe lt State gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo MPATh STATe lt State gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass MPATh STATe lt Stat
101. gt POWer REFetence SIGNA nennen nnne 223 Subsvstemz POWerhRtterence Dl Tance enne 224 lt subsysteme SAT elite POW EE 224 subsystem SATellite st POWer RSlIGnal esses ener nenne 224 subsystem POWer TOTal 4 eceicieecen reete eene buen aN anaE aaa o e RR Rn ke AR RR nne 225 subsystem POWerlNTerP ZERO potersi Addad md ceca Ca Serene ete Seed 225 subsystem POWer INTer PSTandard reed aa io Pa dee dd 225 subsystem POWer INTer CABCAGeo sesssssssssssesssesesen sehen nnne nnns nnn nn tn tr nnne nat 225 Subsvstemz POWerlNTerCABCAlgso nennen nennen entente trt a treat 225 lt s bsystem gt POWer INTer CABCAMEO nennt iid ariaa 225 subsystem POWerlINTer CAE TDef cniinn a aaa a aA 225 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CARCA tn tnttestresririrstsrsrrnsnsnnnnnnn nenen rrr nennen nns 225 lt s bsystem gt POWeSrINTRa GPS PZERO eniin iiaeaa aa aaa ia aa aa a 226 lt subsystem gt POWer INTRa GPS PSTandard oecon naiiai iaai 226 lt s ubsystem gt POWerINTRa GPS CAP iria eaei a A aD EE 226 lt subsystem gt POWer MODE lt Mode gt Determines whether the power is calculated automatically or is based on user defined settings Parameters lt Mode gt USER AUTO USER Manual power configuration per satellite AUTO Automatic power calculation based on the satellite to receiver distance and relative to the relative power of the reference satel lite
102. gt POWer INTRa GPS PZERo Sets the power relations between the signal components to 0 dB Usage Options Manual operation Event R amp S SMBV K93 See Set to 0 on page 114 lt subsystem gt POWer INTRa GPS PSTandard Sets the power relation between the signals belonging to the same navigation standard according to the relation determined in the specifications Usage Options Manual operation Event R amp S SMBV K93 See Set to Standard on page 114 lt subsystem gt POWer INTRa GPS CAP CA P Sets the power relation between the signals belonging to the same navigation stand ard Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 226 4 15 Navigation Message Configuration Parameters CA P float Range 0 to 6 Increment 0 01 RST 3 Manual operation See C A P on page 114 Navigation Message Configuration Subsvstemz GVlDschz OGNGGzNMEGsagebDAGE COUN 230 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE COUNt cesses 230 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE COUNtE isses 230 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE COUNt sss 230 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE COUNt essen 230 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PRESet essen 230 Subsvstemz SGVlD schz BEIDouNMtE Geage bt Get 230 Subsvsiemz SGVlD schz GAlijeohMEGeage bt Get 230 Subsvstemz GVlDschz GlO hassNMEGsage bt Get 230 lt s b
103. gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IDOT ubevstemz GVlD zchz GbPGSNME Geagoel PAG us LtEbHemersIODC 236 ubevstemz GVlD zchz GbPGSNMEGeaoel PAG us LtEbHemersIODtE eene 237 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo sees 237 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris L TPata eeen 238 ubevstemz GVlD zchz GbPSNME Geagoel PAG us LEbHemers M ZEHo 238 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris NDELta eese 238 ubevstemz GVlD zchz GPGSNME GeagelbAGE us TEbHemerts ODOT 239 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OMEQa sss 239 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OZERo ES lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SF 1Reserved gr 239 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA sssssssss 240 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SVConfig sess 240 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE sess 241 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris URA sess 241 SE ERR E GPS RT EE 221 subsystem SVID ch GPS SIGNal rti avisene ea aire 220 lt subsystem gt TRIGger AR
104. however modulated on the GLONASS fre quency L1 1 602 GHz 3 In both instruments in the GNSS gt Satellite Configuration dialog enable a Reference Satellite gt N A b select the same Reference Standard c set the same Reference Power 2 12 Functional Overview of the Basic Offline GNSS This section gives an overview of the basic offline options GPS R amp S SMx AMU K244 Galileo R amp S SMx AMU K266 GLONASS R amp S SMx AMU K294 2 12 1 Single satellite GNSS signal R amp S WinlQSIM2 calculates a single satellite GNSS signal where static satellites with constant Doppler shifts are provided for simple receiver test like receiver sensitivity acquisition and tracking test etc production tests Selection and configuration of any localization data such as receiver location for instance is not enabled A generic workflow is described in chapter 2 12 2 1 Generating an one satellite static generic GNSS signal with R amp S WinIQSIM2 on page 53 2 12 2 Typical Offline Workflow This section provides some examples of typical workflow by working with one of the baseic offline options 2 12 2 1 Generating an one satellite static generic GNSS signal with R amp S WinlQSIM2 The generic workflow for generating a GNSS Satellite GPS Galileo GLONASS or BeiDou signal with R amp S WinIQSIM2 and saving it as a waveform is as follow 1 Execute Set To Default to adjust the instrument s settings to a standard set of
105. ies 78 P pq S 123 247 P code EVAN petet 87 Parking How to simulate 20 2 eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeseeaeeetenaes 44 PDOP Pitch Planes gi ea cage eg 81 Position Reference receiver eene 81 Position Accuracy Enabling M Position Format Power Automatic power Control 98 1 01 gt eer rene 98 Total 100 Power View 139 lus C 105 Prediction algorithm 29 Diele EN 16 Property PertnittViby cero e eene 79 82 84 85 Power loss 79 82 84 85 Protocol and conformance test cases R Rate of Inclination Angle seseeseseses 119 Rate of Right Ascension rasrrrnvvnnnvnnvvrnvnrnnnvrnrnrenvvensnnene 119 Read Qut Mode eege rote er erra Ee 71 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 Real time generation nnnrnnrnnnonnrnnnnnvonnnnnnenannrnnnnnnrnnnennen Real Time projection rrrrrnnnrnnnnnnvnnnnnnrnnnnnrennnnnrennnnnnen Real Time S P O T display Recall GPS settings 2 ottenere reet ertet Receiver f Wit a i dn 143 Ground altitude 2 erret 85 LOCATON seirinin E aan aia Receiver position Offset to reference point sssssssssssss 77 Reference SIGMA ice tre E erect ee ete tns Standard de Reference Location rarnnvnnannrnnnonnrnnnnnnrnnannnrnnnnnrennennnen 132 Reference Stale vinne eta
106. into the selected acquisition file The direc tory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory are read Only the file name has to be entered Assistance data settings are stored as acquisition file with the specific file extensions rs acq Parameters Create string Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Options R amp S SMBV K65 K67 K95 K107 Manual operation See Generate Acquisition File on page 138 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 265 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands A n U Assistance Data Settings subsystem ADGeneration ALManac CREate Filename Stores the current assistance data settings into the selected almanac file The directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory are read Only the file name has to be entered Assistance data settings are stored as almanac file with the specific file extensions rs alOr rs yuma The default extension is xs al and can be omitted in the file name To save an almanac file as file with extension rs yuma however this extension has to be specified in the file name Parameters Filename string Example See example Generating of GPS assistanc
107. is displayed with the parameter Total Power Example Power calculation for mixed signals Power calculation for the power settings and satellite constellation at the simulation start time as shown on figure 3 7 Maximum Number Of Satellites a v Power Signals SV D id C A P Q 28 etper 21 RCIA 1 2 Fig 3 7 Example Power Configuration with Mixed Signal This example focus only on the power calculation of the mixed signal e Power Mode User Number of Satellites 4 for all satellites Multipath Off PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 97 Satellite Navigation User Interface OUONEO a nt em Satellite Configuration e Sat 1 Powersau4 cap 1 31 dB Power Reference C A Intra Standard Powersay Powref 3 GB i e the C A signal is boosted with 3 dB compared to the P code signal e Sat 2 Powersau ener 0 dB Pseudorangeper sat to 23384433 474 m e Satft3 PoWersaus r c a 9 39 dB e Sat 4 Powel sata c A 2 14 dB e Reference Power 115 dBm Calculation of the absolute power levels e Absolute Powersati cia Ref Power Powersat c a p Additional Powetiapy 115 dBm 1 31 dB 116 31 dBm Absolute Powersat p Ref Power Powersai 1 c a p Additional Poweriapi Intra Standard Powersatt powret 115 dBm 1 31 dB 3 dB 119 31 dBm e Absolute Power vz ener Ref Power Powergaiyo e1 pef Additi
108. location and is suitable for city block simulation The objects are defined relative to the map orientation i e to the street orientation The map is built on the OX and OY axes and any point on the map can be defined as a reference point Each object is defined with its length and its distance to this reference point The receiver s position is configurable and defined as an offset to the reference point See chapter 3 3 2 Vertical Obstacles Settings on page 76 Roadside Planes Pedestrian Land Vehicle This model describes an environment where the user defined obsta cles representing roadside planes or surfaces built from different materials are located to the left and or to the right side of the receiver vehicle In this mode the roadside planes are assumed parallel to the motion of the vehicle The model is enabled in instrument equipped with option R amp S SMBV K92 See chapter 3 3 3 Roadside Planes Settings on page 79 Full Obscuration Ground Sea Reflec tion Pedestrian Land Vehicle Ship Ship Aircraft Spacecraft x Ship only This model defines areas with configurable size in that the satellite sig nals are completely obscured The model is enabled in instrument equipped with option R amp S SMBV K92 See chapter 3 3 4 Full Obscuration Settings on page 82 Simulated is ground sea reflection as well as obscuration of satellites due to modeled canyon obstacles left and right w
109. lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Queries the coordinates of the receiver location in decimal format for the selected moment of time The required query parameters depend on the selected time basis Query parameters lt TimeBasis gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC lt Year gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 lt Hour gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 lt Minutes gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 lt Seconds gt float required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 274 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands A a mA n S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands lt WeekNumber gt integer required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 529947 Increment 1 lt TimeOfWeek gt float required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 Return values lt Longitude gt float Range 180 to 180 Increment 1E 6 RST 0 lt Latitude gt float Range 90 to 90 Increment 1E 6 RST 0 lt Altitude gt float Range 10000 to
110. lt subsystem gt LOCatlon PITGKFMOT N 4 EEN EENEG 173 Subsvstemz 1 OCation ROLL F bimminmg esent nnne 173 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands J ee neon dead Localization Data SubevstemzLOCatpon SGPINRATE nennen nennen emen nennt nininini sanas iaai nasa agua 174 lt subsystem e ERR EE 174 subsystem LOCation SMONVemeht 2 Linsen esed eee ehe eene ned r e eh a radi 174 lt subsystem gt LOCation CATalog Queries the names of the predefined geographic locations Example See example Selecting a waypoint file on page 169 Usage Query only Manual operation See Geographic Location Attitude on page 69 lt subsystem gt LOCation SELect Location Selects the geographic location of the GNSS receiver Parameters lt Location gt User Defined New York San Francisco Beijing Seoul Singapore Taipei Tokyo Sydney London Moscow Munich Paris Waypoints User Defined Enables the definition of the Latitude Longitude and Alti tude of the GNSS receiver with fixed position in the ECEF WGSS84 coordinate system Waypoints requires option GNSS Enhancements R amp S SMBV K92 Enables defining a moving scenario i e the simulation of a mov ing receiver New York San Francisco Beijing Seoul Singa pore Taipei Tokyo Sydney Lond
111. lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt DSHift on page 215 Initial Carrier Phase The parameter is enabled for configuration in Simulation Mode gt Static Sets the initial carrier phase The parameter is updated automatically in Auto User Localization modes In R amp S WinIQSIM2 it is forced to 0 Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt ICPHase on page 216 Resulting Start Frequency Indicates the currently valid values for Doppler shifted carrier frequency The resulting frequency is calculated according to the following e GPS Galileo BeiDou fresutting pana poppler where fbana is set with parameter RF Band e Glonass foand 13 1602 MHZ fbana 12 1247 MHz k frequency number Joe L1 resulting MHz 1602 k 0 5625 poppler Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 108 Satellite Navigation User Interface a SS te 1 Global Signal Configuration Joe L2 resulting MHz 1247 k 0 4375 poppler Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt FREQuency on page 216 Resulting Start Chip Rate Indicates the currently valid values for the chip rate The relevant change to the chip rate is carried out automatically if the Doppler shift is changed The resulting chip rate is calculated according to the following e GPS Galileo BeiDou fresulting Tcode 1 poppler foana where fbana is set with parameter RF Band
112. obscuration effects from side barriers on the left and right of a vehicle moving on a highway Highway The model assumes effects of the barriers as well as cars moving in the oppo site lines and subsequently interrupting the GNSS signal for a short time in a periodic way Bridge Parking The model assumes a full signal obscuration in a parking for 1 min 10 min or 1 hour This model is useful by measuring the time a GNSS receiver needs to reac quire the GNSS satellites after leaving the obscured area Tunnel To store a user defined configuration use the Save As function User defined obscu rations can be loaded at a latter time to repeat test with the same user environment Remote command subsystem OBSCuration TYPE on page 181 Near Environment Determines the kind and nature of the obstacles Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 74 Satellite Navigation pm EEEEREERRR mu User Interface Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings Table 3 3 Available customizable near environment models in depending on the vehicle type and the geographic location Near Environment Vehicle Type Mov ing loca tion Static loca tion Short Description Vertical Obstacles Pedestrian Land Vehicle X The model simulates the whole fix geometry of many objects loca tions to the left right front and back of the user s static
113. of Ephemeris Page P1 Time interval between 2 adjacent values of TOE It defines hence the age of the current Glonass Ephemeris page This parameter maps to the P1 parameter in the navigation message as follows e 01 Age of Ephemeris 30 min e 10 Age of Ephemeris 45 min e 11 Age of Ephemeris 60 min Note Tb Interval and TOE displays depend on this value lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris AOEP on page 246 Tb Index Index of the Tb time interval Time of Ephemeris TOE corresponds to this value multiplied by 15 minutes This value is actually a scaled TOE value with a unit of 15 minutes Note Tb Interval and TOE displays depend on this value Condition to be always met e Tb Index 1 should be an integer multiple of Age of Ephemeris min 15 e Case Age of Ephemeris 30 min Tb Index 1 3 5 95 e CaseZ Age of Ephemeris 45 min Tb Index 7 1 4 7 94 e Case3 Age of Ephemeris 7 60 min Tb Index 1 5 9 93 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TINDex on page 248 Tb Alignment P2 Configures TOE to be aligned to an even or odd scale of 15 min for Age of Ephemeris 30 or 60 min Forced to 1 hence odd in case of Age of Ephemeris 45 min Note All Ephemeris pages of an SVID have the same Tb alignment P2 The Tb Interval and TOE parameters depend on this value
114. of time WN_REF 0 that depends on the navigation standard Range 0 to 9999 0 53 Increment 1 RST 0 Example See example Selecting Real Navigation Data on page 175 Manual operation See Week Number on page 67 subsystem NAVigation SIMulation TOWeek TOW Defines the simulation start time within the defined week see subsystem NAVigation SIMulation WNUMber This setting is only available for subsystem NAVigation SIMulation TBASis set to GPS or GST Parameters TOW float number of seconds since the beginning of the week Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Example See example Selecting Real Navigation Data on page 175 Manual operation See Time of Week TOW on page 68 4 6 Obscuration and Auto Multipath Example Defining a full obscuration environment The following example uses GPS entry standard Selecting and enabling a full obscuration user defined environment SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration ENVironment FULL SOURce1 BB GPS OBSCuration TYPE USER SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration OBSCuration Defining a full obscuration area as a sequence of obscured zones SOURcel1 BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL SCALe DISTance SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA COUNt 2 SOURce1 BB GPS OBSCuration FULL AREA1 REFerence 0 5 SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA1 LENGth 0 1 SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA2 REFerence 2 5 SOURce1 BB GPS O0BSCuration FULL AREA2 LENGth 1 Operatin
115. other OWAY One Way The file is read out only once When the end of the file is reached the last described position is assumed to be a static one RTRip Round Trip When the end of the file is reached the file is read out back wards RST OWAY Example See example Selecting a waypoint file on page 169 Options R amp S SMBV K92 Manual operation See Read Out Mode on page 71 lt subsystem gt LOCation COORdinates DECimal Longitude lt Latitude gt lt Altitude gt Defines the coordinates of the geographic location of the GNSS receiver in decimal for mat Parameters lt Longitude gt float Range 180 to 180 Increment 1E 6 RST 0 lt Latitude gt float Range 90 to 90 Increment 1E 6 RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 171 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a Localization Data Altitude float Altitude in meters above sea level Range 10000 to 1600000 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example See example Selecting a waypoint file on page 169 Manual operation See Location Coordinates on page 71 lt subsystem gt LOCation COORdinates DMS lt LongitudeDeg gt lt LongitudeMin gt lt LongitudeSec gt lt LongitudeDir gt lt LatitudeDeg gt lt LatitudeMin gt lt LatitudeSec gt lt LatitudeDir gt lt Altitude gt Defines the coordinates of the geographic locatio
116. page 185 subsystem OBSCuration FULL RWINdow on page 185 Full Obscuration Configuration Table Defines the full obscured areas as a sequence of zones at defined position and with defined Width Each zone is defined in one table row Tip To enable an area pattern define the subset of areas and enable a Repetition Window with suitable repetition period Adjust the displayed window size Viewport from to Zoom Out to visualize all configured full obscuration areas Reference Defines the reference starting position or time stamp at which a spe cific obscured zone is applied Remote command lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL AREA lt ch gt REFerence on page 186 cpu uL p EC C dLdFrRR Her Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 83 Satellite Navigation User Interface Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings Length Length of the obscured zone defined in km or sec Remote command subsystem OBSCuration FULL AREA ch LENGth on page 187 Remote command subsystem OBSCuration AREA COUNt on page 186 AREA APPend on page 186 AREA lt ch gt INSert on page 186 AREA lt ch gt DELete on page 186 subsystem OBSCuration subsystem OBSCuration E d 3 E n Hj mi hj subsystem OBSCuration 3 3 5 Ground Sea Reflection This section comprises the parameters necessar
117. page 198 Return values lt Year gt integer Range 1996 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Example BB GPS NAV ALM GLON TOAP DATE Response 2010 11 07 Usage Query only Manual operation See Almanac Configuration on page 87 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GLONass TOAPplicability TIME Queries the start time of applicability of the selected almanac file for the navigation standard Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 197 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands E DM M Pet Almanac RINEX Configuration Note This setting is available for Glonass It is no longer supported for GPS and Gali leo satellites To get the applicability data of GPS and Galileo satellites refer to the commands subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS TOAPplicability TOWeek on page 198 and subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS TOAPplicability WNUMber on page 198 Return values Hour integer Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 Minute integer Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 Second float Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 Example BB GPS NAV ALM GLON TOAP TIME Response 17 0 0 Usage Query only Manual operation See Almanac Configuration on page 87 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt
118. parameters relative to the local horizon Parameters lt Roll gt float Range 180 to 180 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Options R amp S SMBV K103 Manual operation See Yaw Heading Pitch Elevation Roll Bank on page 72 lt subsystem gt LOCation YAW FMOTion lt State gt lt subsystem gt LOCation PITCh FMOTion lt State gt lt subsystem gt LOCation ROLL FSPinning lt FromSpinning gt Force the attitude parameters to motion direction Usefull in automotive applications Parameters lt FromSpinning gt 0 1 OFF ON RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 173 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Se J w Localization Data Options R amp S SMBV K103 for lt subsystem gt LOCation ROLL FSPinning Manual operation See From Motion From Spinning on page 72 lt subsystem gt LOCation SPIN RATE Rate Simulates a constant rate of change of the roll Parameters Rate float Range 500 to 500 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Options R amp S SMBV K103 Manual operation See Spinning Rate on page 72 lt subsystem gt LOCation SPIN SRoll lt StartRollAngle gt Defines the start angles of rotation of the vehicle Parameters lt StartRollAngle gt float Range 180 to 180 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Example SOURce1 BB GPS LOCation ROLL FSPinning ON SOURCe1 BB GPS LOCation SPIN RATE 0 25 SOURCe1 BB GPS LOCation SPIN SRo
119. pattern the instrument simulates the satellite power and car rier phase depending on the antenna pattern and attitude parameters For automotive applications enable the parameter Localization Data gt From Motion to extract the attitude parameters from the waypoint file Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 64 Satellite Navigation User Interface 7 C OQN E HH H nm GNSS Main Dialog For more information see chapter 2 7 Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Antenna Pattern R amp S SMBV K102 on page 31 and chapter A 1 3 Antenna Pattern Body Mask Files on page 301 Remote command subsystem APATtern CATalog PREDefined on page 167 subsystem APATtern CATalog USER on page 167 subsystem APATtern FILE on page 167 see also subsystem APATtern ANTenna LIST on page 167 subsystem APATtern ANTenna ID on page 168 subsystem RT UPDate ANTenna on page 168 3 1 3 Navigation Data gt To access this settings select main Dialog gt Navigation Data With the provided settings you can define the data source for navigation informa tion Data Source Selects data source for the navigation information Navigation data plays an extremely important role since they are essential for calculat ing the positions of the satellites It also contains the information about the currently va
120. power calculation and the pseudorange of the reference satellite at the beginning of the simulation t t0 e For Reference Satellite NA the following nominal orbit distances ND are used NDeps 20300 km NDaiowass 19100 km NDe6atileo 23222 km NDgeidou_meo 21528 km and NDgeipou_icsoiceo 35786 km Remote command subsystem POWer REFerence SIGNal on page 223 subsystem POWer REFerence DISTance on page 224 3 6 2 General Satellites Settings Use Spreading enabled in Static mode only Activates deactivates spreading When spreading is deactivated the pure navigation data is modulated onto the RF carrier Remote command subsystem SPReading STATe on page 212 Galileo Sat Modulation Galileo in WinIQSIM2 only Selects the modulation mode used for modulating the Galileo carrier signal Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 100 Satellite Navigation User Interface X P Satellite Configuration Tip Select BOC 1 1 modulation to reduce the sample rate required to simulate a cer tain period of time Remote command subsystem GALModulation on page 213 Elevation Mask R amp S SMBV instruments only enabled for Auto Localization and User Localization mode Sets the satellite s elevation mask i e determines the elevation filter applied during the Get Optimal Constellation process or w
121. seen 186 Subsvstemz OBGCuratton FULL AbREA chz D I ete eere 186 Subsvstemz OBGCuratton FULL AR A chz Rterence rene 186 Subsvstemz OBGCuratton FULL AREA chz LENGD eene 187 subsystem OBSOCuration GSR MPROoperty cessisse enne reris 187 SUbevslemz OBGCuration GGb Ge 187 lt s bsystem gt OBSCu raton GG PDERMittivtv nennen 187 SUbevstemz OBGCuratton GG CONDuctivltv nennen 188 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR PLOSS nnne nn nre 188 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR 01 Distance eese esee nennen 188 subsystem OBSCuration GSR O2Distance ei irse edere aka desea ick alone ia Pha 188 subsystem OBSCuraltior GSR O1 Helghl tente tota en Rain dn Rada neon Rene Ras 189 SUbevstemz OBGCuratton GG O2Heieoht nennen nemen eren nnns 189 amp s bsystems OBSCuration GSR GALTit de u EE 189 subsystem OBSOCuration GSR OORIientation isses esee nennen 189 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands OA J H Um Obscuration and Auto Multipath lt subsystem gt OBSCuration TYPE Type Selects a predefined obscuration model or enables the configuration of the near envi ronment and physical model Parameters Type USER CITY SUB1 URB1 LTUNnel MTUNnel BR1 BR2 P1M P10M P1H HIGHway CUTTing USER User defined CITY City block SUB1
122. selected waypoint attitude file See also Location Coordinates on page 71 and Waypoint Attitude File on page 70 Obscuration and Auto Multipath Available in instruments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K101 and enabled Auto Localization or User Localization mode provides an access to the dialog to define the near environmental model see chapter 3 3 Obscuration and Auto Multipath Set tings on page 73 A summary information on the enabled settings is displayed Antenna Pattern Body Mask File For instruments equipped with R amp S SMBV K102 provides an access to the standard File Select dialog to select a file describing the antenna pattern or the body mask Several predefined antenna patterns are provided Bit Select Antenna Pattern File E m Recent fies Bus Car Medium Car Medium OpenRoof Car Small Car Small OpenRoof Jet Big LandVehicle1 Plane Ship Big Ship Medium File Manager If a file is selected the file name is displayed Two files describe an antenna the antenna pattern ant_pat file and the phase response phase file Both files must have the same file name and must be stored in the same directory The ant pat file describes the power response matrix of each antenna The instrument retrieves the phase response matrix from the phase file If the required phase file does not exist the instrument sets the carrier phase matrix to zero With a selected antenna
123. simulation t0 and is calculated as follow Displayed Powers signal to 2010919 Pseudorangerer sat o Pseudorangesatsignal 10 Inter Standard Powersat net sat The total power of the generated GNSS signal is displayed with the parameter Total Power Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 93 Satellite Navigation User Interface Satellite Configuration Example Power calculation in User power mode for GNSS signal undergoing static multipath propagation Power calculation for the power settings and satellite constellation as shown on fig ure 3 4 Maximum Number Of Satellites a GALILEO E1 DEF GALILEO E1 DEF 17 10 00 Fig 3 4 Example Power Configuration in User Power Mode Number of Satellites 4 Sat 1 Powersat 1_ cia 1 dB static Multipath Off Sat 2 Powersau cia 0 dB static Multipath Off Sat 3 Powersaus 1 per 9 dB static Multipath On Additional Power 4 5 dB Additional Poweryapy2 3 dB Sat 4 Powersaga E1 DEF 10 dB static Multipath Off Reference Power 115 dBm Calculation of the absolute power levels Absolute Powersay4 cia Ref Power Powersatii cia Additional Powetiapy 115 dBm 1 dB 116 dBm Absolute Powers cia Ref Power Powersaiwo emer Additional Power 115 dBm 0 dB 115 dBm Absolute Powersai 3 E1 DEF Tapit1 Ref Power Powergai 3 e1 pef Additional Poweltap 1 115 dBm 5 dB 5 dB 1
124. st gt ORBit zs lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PDChated A 216 ubevesiemz GA Telltte etz POMWer nennen nennen rnte nnn rnt senti nne nn thnn ese ten sinn rna 224 subsystem SATellite st POWer RSlIGnal sess nennen 224 ubsveiemz GA Telltte stz PhRANoe eene nen nnt nns sni nnns sein nnne t nnnts sn tent ste tnn s sni tnn 217 ubsveiemz GA Telltte stz PhR ias A 218 subsystem SATellite st SCRate essent rennen e nennt nennen ner en rns nnne 218 lt subsystem gt SA Tellte stz SIGNA ese nnn nein tnn sen ARSKA nns eit nns sterne nsns ADENN 218 ubevstemz GA Telltte etz GT ANdard eene enne retener nnns en nnr rennen rena 218 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt STATe subsystem SATellit st S VIE rii rire teer eco eorr khen oet Ecos eo epe ee HER Ee e Eee REX E Ee aed ERE REO FE Ree RS lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt TSHift enean nnne nnt daai da nnns tents ennt lt subsystem gt SEMask a2rvdenae le E CR He e NEE DE subsystem SETTing DEL 6te 2515 cnet cA eed get p gere iet ed e io ea te cd ced del subsystem SET Ting LOAD ss ergeet geed a atre aa aa Pena Ee petet ebd Pe pad beue aa subsystem SET Ting S TORO iiie rite tiere eee ex rv rry eoe aan eae lt subsystem gt SETTing STORe FAST lt subsystem gt SMODe subsystems SPOTINEOTimIe arie edere peter eo NEESS da Pea
125. subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SIGN Sign Defines whether one second is added to or subtracted from the current leap second value during synchronization Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 205 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Q J U uM Static Multipath Configuration Parameters Sign PLUS MINus RST PLUS Example See example Configuring the time conversion and leap sec onds settings on page 201 Options R amp S SMBV K92 Manual operation See Leap Second Configuration on page 90 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SYNC Synchronizes the leap second according to the simulation time Example See example Configuring the time conversion and leap sec onds settings on page 201 Usage Event Manual operation See Leap Second Configuration on page 90 4 11 Static Multipath Configuration The multipath settings are enabled for instrument equipped with option GNSS Enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 Example Configuring the multipath settings for SV ID 20 The following example uses GPS entry standard SOURCe1 BB GPS PRESet SOURcel BB GPS SMOD USER SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite COUNt Response 8 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite2 SVID Response 20 SOURce1 BB GPS SAT2 STAN Response GALileo SOURce1 BB GPS SVID20 GALileoMPATh TAP COUNt 2 SOURce1 BB GPS
126. that are obscured for example by buildings For the current receiver s position in the selected environment some of the satel lites are not visible 13 Select GPS Main Dialog gt Obscuration amp Auto Multipath and enable Physical Model gt Obscuration amp Multipath 14 In the GPS Main Dialog gt Real Time S P O T gt Display Type gt Sky View com pare the displayed satellite constellation EH GPS Real Time SPOT Display Type Sky View Sky View Real Time Information Time UTC 07 11 2010 17 18 32 000 Rec Loc 48 15194 N 11 59005 E 500 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 0 62 1 17 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 28 15 Legend Los OG LOS A P loss LOS Echoes LOS Echoes AP loss Echoes Obscured G GPS E GALILEO inactive R GLONASS Blue border satellites receiving an echo signal for example from multipath For the current receiver s position in the selected environment the receiver receives the reflected signal from several of the invisible satellites 15 To observe how the signal received by a receiver placed for example in a car changes Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 47 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow a select GNSS Main Dialog Antenna Pattern Body Mask File Select Prede fined Antenna Pattern b navigate to a predefined antenna pattern file e g Car Small and execute Select L i GPS Re
127. the power reference is P Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt POWer RSIGnal on page 224 Navigation Opens the chapter 3 10 Navigation Message Configuration on page 116 dialog for configuring the parameters of the navigation message Multipath requires option R amp S SMBV K92 Opens the Static Multipath Configuration dialog for configuring the static multipath propagation per satellite Duration Elev gt 2 5 5 7 5 10 R amp S SMBV only This parameter is enabled only for Localization mode Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 106 Satellite Navigation User Interface Satellite Configuration Displays the time the satellite s elevation will be higher than 2 5 5 7 5 or 10 starting at the first simulation moment of the satellite of interest as selected with the parameter Elevation Mask This parameter can be used to get an impression of how long the con nected GNSS receiver may use this certain satellite for its position fix The value is displayed in format hh mm ss The displayed value is not updated but the elevation of each satellite is constantly monitored Decreasing the satellite s elevation below the selected elevation mask value is one of the reasons for the automatic dynamic exchange of satellites Thus a change of the satellite constellation can occur before the initially calculated time elapses In Auto Localiz
128. the satellite s navigation message lt subsystem gt ATMospheric IONospheric KLOBuchar BETA ch0 on page 251 GPS BeiDou lonospheric Parameters Changing the ionospheric model has an impact on the satellite s parameters Time Shift Doppler Shift and Duration Elevation22 5 5 7 5 10 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 112 Satellite Navigation User Interface Satellites Power Tuning Parameter Description SCPI Command alpha O alpha 3 Displays the parameter alpha 0 alpha 3 of the satellite s navigation mes sage lt subsystem gt ATMospheric GPS IONospheric ALPHa ch0 on page 251 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric BEIDou IONospheric ALPHa ch0 on page 252 beta 0 beta 3 Displays the parameter beta O0 beta 3 of the satellite s navigation message lt subsystem gt ATMospheric GPS TONospheric BETA lt ch0 gt on page 252 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric BEIDou IONospheric BETA ch0 on page 252 GALILEO lonospheric Parameters The GALILEO ionospheric model includes the broadcast coefficients u aj and aj used to compute the Effective lonization Level Az and the lonospheric Disturbance Flag given for five different regions Changing the ionospheric model has an impact on the satellite s parameters Time Shift Doppler Shift and Duration Elevation22 5 5 7 5 10 Parameter Description SCPI Command a i0 a i2 Displays the
129. the selected ant pat file Return values List antenna id 1 antenna id 2 gt lt antenna id 2 gt lt antenna id 4 gt Returns a comma separated list of the used antenna identifiers ID A maximum of four antennas ca nbe specifed in one file i e the list contains maximum of four antenna id Example see example Selecting an antenna file on page 165 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 167 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands OC H A User Environment Antenna Pattern and Body Mask Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K102 Manual operation See Antenna Pattern Body Mask File on page 64 subsystem APATtern ANTenna ID lt Antennald gt Selects one particular antenna by its antenna ID To query the list of all antenna IDs use the subsystem APATtern ANTenna LIST Parameters lt Antennald gt integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example see example Selecting an antenna file on page 165 Options R amp S SMBV K102 Manual operation See Antenna Pattern Body Mask File on page 64 lt subsystem gt RT UPDate ANTenna Triggers the software to schedule a real time switch of the used antenna at a specific future time as specified in the antenna pattern ant pat file For description of the file format refer to chapter A 1 3 Antenna Pattern Body Mask Files on page 301
130. the time of assistance data SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GLONass SVID2 ACQuisition BLOCk 0 1 queries the acquisition data for SV ID 2 and time offset of 0 1s i e at Glonass time 19 00 00 0 1 s Response 154800 1 2 431 205775308508 0 0 0 987 68 0 00764343745397626 151 707854408733 55 6703598896116 0 Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K67 K95 subsystem ADGeneration BElDou SVID ch SAData lt TimeOffset gt lt NumberOfSymbols gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo SVID lt ch gt SAData lt TimeOffset gt lt NumberOfSymbols gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 257 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands T Jw Assistance Data Settings subsystem ADGeneration GLONass SVID ch SAData lt TimeOffset gt lt NumberOfSymbols gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS SVID lt ch gt SAData lt TimeOffset gt lt NumberOfSymbols gt Queries selected number of symbols from the sensitivity assistance message for a specific satellite SV ID and at given specific time Query parameters lt TimeOffset gt float Sets the offset of time to the beginning of the acquisition data generation set with the command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME or the command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TOWeek lt NumberOfSymbols gt Default unit bits Deter
131. to chapter 2 4 1 Channel Budget on page 23 for description on the how the available hardware resources are distributed Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt SIGNal on page 218 SV ID Constellation Table Enters the Space Vehicle ID of the satellite to be simulated This value is used to gen erate the corresponding spreading code Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 104 Satellite Navigation User Interface C A 0 Satellite Configuration Note The SV ID of the GLONASS satellites are with 64 smaller than their PRN num ber e g to GLONASS satellite R5 corresponds PRN 69 If Real Navigation Data is used only the valid IDs which are listed in the almanac are selectable for arbitrary data any ID can be selected SV ID set to N A indicates a not assigned satellite The SV ID field is highlighted in dark blue color if a static multipath is activated Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt SVID on page 219 Power Constellation Table R amp S SMBV instruments only The meaning of this parameter depends on the selected Power Mode e n User power mode this parameters sets the power offset of the satellite in dB The offset determines the power ratio of the activated satellites Configuration of satellites power is performed on the fly and without interruption of the signal generation unless O
132. uere y yr tke a Ca eoa pee duae 269 subsystem SPReading STAT area e erri cet credet toco reri inn ede died IDE Ite lt subsystem gt SVID lt GNSS gt EST prre d oreet a eerte e crap eda ERRARE ANS subsystem SVID SIGNal COUPling eseessesssessesessseseseeee eene nnn nennen a Aa stent sinn nnt sena ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNSG MPATh STATe eene nnne emere ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNSG MPATHTAPCOUN nennen nennen nnne subsystem SVID ch GNSS MPATh TAP us CPHase sse ener nnne lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift Sek ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG MPDAThTAb usz PDOwWer nennen nente ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNSGG MPAThTAb ausz TH ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG NME GeaoePDAGE COUNT eene enne nnne nnn ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG NMEGsaoebhRtGet eene nnne eubevstemz GVlD cchz ONG NME Gage PhROlect nennen ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG NME GeaoehTbholechon subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us CCORection AF oz 231 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us CCORection TGD sssssss lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORection TOC s subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIC sess subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIS
133. 0 10 0 12 gt lt property endbehaviour return gt lt property noofwaypoints 12 gt lt general gt lt waypoints gt lt waypointvector data 0 0 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 1 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 2 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 3 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 4 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 5 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 6 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 7 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 8 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 9 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 10 0 gt lt waypointvector data 0 11 0 gt lt waypoints gt lt trajectory gt e Inthe following example the tag lt property datavectorhastimestamp yes gt and all four value in the lt waypointvector data gt parameters are evaluated The time stamp is retrieved automatically the time stamp of a waypoint is the first value in the corre sponding lt waypointvector data gt parameter T4 0 T 0 05 etc T4 0 55 trajectory lt general gt info name position only with time stamp Annex n A A U n User Environment Files data 0 144 966666334601 37 8166633061788 100 000000009313 gt 966662392613 37 966658453002 37 966654516955 37 966650585658 37 966646660296 37 966642742053 37 966638832109 37 966634931642 37 lt property waypointformat positiononly
134. 0 taps in the multipath configuration Satellite lt st gt 1 24 distinguishes between the satellites PAGE lt us gt 1 12 navigation page Tasks in manual or remote operation that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here In particular this includes e Managing settings and data lists i e storing and loading settings creating and accessing data lists accessing files in a particular directory etc e Information on regular trigger marker and clock signals as well as filter settings if appropriate e General instrument configuration such as configuring networks and remote opera tion e Using the common status registers For a description of such tasks see the R amp S SMBV operating manual The following commands specific to the satellite standards are described here cpu LP C LC C C p Md LFrr S eii Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 156 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands J HN 4 1 4 2 Programming Examples e Programming E Elle 157 PIU Sells eerte ier aedem addi er das reda e e RN REMIS 157 e User Environment Antenna Pattern and Body Mask 165 Localization DIa etre ene acto ince aedi aea c ia E Mita 169 e Navigation Data EE 175 Obscuration and Auto Multipath rerit er terne eret Re Ebr lai 178 e Hard
135. 00 Response 72 6122965557601 subsystenis S POT e en Ni 269 subsystem E UE 269 lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt AZIMUIH eene 269 lt s bsystem gt RT BEIDou SMlDschz AZIMU eene nnns 269 lt s bsystem gt RT GALil eo SVID lt Ch gt AZIMU nnne 269 subsystem RT GLONass SVID ch AZIMuth eese nennen 270 Subevstemz HIT GPS SGVlD zchz AZlMutb nennen nennen rnnt 270 subsystem RT GNSS SVID sch ELEVation 2 2 a unczc oce rettet nno tnt ntn han iaia Rc 271 subsystem RT BEIDou SVID ch ELEVation nece ee eae NEES 271 subsystem RT GALileo SVID ch ELEVation cies 271 lt s bsysteme HIT GLOhNass GVlD zchz ELEVaton rere 271 subsystem RT GPS SVID che ELEVation ucsas cie iecore a bak adde 271 subsystem RT GNSS SVID ch TAP us POWer ABSolute eee 272 subsystem RT BEIDou SVID ch TAP us POWer ABSolute esses 272 subsystem RT GALileo SVID ch Abus POWer AbBGolute eneee eneren 272 subsystem RT GLONass SVID ch TAP us POWer ABSolute sess 272 Subsvsiemz HIT GPS GVlD zchz Abus POVWer AbBGolute nenen en enen eeereeene 272 subsystem RT RLOCation COORdinates DECimal eese 274 Subsvstemz RT RL OCGaton COObRdinates DM 275 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands
136. 1 Lecce iioi etus te eid rera ENa 162 lt subsystem gt SETTiIng STORGE rera nh ihnen e nnn ener nsns nsns 162 subsystem SET Nee GN EE 163 lt subsystem SET Ee EE 163 apu uc C C C c c R dd rR Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 158 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands su Primary Settings subsystem SET TingDEL elg euius aderisce dna xe hene reped Va ne ind RR dne a nnde 163 amp s bsystenis DD TEE 163 SE E e Ee EE 164 subsystem Nenne 22 tea icio aene e rte tesa tha baka Rx uae nap d RA BR qe E Ra 164 lt subsystem gt PRESet Restores the default settings The default values correspond to the RST values in the descriptions of the SCPI commands Example See example Selecting a predefined test scenario on page 158 Usage Event Manual operation See Set to default on page 57 lt subsystem gt STATe lt State gt Enables disables the GNSS signal simulation Enabling this standard disables all the other digital standards and digital modulation modes A continuous GNSS signal is generated for up to 24 satellites in real time mode The number is determined by the command lt subsystem gt SATellite COUNt and the maximum value depends on the installed SW options Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See exa
137. 108864 to 67108863 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris XDDN XDDOT n subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris YDDN YDDOT N subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ZDDN ZDDOT n The OZ acceleration coordinate of the current satellite due to solar and lunar gravita tional effects at TOE tb i e the middle of Tb Interval The coordinates correspond to the PZ 90 coordinate system Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 249 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Pm Atmospheric Configuration Parameters ZDDOT n integer Range 16 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris XDN lt XDOT_n gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris YDN lt YDOT_n gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ZDN lt ZDOT_n gt Sets the OX OY OZ velocity coordinate of the current satellite at TOE tb i e the middle of Tb Interval The coordinates correspond to the PZ 90 coordinate system Parameters lt ZDOT_n gt
138. 1173 1427 12 08 13 Satellite Navigation General Description p sr Functional Overview of the Basic Realtime GNSS Options GPS Galileo GLONASS and BeiDou modes are provided for the generation of a realistic GNSS signal there are some dif ferences between them e The Auto Localization mode is provided for the generation of a GNSS signal with automatic exchange of satellite whenever needed to improve the position dilution of precision and to ensure satellite visibility at the simulated receiver location This mode ensures an optimal satellite constellation automatic dynamic calculation of the satellite power at any moment and ephemeris projection from the selected almanac In this simulation mode the connected GNSS receiver can be forced to obtain a 3D fix at a predefined or user defined static geographical location Instrument equipped with the option GNSS enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 can also simulate mov ing receivers see chapter 2 5 1 Moving Scenarios on page 26 e The User Localization mode provides flexible configuration of the satellite constel lation the power settings and the individual satellites parameters For instruments equipped with assistance option R amp S SMBV K65 this mode also enables the extraction of the navigation message from RINEX files Dynamic exchan
139. 12 0 000000000000D 00 1 070000000000D 02 7 959375000000D 01 4 243748197720D 09 2 353512095310D 00 4 012137651440D 06 2 042865683320D 02 3 149732947350D 06 5 153640602110D 03 3 528000000000D 05 2 738088369370D 07 3 071164751940D 00 9 499490261080D 08 9 762633443270D 01 3 201250000000D 02 1 469759572200D 00 7 773895242510D 09 up uc P d WF MF Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 305 Satellite Navigation Annex NMEA Scenarios 1 046472161190D 10 1 000000000000D 00 1 529000000000D 03 0 000000000000D 00 2 400000000000D 00 0 000000000000D 00 5 587935447690D 09 1 070000000000D 02 3 456060000000D 05 4 000000000000D 00 A 3 NMEA Scenarios The National Marine Electronic Association NMEA is a broadcasting standard sup ported by all navigation receivers The NMEA files comprise information about com mon parameters related to the satellite constellation navigation parameters time receiver location and dynamics The table 1 7 defines the starting acronym for a NMEA command of a specific navigation standard In the moment this firmware is released the Galileo NMEA acronym has not been defined yet Table 1 7 Overview of the starting acronyms for the NEA command ID Meaning AG Autopilot General AP Autopilot Magnetic CC Computer Programmed Calculator outdated
140. 2 Loading and Processing a GNSS Waveform in the ARB of the Rohde amp Schwarz Signal Generator To load and process a GNSS waveform proceed as follow 1 Enable the R amp S WinIQSIM2 to generate a one satellite static generic GNSS signal with constant Doppler shift and generate a waveform file 2 Connect the R amp S WinIQSIM2 to the R amp S SMBV 3 Transfer the waveform file For detailed description refer to the R amp S WinlQSIM2 Software Manual 4 n the R amp S SMBV select Baseband gt ARB and load the waveform The instrument loads the waveform in the ARB generator and displays a message that states the frequency used during signal generation Resulting Frequency Tip Another possibility is to find out the carrier frequency is to use ARB Wave form Info Note The carrier frequency of a R amp S SMBV that processes a waveform generated with the R amp S WinIQSIM2 has to match the value of the parameter Resulting Fre quency 5 Select the FREQ key to set the frequency in the header of the instrument to the resulting frequency of the generated waveform 6 Set the ARB State gt On to enable signal processing The R amp S SMBV processes the GNSS signal generated by the R amp S WinIQSIM2 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 54 Satellite Navigation User Interface GNSS Main Dialog 3 User Interface access the available satellite standards select Baseband block gt Satellite Naviga tion and select the
141. 204 eubevstemz OBGCuraton ENVironment eene nennen nennt itr ee trees nnne 181 ubevstemz OBGCuraton FULL AREA Abend 186 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL AREA GOUNG 186 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL AREA lt ch gt DELete 186 ubevstemz OBGCuraton FULL AREA chzIN ert ener 186 ubevstemz OBGCuraton FULL AREA chzLENGb eene nnne nennen 187 subsystem OBSOCuration FULL AREA ch REFerence essent eene 186 ubevstemz OBGCuraton FULL RWINdow nnn ne nnntn st nenr nsn nensi enr ns enne 185 ubevstemz OBGCuraton FULL RuWiNdow SGTATe eee e nnne nn renean 185 subsystem OBSOCuration FULL SCALe sess rennen rennen etere nnns str sensn senes 185 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR CONDUctivity eesssssssssssessse esee eene eene eene nennen nnne 188 ubevstemz OBGCuration GSbR GA Titude eene eene entrent nenr rennes nenne lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR MPRoperty lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR 01 Distance ener nnne nne 188 ubevstemz OBGCuration GSb OT Heioht eene enne entree nnne nennen nenne 189 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR O2Distance sess rennen eren nennen 188 ubevstemz OBGCuration GSb O2Heioht eene entente nnne eren nen rnnn nenne 189 ubevstemz OBGCuration GSb OObientaton ener nnne nnns 189 subsystem OBSOCuration GSR PERMittivity esee ennemis 187 lt subsystem gt OBSCu
142. 25 dBm Absolute Powersatt3 E1 DEF Taptt2 Ref Power Powersaus e1 pef Additional Power 115 dBm 5 dB 3 dB 123 dBm Absolute Powersatt4 e1 pef Ref Power Powersatt4 cia Additional Power 115 dBm 10 dB 125 dBm Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 94 Satellite Navigation User Interface Satellite Configuration Open the Real Time SPOT dialog set the Display Type to Power View and com pare the displayed power levels E amp GPS Real Time S P 0 T Display Type Power View Real Time Information Time UTC 07 11 2010 17 04 04 200 Rec Loc 37 81410 S 144 96644 E 100 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 1 00 1 00 E m S S o D o ka o o w w Space Vehicles I Standard Accuracy Echoes Position Accuracy The power level are displayed sorted per navigation standard and in ascending order of the SV ID Example Power calculation in Auto power mode Power calculation for the power settings and satellite constellation at the simulation start time as shown on figure 3 5 4 GPS Satellite Configurations Power Mode Auto zf Ref Power 115 00 dBm Elevation Mask x Ref Satellite 4 v Total Power 75 37dBm Initial HDOP PDOP 1 47 2 33 Ref Standard GPS v Ref SignalDist C A 24 235km Get Optimal Constellation Satellites Power Tuning Atmospheric Config Satellites Global Ephemeris Real Time Projection M On Satellite 4
143. 27 12 08 40 Satellite Navigation General Description pem MM cPPPETEEEEUURO ERR DEGERE Typical Realtime Workflow 3 Enable GNSS System Configuration gt Use Position Accuracy P Code 4 In Simulation Mode gt User Localization select Satellite Configurations gt Sat gt Standard gt GPS and enable Signals gt P or C A P for this GPS satellite as required Tip Not enough hardware resources This warning message appears and the sat ellite is disabled if the available hardware resources are not enough to generate the desired signal Hybrid GNSS constellations multipath configurations signals modulated by P code and activated satellites consume hardware resources Refer to chapter 2 4 1 Channel Budget on page 23 for description on the how the available hardware resources are distributed 5 In Simulation Mode gt Auto Localization select Satellite Configurations gt Global Signal Config and adjust the signals of the GPS satellites 6 Perform relevant steps 5 to 19 from General Workflow 7 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt ON The instrument generates the GNSS signal for the selected satellites constellation 2 10 11 Configuring the Navigation Parameters Extracting the navigation message from the almanac file gt Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Almanac and select an almanac file Th
144. 388607 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OMEGa lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OMEGa lt Omega gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OMEGa lt Omega gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OMEGa lt Omega gt Argument of Perigee Parameters lt Omega gt integer Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OZERo lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris 0ZERo lt OZero gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OZERo lt OZero gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris OZERo lt OZero gt Longitude of Ascending Node of Orbit Plane at Weekly Epoch Parameters lt OZero gt integer Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SF1Reserved lt gr gt lt Reserved gt SF1 Reserved 1 2 3 4 Suffix lt gr gt 1 2 3 4 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 239 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands J EN HIPH Navigation Message Configuratio
145. 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 2 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 6 A GNSS Per R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K95 Required for Test Case Required SW Option ST4 formance scenario 2 Subtest 4 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 5 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 6 A GNSS Per R amp S SMBV K44 K65 ST4 formance scenario 5 Subtest 4 K92 K95 EUTRA LTE 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S7 Signaling ST4 3GPP TS 37 571 2 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A GNSS Sig R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K95 naling scenario Subtest 4 ST5 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 1 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A GNSS Per R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K95 formance scenario 1 Subtest 5 ST5 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 2 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A GNSS Per R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K95 formance scenario 2 Subtest 5 ST5 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 5 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A GNSS Per R amp S SMBV K44 K65 2 3 3 2 3 4 formance scenario 5 Subtest 5 K92 K95 The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 7 Generating A GNSS Test Sig nal on page 39 Custom build scenarios The assisted options R amp S SMBV K65 K67 K95 and are not limited to be used for A GNSS testing exclusively Despite the predefined scenarios it is also possible to define any user specific test scenario For testing of stand alone GNSS receivers the assisted options offer full flexibility on the simulated sa
146. 427 12 08 296 Satellite Navigation pe B BE BNZZZ IREEEEBEELELZEBEEELLZIELLISEREHEZZIESENSN Annex User Environment Files Container Tag name property Parameter waypointfor mat Description Defines the format of the waypoint data The possible values are e positiononly only waypoint data e position attitude waypoint and attitude data e position velocitymagnitude waypoints and velocity magnitude information per point e position velocitymagnitude attitude waypoints velocity magnitude and attitude data e position velocityvector waypoints and velocity vector per location e position velocityvector attitude waypoints velocity vector and attitude per point The three property waypointformat attitude formats require the option R amp S SMBV K103 An instrument not equipped with this option discards files containing these formats and displays an error mes sage Smoothening is only possible with property waypointformat positiononly as well as NMEA waypoints and kml The description of the waypoints has to follow the selected format e g lt waypointvector data 0 05 144 966662392613 37 8166632247233 100 000000039116 gt with lt property waypoint format positiononly gt and lt datavectorhastimestamp yes gt lt datavectorhas Determines the way the time stamp elapsed time starting start simulation timestamp gt
147. 450 N 11 58480 E 500 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 1 07 2 04 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 17 15 Sky View Legend Los LOS A P loss Legend E LOS qs A P loss LOS Echoes LOS Echoes LOS Echoes A P loss LOS Echoes A P loss Echoes Echoes OG Obscured Obscured E 9 R GLONASS EX Cms R GLONASS The current position and state of the satellites is displayed on the Sky View This is a hybrid GNSS scenario with 12 satellites Compare the satellite constellations the posi tion and number of active and inactive satellites some satellites had disappeared behind the horizon 3 13 1 Display Type Display Type Switches between the available views See chapter 3 13 Real Time S P O T on page 139 Remote command n a 3 13 2 Real Time Information The Real Time Information section is common for all views and provides dynamic real time information about several parameters like HDOP PDOP Receiver Loca tion Elapsed Time and Time of Simulation Time UTC Displays the current date and time of the simulation The value is displayed in format DD MM YYY HH MM SS and is updated every 5 sec Remote command n a Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 142 Satellite Navigation User Interface HOP O n 3 13 3 Real Time S P O T Receive
148. 5 To access the Assistance Data Generation dialog 1 Select Main Dialog Simulation Mode User Localization 2 Select Assistance Data Generation The Assistance Data Generation dialog is used to generate assistance data files for Assisted GNSS testing These files can be formatted into mobile communica tion s message formats and passed by the protocol tester to the DUT in order to speed up Time To First Fix TTFF See also chapter 2 10 8 Generating GNSS Assistance Data on page 39 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 130 Satellite Navigation GER Assistance Mode a GPS DI Synchronize All Space Vehicles Selection Synchronize T2 TsT 4 s Weg 7 Js 2 ro LEM PER Reference Location Synchronize Position Format DEG MIN SEC d Latitude 37 ef 59564 Scu v Longitude 1449 sol 0 000 East zl Altitude 100 0 m gt sm zl Time Of Assistance Data Synchronize Time Basis GPS v Week Number 1702 Time Of Week 144016 000 s d Duration 1 ms v Resolution I d ms Assistance Data Generation Data Format ous x Generate Almanac File Generate lonospheric File Generate Navigation File Generate UTC File Generate Acquisition File Uncertainty Radius User Interface Assistance Data Generation The upper part of the Assistance Data Generation dialog is where the Assis tance Mode and the Space Vehicl
149. 584 2 29462777777777 66m Remote command subsystem LOCation CATalog on page 170 jOCation SELect on page 170 subsystem Waypoint Attitude File For selected Geographic Location gt Waypoints access to the Select Waypoint Atti tude File dialog to select predefined waypoint files A waypoint file is description of a moving scenario with possibly attitude coordinates that may have different forms like for example a sequence of positions or vector arc movement A waypoint file must have the extension txt nmea kml or xtd See also chapter A 1 1 Movement or Motion Files on page 293 for detailed descrip tion of the file formats Remote command subsystem LOCation WAYPoints FILE on page 170 Smooth Movement The location of the waypoints defined in the waypoints file may cause sharp changes in the movement direction In instruments equipped with R amp S SMBV K92 this parameter uses an internal algorithm to smooth the trajectory to simulate more realistic move ment Remote command subsystem LOCation SMOVement on page 174 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 70 Satellite Navigation User Interface sH 4 9 l Localization Data Read Out Mode For selected Geographic Location gt Waypoints defines the way the waypoint attitude file is to be read The receiver traject
150. 79 5 178 5 177 5 176 5 175 5 174 5 173 5 172 5 171 5 170 5 169 5 168 5 7167 5 166 5 165 5 164 5 163 5 162 5 161 5 160 5 159 5 158 5 157 5 156 5 155 5 154 5 153 5 152 5 151 5 150 5 149 5 148 5 147 5 146 5 145 5 144 5 7143 5 142 5 141 5 140 5 139 5 138 5 137 5 136 5 135 5 134 5 133 5 132 5 data antenna pattern Example Antenna with four sectors The follwoing is a file decribing an antenna with four sectors lt xml version 1 0 encoding ISO 8859 1 lt antenna_pattern gt antenna descr count 1 use same pattern no gt antenna id 1 YawAxis Z offset 0 PitchAxis Y offset 0 RollAxis X offset 0 Yaw offset 0 Pitch offset 90 Roll offset 0 lt antenna descr az res 90 00000000e 000 az res lt elev res 90 00000000e 000 elev res data 135 0 45 0 45 0 135 45 0 0 0 3 0 6 0 9 0 45 0 0 0 3 0 6 0 9 0 data antenna pattern The table 1 4 describes the used tags and parameters Table 1 4 Format of ant pat and phase file Container Tag name Parameter Description antenna pattern Defines antenna pattern File antenna descr Contains the descriptions of the antennas count Number of antenna patterns Value range 1 to 4 use same pat Specify whether the same data section is used for all the anten tern nas or not e yes the data section will be used for all antennas e no the data section
151. 8 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton ONG GvNChrontze cece eae ae ee eneteeeteeteeeeeeeeeees 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou SVID SYNCHIOnize cccceceeee cece caeaeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeteneees 259 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton DBEIlDou LOCGatton SxvhNChrontze nenene n eeeeeeerereeeeno 259 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData SYNChronize eese 259 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton DE IlDou SvNcChrontze eren 259 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass SVID SYNChronize esse eene 259 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass LOCation SYNChronize eese 259 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass TOAData SYNChronize esses 259 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton GL Ohass SGxhNChronze eene 259 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo SVID SYNChronize essen 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo LOCation GehcChrontze nenne 259 Subsvsiemz ADGeneraton GA leo TOAData GcNChrontze ren ererererereeerene 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo SYNChronize eren 259 Subsvsiemz ADGeneraton GPS GVID GhNChrontze sneren e rereeorroreesrernrnnnnn nenn 259 subsystem ADGeneration GPS LOCation SYNChronize sse 259 Subsvsiemz ADGeneraton GG TOAData GchNChrontze nt 259 subsystem ADGeneration GPS SYNChronize eese ener 259 subsystem ADGenerallonMODE caia cuit cnn e nennen NES dna RAE Enna e das dT dn 259 Subsvsiemz ADGeneraton BE IlDou Sichs ST
152. 8 2012 16 00 00 000 Rec Loc 48 14550 N 11 57675 E 500 0m Rec Att 89 995 P 0 004 R 0 000 HDOP PDOP 0 85 2 14 Next Handover Time 20 08 2012 16 11 30 Legend Gi Los OG LOS Ant Pat loss WP LOS Echoes P LOS Echoes Ant Pat loss Echoes G GPS E obscured R GLONASS inactive B BeiDou LOS Line of Sight visible satellite LOS A P loss Visible satellite with antenna pattern loss LOS Echoes Visible satellite with echoes LOS Echoes A P loss Visible satellite with antenna pattern loss and echoes Echoes Obscured satellite only echoes available for example due to buildings Obscured Obscured satellite for example due to buildings Inactive Satellite is not simulated To query the satellite s constellation for the selected time use the SCPI command subsystem RT SCONstellation on page 277 e The Map View display the trajectory of moving receiver or the position of a static one E GPS Real Time S P 0 T Display Type Map View Map View Real Time Information Time UTC 07 11 2010 17 11 13 200 Rec Loc 48 15292 N 11 57661 E 500 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 0 62 1 20 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 16 14 Reference Location Position Format Decimal Degrees Latitude 48 145 504 deg 11 576 749 deg 1 500 km zl Current Location Location Histo If GNSS receiver software is used to analyze the generated G
153. 9 0 0 2 2 8 4 4 0 0 8 4 2 0 2 8 0 8 0 0 8 0 4 0 4 8 0 0 0 8 8 0 0 4 0 8 0 3 2 1 8 0 0 3 2 8 0 0 2 4 8 0 0 1 6 7 0 0 3 4 6 0 0 4 4 5 0 0 3 8 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 25 Satellite Navigation General Description 2 5 2 5 1 Functional Overview of Realtime Option GNSS Enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 Functional Overview of Realtime Option GNSS Enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 This option enhances the basic options R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 with the follow ing functionality e support of motion files e smoothening of the used defined trajectories e realtime motion vectors or hardware in the loop HIL e modeling static multipath profiles e configuration of atmospheric effects e system time conversion e leap second simulation parameters For detailed description see MOVING pec urI o M 26 e Static Multipath Signal Genefkatlon deett te rente edd 27 e Configuration of the Atmospheric Parameters sese 27 e Time Conversion Confouraton nnne 27 Leap Secon E ue e ET 28 internal Waypoint ROSA PUING ess uinci aite petu eoe rh bote iier a 28 e Motion Smoothening Using Vehicle Description File 28 e Hardware in the Loop hl denitro ania 29 Moving Scenarios The option GNSS enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 enhances the basic GNSS options by user definable moving scenarios The following test scenario require
154. 92 EUTRA LTE 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S7 Signaling ST2 3GPP TS 37 571 2 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A Glonass Sig naling scenario Subtest 2 R amp S SMBV K44 K95 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 1 ST2 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A Glonass Performance scenario 1 Subtest 2 R amp S SMBV K44 K95 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 2 ST2 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A Glonass Performance scenario 2 Subtest 2 R amp S SMBV K44 K95 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 5 ST2 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A Glonass Performance scenario 5 Subtest 2 R amp S SMBV K44 K95 K92 The table 2 5 lists the currently supported predefined A GNSS test scenarios Table 2 5 A GNSS test scenarios overview Test Scenario Required for Test Case 3GPP FDD Required SW Option 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S6 Signaling ST4 3GPP TS 37 571 2 v 10 0 0 subclause 6 A GNSS Sig naling scenario Subtest 4 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K95 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 1 STA 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 6 A GNSS Per formance scenario 1 Subtest 4 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K95 PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 21 Satellite Navigation General Description pm M 1 Enhancements of Realtime Assisted GNSS Options GPS Galileo and GLONASS Test Scenario
155. AData TBASis sse 262 subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis essen 262 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton BE IlDouTOAData DATE 262 Subsvsiemz ADGeneraton GA leo TOAData DATE 262 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton GL Ohass TOAData DATE 263 Subevsiemz ADGeneraton GPS TOAData DATE 263 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData TIME sees 263 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData TIME esses 263 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TIME cessere 263 subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME eusesssesssese eene enne nennen 263 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData DURation sese 264 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData DURation eese 264 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass TOAData DURation seen 264 subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData DURation esses 264 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData RESolution eese 264 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData RESolution rararonnononovnvrnnveveverererernrnrnnnn 264 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton GL Ohass TOADatahRtGolutton nenen en erer ererererereree 264 subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData RESolution seen 264 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData TOWeek sss 264 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData TOWeek eese
156. ADe var user settings gps settings SOURCel BB GPS SETTings DELete var user settings settings Deletes the file settings gps SOURCel BB GPS SETTings CATalog var user settings Response gps settings gps settings new SOURCel BB GLONass SETTings CATalog var user settings Response glo settings settings Example Selecting a predefined test scenario This example shows how to enable an A GPS test scenario The A GNSS test scenar ios require a GPS GLONASS hybrid GNSS configuration Okck ck ck ck ck ck ck kck ck ck ck ck ck k kc k kk kk kc kk kk kkk kk k select and enable the predefined A GNSS test scenario 3GPP FDD Performance Test Scenario 2 ROO KICK OK KOKAOR EE EE EE EE EE SOURCe1 BB GPS PRESet SOURCe1 BB GPS ATSCenario W3GPER2 SOURce1 BB GPS STATe ON lt SUbsystem gt EE 159 ssubsystem STATE acci t A e epe beca ae eU Saag cet asses adea ee aue a cna basis 159 subsystem REB eere ere cm cR a gh Rr e RH Re e RR ena eK Eua nhe IRA etn 159 Slide 160 SE EL ele p E 160 TSOUbRcechuwzslBBGbDG AT GCenaro eene nnne 160 Roger DEE 161 subsystem SET Ting OATalog rire cece iare iacet trate e eara cage Iu ete geben pare a ERU 162 SOURce lt hw gt BB BEIDouw SET Ting GATalog nano annt ntes 162 SOURce hw BB GALileo SETTing CATalog esses 162 SOURce hw BB GLONass SETTing CATalog sessi 162 ESOURCeshw BB GPS SETTing CATalog 2
157. ATe eene 259 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton GA leo GVlD cchzSTATe rnn ne nenene 259 Assistance Data Settings subsystem ADGeneration GLONass SVID ch STATe esses eene 259 SUbsvstemz ADGeneraton GG GVlD cchz STATe nennen 259 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou LOCation COORdinates DECimal 260 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo LOCation COORdinates DECimal 260 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass LOCation COORdinates DECimal 260 subsystem ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DECimal sssss 260 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou LOCation COORdinates DMS eene 260 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton GA leo LOCaton COObdnates DMS 260 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass LOCation COORdinates DMS eeeesseeeee 261 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DMS c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeed 261 subsystem ADGeneration BElDou LOCation URADius essen 262 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo LOCation URADius eese 262 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton GL OhassLOCaton UPRADus eren 262 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation URADius eec eee 262 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData TBASis essen 262 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData TBASis eese 262 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass TO
158. AVigation SIMulation DATE rnnnnnnnnnanonnvnvnvovonovnrererennrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenennnnne 176 lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation TIME 177 subsystem NAVigation SIMulation WNUMBber sesenta 177 lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation TOWeek cessisse nennen nere 178 lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA Data Determines the data source for the navigation information Parameters Data ZERO ONE PATTern PN9 PN11 PN15 PN16 PN20 PN21 PN23 DLISt RNData RNData Real navigation data provided by an almanac file Use the command subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS FILE to select the almanac file ZERO ONE PATTern PNxx DLISt Standard data sources a sequence of 0 or 1 a pseudo random sequence with different lenght a pattern or a data list RST RNData Example See example Selecting Real Navigation Data on page 175 Manual operation See Data Source on page 65 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 175 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands M M a re Navigation Data lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA DSELect lt DSelect gt Selects a data list as data source Data lists are files with file extensions dm_igd that are stored in a directory of the user s choice To set the default directory use the command MMEMory CDIR To access the files in this directory you only have to give the fil
159. BB GPS SATellite COUNt 8 SOURce1 BB GPS GOConstellation SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite2 STANdard Response GALileo SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite2 SVID Response 23 SOURcel BB GPS SVID23 GALileo MPATh TAP COUNt 2 SOURce1 BB GPS SVID23 GALileo MPATh TAP1 POWer 3 SOURCe1 BB GPS SVID23 GALileo MPATh TAP2 POWer 5 SOURCe1 BB GPS SVID23 GALileo MPATh STATe ON SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite2 STATe ON SOURce1 BB GPS POWer MODE AUTO SOURce1 BB GPS POWer REFerence SAT 1 SOURce1 BB GPS POWer REFerence STANdard Response GPS SOURce1 BB GPS POWer REFerence SIGNal Response CACode SOURce1 BB GPS POWer REFerence DIStance Response 20720 SOURCe1 BB GP8 POWer REFerence POWer 115 SOURce1 BB GPS POWer INTer PZERO SOURcel BB GPS STATe ON SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite2 POWer SOURce1 BB GPS POWer INTer PSTandard SOURce1 BB GPS POWer INTer CAE1Def Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 221 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands J Power Tuning and Power Settings Response 1 25 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite2 POWer SOURce1 BB GPS POWer 110 SOURce1 BB GPS POWer TOTal Ssubsysten See RE 222 Subsvsiemz POWerRterencel POMWer nennen nenne 222 subsystem POWer REFerence SATeellite e eeeeesseissssssseseeeeeennnen nnn 223 Subsvstemz POWerRtterence GTANdard senem eene 223 lt subsystem
160. BV instruments To access this settings 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS 2 Select Simulation Mode gt Auto Localization User Localization The Real Time S P O T Satellites and Position Online Tracker view is a dynamic display of the current satellite s constellation receiver position power lev els of the active satellites The Real Time S P O T view provides dynamic real time information about sev eral parameters like HDOP PDOP receiver s location and current simulation time The displayed settings are grouped into different views the Sky View the Map View the Power View and the Trajectory View e The Sky View displays the current position and state active or inactive of the satellites in the current satellites constellation Enable Simulation Mode gt Auto Localization to observe the situation of disappearance and re appearance of satel lites For instruments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K101 the Sky View indicates also the obscured satellites the satellites with echoes etc For example the satel lites which signal is not visible from the current receivers position because there is a obstacle between the receiver and the satellite are displayed in grey color Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 139 Satellite Navigation User Interface Real Time S P O T EE GPS Real Time S P O T Display Type Sky View Real Time Information ime UTC 20 0
161. BVs configured to work in a master slave mode for syn chronous signal generation configure this parameter depending on the provided sys tem trigger event and the properties of the output signal See the table below for an overview of the required settings Table 3 24 Typical Applications System Trigger Application Sync Output to External Trigger Common External Trigger event All instruments are synchronous to the external trig ON for the master and the slave ger event instruments All instruments are synchronous among themselves OFF but starting the signal from first symbol is more important than synchronicity with external trigger event Internal trigger signal of the mas All instruments are synchronous among themselves OFF ter R amp S SMBV for the slave instruments Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 148 Satellite Navigation User Interface O Trigger Marker Clock Settings On Corresponds to the default state of this parameter The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger event but because of the instrument s processing time the first sam ples are cut off and no signal is outputted After elapsing of the inter nal processing time the output signal is synchronous to the trigger event I Ext Y Ig Calculated signal Signal at the output
162. Caton COObRdinates DE OCmal esee ener eene 171 subsystem LOCation COORdinates DMS sse enne rte nn nennen nennen nena 172 lt subsystem gt LOCation PITCh so ubsvetemz L OC atton PlTOCh EMOTlon nennen snnt nente VEERE E 173 lt subsystem gt LOCation ROL EE 173 subsystem LOCation ROLL FSPinning eese enne rennen nennt rennes enne nnne nnne 173 lt subsystem gt LOCation GMOVement neither nsn nnns nnn rennen nnns snnt rts entren nnns 174 subsystem LOCation SPIN RATE iiit iir ede blade ee eB aga og ice ue P edid trend 174 subsystem LOCation SPIN SRoll esses enne enerenren nnne e neret nenne etre nnns e nnns 174 ubevstemz LOCaton WAvbonts El 170 lt subsystem gt LOCation WAY Points ROMOdE eene eene enne nennen enne nen nnns nnns 171 lt subsystem gt LOCation YAW so subsystem LOCation vAuWFEMOTion nennen nen n nnns nn nnns enn nnns VEEE 173 subsystem EOCation SEL ct ornare ice rtt een eat e bte pura ven ins da ode eee 170 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt DATE BEGIN 0 nnns 196 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt DATE END 0 cccceceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesenaeeeseneeeeseaees 196 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt F ILE ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeaeesecaeeeseeeeseneeeessneeeeeaee 195 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS TOAPplicability
163. Centricity lt Eccentricity gt Eccentricity Parameters lt Eccentricity gt integer Range 0 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris FIFLag lt FiFlag gt Indicates the curve fit interval used by the CS Control Segment in determining the ephemeris parameters Parameters lt FiFlag gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Manual operation See GPS Ephemeris Parameters on page 121 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 235 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands G OTIE RE QH m NR Q Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth Health subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth Health This value does not have an impact on the actual health status of the generated satel lite Parameters Health integer Range 0 to 31 for GPS 1 for BeiDou Increment 1 RST 0 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOT lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IDOT lt Idot gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IDOT lt Idot gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IDOT lt Idot gt Ra
164. DGeneration GPS TOAD RES 0 001 DGeneration ACQuisition DFORmat GPS DGeneration ACQ CREate var user ADG acquisition SOURce1 BB GPS SOURCe1 BB GPS SOURce1 BB GPS SOURce1 BB GPS SOURCel BB GPS ADGeneration IONigation CREate var user ADG ionospheric SOURcel MMEM CAT var user ADG Response 25301 43275001856 DIR 0 DIR O acquisition rs acq BIN 525 DGeneration ALManac CREate var user ADG almanac rs yuma DGeneration UTC CREate var user ADG UTC DGeneration NAVigation CREate var user ADG navigation DGeneration NAVigation CREate var user ADG RINEX 110n almanac rs al BIN 5518 almanac rs yuma BIN 18344 ion rs ion BIN 70 navigation rs nav BIN 245 RINEX 10n BIN 525 UTC rs utc BIN 74 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCK eeeseeesee 256 subsystem ADGeneration GPS SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCK eeeeeesesesssss 256 subsystem ADGeneration GALileo SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCKQ eeeessese 257 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCK 257 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton D IlDou SVlDscchz GAlata eee 257 Subsvstemz ADGeneraton GA leo GVlD czchz GAUata seeren e reretorererersrsrnrnnnen 257 subsystem ADGeneration GLONass SVID ch SAData esee eene 258 subsystem ADGeneration GPS SVID ch SAData sss 25
165. DOP and the satellite s visibility have to be proved and at which moment of time the satellite s constellation has to be changed Satellites that do not fulfill the criteria for minimum PDOP and suffi cient visibility are exchanged dynamically and on the fly Information about the expected time of the next upcoming exchange is provided by the parameter Next Constellation Change The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 3 Generating GNSS Signal with Automatic Dynamic Exchange of the Satellites Auto Localization Mode on page 36 e In User Localization mode the exchange of the satellites is not performed auto matically but the satellite s constellation is fully configurable Satellites can be turned off reconfigured and turned on again the existing satellite constellation can be extended with new satellites Hence an exchange of the satellites can be con figured and performed at any moment of time as defined by the user The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 4 Generating GNSS Signal with Manual Exchange of the Satellites User Localization Mode on page 36 2 1 8 Flexible power configuration and automatic dynamic power control The instrument employs a dynamic power control concept To provide better flexibility two power modes are provided the Auto and the User power modes e User power mode is intended for dynamical configuration of the power of each satellite separately and manually e Auto pow
166. E 144 96667027777777777777777777777777 1 81666333333333333333333333333 100 5From here on we work in an ENU EAST NORTH UPPER basis centered around the ENU reference point S oe And more specifically the movement description will start from START SS START EAST COORDINATE EO relative to S NORTH COORDINATE NO relative to S UPPER COORDINATE NO relative to S SPEED in m s START 0 0 0 6 94444444444444444 Each movement segment is described in one line command in the file and the segments oo are to be read sequentially oe oe It can be either a line description or an arc description for a line oe we start by the syntax LINE and for an arc oe we start with the syntax ARC In the current version we will provide only EAST NORTH Movement segments SS ARC Center EAST Coordinate Center NORTH Coordinate ARC in degrees pos or neg is necessary for orientation ARC 0 20 90 SS LINE Second Edge EAST Coordinate first edge is the current point oo or last point of previous segment Second Edge NORTH Coordinate Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration is to be taken as the projection following the movement segment NE 0 250 1 44675925925925925926 LI LINE 0 400 0 NE I Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 295 Satellite Navigation Annex o User
167. EA KML xtd or trajectory description file For more information see chapter 2 5 1 Moving Scenarios on page 26 and chapter A 1 User Environment Files on page 293 For information about the current position of the receiver open the Real Time S P O T display and check the parameter Receiver Loca tion or the displayed receiver trajectory Map View Option R amp S SMBV K103 is required to simulate the attitude informa tion retieved from the waypoint attitude file 08 69 Satellite Navigation User Interface u Localization Data City Selects one of the predefined fixed geographic locations see table 3 2 The parameters Latitude Longitude and Altitude are set accord ing to the selected position Table 3 2 Coordinates of the Simulated Predefined Positions Continent City Latitude Longitude Altitude America New York 40 7142 74 0064 1m San Fran 37 8194388888 122 4784944 35m cisco Asia Beijing 39 905555555555 116 391388888888 60m Seoul 37 5515 126 987794444444 265 m Singapore 1 3113111111111 103 826852777777 110 m Taipei 25 022344444444 121 514758333333 10m Tokyo 35 683861111111 139 745058333333 45 m Australia Sydney 33 8833 151 2167 3m Europe London 51 500625 0 1246222 22m Moscow 55 752222 37 615556 200m Munich 48 150 11 5833 508m Paris 48 8
168. EX file if one exists For more information see chapter 2 10 11 Configuring the Navigation Param eters on page 41 b Select a start simulation time around to beginning of the ephemeris span For GPS the age of ephemeris is 2 hours and the selectd simulation time is aligned to the even hours of the day for example 00 00 02 00 04 00 etc See also chapter 2 1 9 Simulation of uninterrupted location fix on page 17 c Disable Satellite Configuration gt Global Ephemeris Real Time Projection d Select Satellite Configuration gt Sat gt Navigation Message and adjust the parameters as required Note The parameters Satellite Configuration gt Global Ephemeris Real Time Projection and Satellite Configuration gt Sat gt Navigation Message gt Real Time Projection must be disabled e Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Power Mode gt User and adjust the required power settings For more information see chapter 2 10 12 Adjusting the Power Settings on page 42 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt On Generate the required Assistance Data see also chapter 2 10 8 Generating GNSS Assistance Data on page 39 The instrument generates an A GPS signal according to the settings made 2 10 6 Generating A GPS Test Signal The generic workflow for generation of A GPS test scenarios in conformance to A GPS 2G 3G Protocol and Conformance Test Cases is as follow 1 Execute GPS Main D
169. GALILEO lonospheric Parameters on page 113 4 17 Assistance Data Settings The Assistance Data Settings are only configurable for instrument equipped with assis tance option R amp S SMBV K65 K67 K95 or the basic option R amp S SMBV K107 and in User Localization mode Example Generating of GPS assistance data The following example uses GPS entry standard SOURce1 BB GPS SMODe USER SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration MODE GPS SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS SYNchronize SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS SVID15 STATe Response 1 SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DMS Response 144 57 59 97 EAST 37 48 59 987 SOUT 100 SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DECimal Response 144 966658 37 816663 100 SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS LOCation URADius 2500 SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis UTC SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData DATE Response 2010 11 7 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 253 Assistance Data Settings SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME Response 17 4 0 SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis GPS SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData WNUMber Response 1609 SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData TOWeek Response 61455 SOURce1 BB GPS SOURce1 BB GPS SOURcel BB GPS SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAD DURation 10 A A A SOURce1 BB GPS ADGeneration ALManac CREate var user ADG almanac rs al A A A A
170. GALileo SIGNal lt Signal gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass SIGNal lt Signal gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS SIGNal Signal Sets the type of signal a SV ID will use in the moment the corresponding satellite becomes visible Parameters lt Signal gt CACode PCODe CAPQ CAPI E1Def RCA B1CA GPS signals CACode PCODe CAPQ CAPI Galileo signals E1Def GLONASS signals RCA BeiDou signals B1CA RST CACode Options R amp S SMBV K93 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt POWer lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou POWer lt Power gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo POWer lt Power gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 220 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands OE C HP J e Power Tuning and Power Settings subsystem SVID ch GLONass POWer Power subsystem SVID ch GPS POWer Power Sets the power a SV ID will use the moment the corresponding satellite becomes visi ble and is simulated Parameters Power float Range 21 to 0 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Options R amp S SMBV K93 4 14 Power Tuning and Power Settings Example Configuring the power settings The following example uses GPS entry standard and specifies a reference satellite SOURcel1 BB GPS PRESet SOURce1 BB GPS SMODe USER SOURCe1 BB GPS HYBRid GALileo STATe ON SOURce1
171. GE us CCORection TOC 232 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TOC 232 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TOC 232 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris AODO 233 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIC 233 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIC 233 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIC 233 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIC s 233 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIS 233 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIS 233 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIS 233 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIS 233 Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CLTMode 233 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRC 234 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRC 234 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsag
172. GPS relayed from CS e 11 TAU C and TAU GPS calculated on board Glonass M satellites lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris P on page 247 The OX position coordinate of the current satellite at TOE tb i e the middle of the Tb Interval lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMES sage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris XN on page 249 The OY position coordinate of the current satellite at TOE tb i e the middle of Tb Interval lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris YN on page 249 The OZ position coordinate of the current satellite at TOE tb i e the middle of Tb Interval lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ZN on page 249 XDOT n The OX velocity coordinate of the current satellite at TOE tb i e the middle of Tb Interval lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris XDN on page 250 YDOT n The OY velocity coordinate of the current satellite at TOE tb i e the middle of Tb Interval lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris YDN on page 250 PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 125 Satellite Navigation Ech User Interface Navigation Message Configuration Parameter Description SCPI command ZDOT n The OZ velocity coordinate of th
173. ID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PROJect lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PROJect lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PROJect Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 230 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Mnn cO Navigation Message Configuration lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PROJect lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PROJect Triggers the projection of the parameters of the navigation message The values of the TOE and TOC are calculated according to the selected current simulation time for System Time gt UTC For details see Project Navigation Message on page 119 This setting is only available for subsystem SMODeUSER Usage Event subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage RTPRojection subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage RTPRojection State subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage RTPRojection State subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage RTPRojection State subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage RTPRojection State Enables the instrument to internally perform a projection of the navigation message whenever this message is approaching its validity limit For details see Real Time Projection on page 118 This setting is only available for lt subsystem gt SMODe USER and subsystem SATellite GRTProjection OFF Pa
174. L rernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 190 GNSS System Configuration esee nennen nnn 192 Almanac RINEX Configuration eene enne nennen nennen nna 194 Time Conversion Configuration rrrrnnavnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennr 201 Static Multipath Configuration r rxsssvernnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnne 206 Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings 210 Global Signal Configuration rrrrnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennr 220 Power Tuning and Power SettingsS srrrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvennnnnnnvnennnnnn 221 Navigation Message Configuration eee 227 Atmospheric Configuration srrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvennnnnnnvnennnnnnnvennnnnnnenennnnnn 250 Assistance Data Settings rrunnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnennnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenene 253 S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands eee 267 Trigger SOUS eek Q 282 Marker Settings p 287 Clock nb cime X 290 Dj ewe cc ad 293 User Environment Files 2 coire eret enint
175. M EXECute ener nneen neret eret nnse tense tn itn senes n rre n nne 283 subsystem TRIGger EXECute subsystem TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut sssssssssssessseseeeeeene enne nnne 284 subsystem TRlGoerOUTbur DEL a vtElxed nennen rennen en nente sn renr enn nnns enne 286 eubevstemz TRlGoer OUT Putschz D I aw 285 ubevstemz TRlGoerOUlTbutzchz DEL av MA Ximum nennen nennen nennen eren nenne 285 ubevstemz TRlGoer OUT Putzchz DEL av MiNimmum eene enne nnne entren 285 subsystem TRlGoer OUTTPutschz MODE enne nene n eren enren neret nr sener etr sensn 287 lt subsystem gt TRIGger OUT Put lt ch gt OFFTIMG nennt ennt sen rnnn set nnt nnn 288 ubevstemz TRlGoer OUT Putszchz ON Time subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern E subsystem TRlGoerOUlTbutzchz PU Ge DiVider eene ener ener nenne 288 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuenoy esses rennen nennen 289 lt subsystem gt TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt PULSe wWitD h rennen nnne neret 289 subsystem TRIGger RMOLDO re etes aime een tent Ra gen a e Hd a BE ESPERE Ee ed ae E RYE MEER dE 283 subsystem TRIGger SbENgth Latio e ace tede riga teg heec aede a rae ue e rbd acr Dee aed 282 subsystem zIRIGger SOURCe 2 roce ciet e ebbe dbsreased er vu Pen em dE EEN 284 subsystem TRlGoert EvTemalzchz DEL aw 286 subsystem TRlGoert EvTemalzchzEINHbt enne nnnr nennen enn 286
176. MBber cesses 199 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GPS WNUMber essen 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex GNSS FILE eese nnne 199 lt s bsystem gt NAVigation RINex BEIDou FILE entren 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex GALileo FILE eeeseeeeeeeeeeee eene nennen 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex GLONass FILE eeesesesssese eene 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex GPSEILE esee enne 199 lt subsystem gt NAVigation RIN X lt GNSS gt STATE seien nennen enne nnns 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex DE IDou STATe sss nennen nnne 199 subsystem NAVigation RINex GA leo GTATe rennen nnn 199 SubsvstemzNAVigoation HihNev GL OhassGraTfe nnne 200 subsystem NAVigation RINex GPS STATe essere nennen rere rnnt 200 subsystem NAVigation RINex IMPort cesses nennen nnne tnn nr nennt 200 lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex UUAState ener ener nan 200 SubsvstemzNAVigoation HlhNex UENState nennen enne 200 SE SVIDSGNS S gt LIS WEE 200 subsystem SVID ch BEIDOuLIST ieii e turc interni ea iniaa ninakaa eaaa 200 su bsystemi S eebe leen edd eo ninh rede ntu ERR Den CREAR 0 201 subsystem SVID chz GLONass EIST3 cieli iacit detenta ro EELER EES 201 ele ele E e 201 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt FILE lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac BEIDou FILE lt Almanac gt lt subsystem gt
177. NSS signal a slight difference between the receiver position displayed on the Map View and the posi Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 140 Satellite Navigation User Interface Real Time S P O T tion displayed on the receiver software may be noticed at the beginning of a simu lation This accuracy of the Map View display is progressively increasing with the time elapsed and after the first satellite handover the deviation should completely disappear To query the receiver location for the selected time use the SCPI commands subsystem RT RLOCation COORdinates DECimal on page 274 subsystem RT RLOCation COORdinates DMS on page 275 e The Power View displays the current power levels of of the signals of the active satellites and their echos The displayed values are updated in real time EH GPS Real Time S DOT Display Type Power View v Real Time Information ime UTC 07 11 2010 17 04 03 600 Rec Loc 37 81425 S 144 96644 E 100 0m Rec Att R 21 600 P 90 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 0 97 2 18 Power dBm Space Vehicles Standard Accuracy Echoes Position Accuracy To query the satellite s absolute power for the selected time use the SCPI com mand lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt TAP lt us gt POWer ABSolute on page 272 e The Trajectory View displays the time variation of the azimuth and the satellite s elevation in the selected time window E amp GPS Real Time S
178. Navigation File Generate UTC File sudof Generate Waveform File 58 Generation of assistance data 22 Geographic location sese 69 Get next handover time see Next constellation change s s s Global Trigger Clock Settings GLONASS specific ephemeris parameters Greenwich Mean Time rnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnnnn H HDOP p 143 Heading E 72 Highway How to simulate er rre 44 Hybrid configuration see GNSS system configuration 15 86 l Inclination Angle at reference Time 119 He LA LER EE Initial Carrier Phase S Initial HDOP errrrnnvnvronrernrsnnnrrvvernernsnnnrrnnsrrnsnnnnrvnnnssnnnnnn lonospheric model Overview ee L E e ER 71 143 Leap second simulation Overview ee 28 Load GPS settings sssssssssssseeeenes 57 Localization data ssssssssssssseeeeeeneene 68 Benin 71 143 Longitude of Ascending Node of Orbit Plane at Weekly j P 119 LSPB Modified EEE ve 307 M ED M 119 ro 74 Aligritmeht hcc Ein ee dtd uec 78 Map VIEW eege e ue eco eai eere e e pat oca 139 Marker Mode 150 Marker Period 4 ee etitm vei eia niece 150 Market x Delay 74 idu n
179. Next Leap Second Date As of June 30 2012 the value of the Current Leap Second is 16 seconds Parameter Description SCPI Command Synchronize Synchronizes the leap sec subsystem NAVigation TCONversion ond according to the simula LEAP SYNC on page 206 tion time Current Leap Seconds Displays the currently used subsystem NAVigation TCONversion Ref 1980 leap second LEAP SEConds on page 205 Simulate Leap Second Enables disables the simula lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion Transition tion of the leap second tran LkAP SLSTransition STATe On page 205 R amp S SMBV only ano es ee Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 90 Satellite Navigation User Interface 3 6 Satellite Configuration Parameter Description SCPI Command Next Leap Second Determines the date of the subsystem NAVigation TCONversion Date next UTC time correction LEAP DATE on page 205 R amp S SMBV only Leap Sign The time correction is per lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion formed in steps of one sec LEAP SIGN on page 205 ond One second may be added to or subtracted from the current leap second value R amp S SMBV only UTC UTC SU for GLONASS satellites The Universal Time Coordinate UTC as used for GPS and Galileo can have a phase shift and a frequency drift compared to the Russian UTC basis UTC SU These set tings are provi
180. Nstellation on page 279 Satellites Power Tuning R amp S SMBV only Opens the Satellites Power Tuning dialog for setting the power relation between the signals of different GNSS standards Global Signal and Relative Power Configuration Enabled in Auto Localization mode Relative Power Configuration is enabled in Power Mode gt User Opens the Global Signa Configuration dialog to determine e the type of signal a SV ID will use in the moment the corresponding satellite becomes visible e in Power Mode gt User the relative power per SV ID 3 6 3 Configuration of the Satellite Constellation This section comprises the setting of the satellites constellation and the individual set tings of each enabled satellite The satellite constellation is enabled for configuration in Static and User Localization mode Global Ephemeris Real Time Projection R amp S SMBV only Forces ephemeris projection for all satellites i e enables the parameter Satz gt Navi gation Message Configuration Real Time Projection for all satellites Note Global Ephemeris Real Time Projection has to be disabled if assistance data will be generated Remote command subsystem SATellite GRTProjection on page 214 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 102 Satellite Navigation User Interface c C P Satellite Configuration Maximum Number of S
181. OC on page 232 af pag a f0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt T NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORection AF lt gr0 gt on page 231 1 As this parameter affects the satellite s orbit the value selected here also has an impact on the satellite s parameters Time Shift Doppler Shift and Duration Eleva tion gt 2 5 5 7 5 10 The value of these parameters will be updated automatically GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters Comprises the GLONASS specific ephemeris parameters Table 3 16 GLONASS Specific Ephemeris Parameters Parameter Satellite Ephemeris Type M Description Satellite ephemeris types GLONASS GLO NASS M SCPI command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SEType on page 247 SV accuracy URA Index F T Provides the predicted satellite user range accuracy URA lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris URA on page 249 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 123 Satellite Navigation User Interface Navigation Message Configuration Parameter SV Health B n 1 n Description A health value The user navigation equip ment analyzes only the MSB of this word e Bn 3 1nz21 Satellite not healthy e Bn 3 1n 0 Satellite is healthy SCPI command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris HEALth on page 246 Age
182. Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 277 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a Se S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands Hour integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 lt Minutes gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 lt Seconds gt float required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 lt WeekNumber gt integer required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 529947 Increment 1 lt TimeOfWeek gt float required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 Return values lt Constellation gt Number of Sats gt lt STD SV ID of Sat1 gt lt STD SV ID of Sat2 gt lt Remaining Time The query returns a string composed of the number of simulated satellites at the selected moment of time standard SV ID of all the satellites in the active constellation and if applicable the remaining time to the next exchange of satellites in seconds The lt Remaining Time gt is returned as a valid positive integer in seconds only when working in a mode where exchange of stellites is predefined or made automatic at the beginning of the simulation e g while working in the auto localization mode lt subsystem gt SMODe otherwise 1 is returned Example BB GPS SMOD AUTO BB GPS RT SCON GPS 1609 61455 Response 6 G24 610 G32 E11 E25 E14 1525
183. P subsystem OBSCuration RP View Type CATalog USI FILE on page 183 ER on page 183 Change the display orientation of the model The available view types depend on the current near environmental model Table 3 5 Graphical representation of a highway model View Type Distance vs Position View Type 7 Height vs Position Planes File Distance m SS SS 10 8 3 0 005 0 1 0 15 02 025 03 035 04 045 05 0 6 065 07 0 75 08 085 09 095 1 105 11 Highway View Type Receiver Position km Viewport from 0 000 fam Zoom Out zl 1 100 km Planes File Height m nN a e c 0 om 0 Highway View Type 05 06 06 Receiver Position km Viewport from 0 000 km 1 100 fam Zoom Out Obstacles Configuration Table Each roadside plane is defined in one table row The row index indicates the obstacle on the display view The left and right planes are color coded Permit tivity 5 0 Hide Editor 3 0 User Def 10 0 User Def 5 0 10 0 User Def 5 0 Filt Fil All w 30UserDef 5 0 R Ekor g 10 0 User Def 5 0 Mat Prop Permittivity 3 0 User Def 10 0 User Def 3 0 User Def 10 0 User Def 3 0 User Def 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 Insert Left Insert Right Delete Undo All Alignment Obstacles Configuration Table For roadsides planes determines according to whic
184. PAGE us EPHemeris NDELta 238 Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ODOT 238 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ODOT 238 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ODOT 239 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ODOT 239 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OMEGa 239 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OMEQGa 239 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OMEQGa 239 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OMEQGa 239 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OZERO 239 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OZERo 239 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OZERo 239 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OZERo 239 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SF1Reserved lt gr gt 239 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SISA 240 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage
185. PS GST BDT float required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 integer Range 0 to 180 Increment 1 RST 0 integer Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 RST 0 float Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 EAST WEST RST EAST 276 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a Se S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands lt LatitudeDeg gt integer Range 0 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LatitudeMin gt integer Range 0 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LatitudeSec gt float Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 lt LatitudeDir gt NORT SOUT RST NORT lt Altitude gt float Range 10000 to 1600000 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example See example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt RT SCONstellation lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Queries the constellation of the active satellites for the selected moment of time Query parameters lt TimeBasis gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC lt Year gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 31 Increment 1
186. PS 0BSCuration VOBS FILE var user my vobs canyon 2 defining the receiver position SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset X 15 SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset Y 2 SOURCel BB GPS OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset HEIGht 0 Example Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection The following example uses GPS entry standard SOURcel BB GPS SMODe AUTO SOURCe1 BB GPS VEHicle TYPE AIRCraft Selecting and enabling a ground and sea reflection environment SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration ENVironment GSR SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration TYPE USER SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration OMPath Defining the material property parameters SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration GSP STYPe USER SOURce1 BB GPS O0BSCuration GSP MPRoperty PERM Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 179 Obscuration and Auto Multipath SOURce1 BB GPS O0BSCuration GSP PERMittivity 10 SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration GSP CONDuctivity 1 Defining the obstacles and the distance to them and to ground SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration GSP GALTitude 0 SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration GSP OlHeight 500 SOURcel1 BB GPS 0BSCuration GSP 02Height 1000 SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration GSP OlDistance 1000 SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration GSP O2Distance 1000 el EU OBSCUraton T d 181 subsystem OBSCuration ENVironmeril 2 orte ciiee re aki e incen a ska dare ENEE nane Ra SERE deed 181 subsystem OBSOCuration PMODel esses nennen nnne h nh nennen 181 subsystem OB
187. Primary Settings lt subsystem gt SETTing STORe FAST lt Fast gt Determines whether the instrument performs an absolute or a differential storing of the settings Enable this function to accelerate the saving process by saving only the settings with values different to the default ones Note This function is not affected by the Preset function Parameters lt Fast gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 1 Manual operation See Save Recall on page 57 lt subsystem gt SETTing LOAD lt Filename gt Loads the selected file with GPS Galileo GLONASS settings The directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory path can also be specified in which case files in the specified directory are read Only files with the file extension gps galileo or glonass can be loaded Setting parameters Filename string Example See example Save Recall Files with user settings on page 158 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Recall on page 57 lt subsystem gt SETTing DELete Filename Deletes the selected file with GPS or Galileo settings The directory is set using com mand MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case files in the specified directory are deleted Only files with the file extension gps or galileo are deleted Setting parameters Filename string Example See example Save Recall Files with user settings on page 158 Usage Setting only Manual operation See S
188. RT OCONStellatiori 2 dria rnt etre ete pande exce uec eroe ug eee AE 279 lt subsystem gt AR AR HUT 280 subsystem RT RLOCation COORdinates DECimal sse nere 274 subsystem RT RLOCation COORdinates DMS T Kl E AR ee TER 277 lt subsystem gt RT UPDate ANTe nn i im enee eine a cd eei tex ee e eidi Eege su E Rap reg Dea pce ids 168 eubevstemz GA Telltte AGboofing A 193 lt subsystem gt SATellite ee EE 214 ubsveiemz GA Tellte GhRTProlechon nennen nennen nena nnn tnns enn rnt seen nnns nnn 214 subsystem SATellite st CACRate essent neret nnene nene neret ense nre n ness 214 lt subsystem gt SA Telltte etz Case 216 subsystem SATellite st DSHIft 12 2 mee ctio tete dena bann daa e re Ue ce uda adea See 215 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt DURation 215 ubsveiemz GA Tellte stz ENUMier A 215 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt FREQUCNCY ener nnne sdiri serene 216 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt ICPHase manwaronnarnnoravanesrnnerenennenennnnsennannennrnsvnnensvanenepnerenennenensennennennennrenens nnene 216 subsystem SATellite st MODuUlation esses nnnnr rsen nennen 217 PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 314 Satellite Navigation List of Commands ns lt subsystem gt SATellite lt
189. S BeiDou lonospheric Parameters on page 112 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric BEIDou IONospheric ALPHa lt ch0 gt lt Alpha gt Sets the parameter alpha 0 alpha 3 of the satellite s navigation message Suffix ch0 0 3 Parameters Alpha integer Range 128 to 127 RST 0 Manual operation See GPS BeiDou lonospheric Parameters on page 112 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric BEIDou IONospheric BETA lt ch0 gt Beta Sets the parameter beta 0 beta 3 of the satellite s navigation message Suffix lt ch0 gt 0 3 Parameters lt Beta gt integer Range 128 to 127 RST 0 Manual operation See GPS BeiDou lonospheric Parameters on page 112 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric GALileo IONospheric Al lt ch0 gt A i Sets the parameters effective lonization level 15 3 order of the satellite s navigation message Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 252 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a st tn ne ne mm Assistance Data Settings Parameters lt A i float Range a i0 0 2047 a i1 1024 1023 a i2 8192 8191 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GALILEO lonospheric Parameters on page 113 subsystem ATMospheric GALileo lONospheric SF ch SF Sets the parameters ionospheric disturbance flag for region 1 to 5 of the satellite s nav igation message Suffix ch 1 5 Parameters lt SF gt float Range 0 to 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See
190. SER Example See example Selecting a predefined test scenario on page 158 Manual operation See Test Scenario on page 59 SOURce lt hw gt BB GLONass ATSCenario Scenario Selects the file with the predefined A GLONASS A GNSS test scenario Table 4 3 A GLONASS test scenarios Test Scenario 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S6 Signaling ST1 SCPI W3GSIGST1 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 1 2 5 W3GPER1ST1 W3GPER2ST1W3GPER5ST1 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S7 Signaling ST2 LTESIGST2 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 1 2 5 ST2 LTEPER1ST2 LTEPER2ST2 LTEPERSST2 Table 4 4 A GNSS test scenarios Test Scenario SCPI 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S6 Signaling ST4 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 1 2 5 ST4 W3GSIGST4 W3GPER1ST4 W3GPER2ST4 W3GPER5ST4 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S7 Signaling ST4 LTESIGST4 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 1 2 5 ST5 LTEPER1STS LTEPER2ST5 LTEPERSSTS Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 161 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands mPue Primary Settings Parameters Scenario USER W3GSIGST1 W3GSIGST4 W3GPER1ST1 W3GPER5ST4 W3GPERSST 1 W3GPER2STA W3GPER2ST1 W3GPER1ST4 LTESIGST2 LTESIGSTA LTEPER1ST2 LTEPER1ST5 LTEPER2ST2 LTEPER2ST5 LTEPERSST2 LTEPERSST5 User No predefined test scenario is selected RS
191. SLength gt Defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the Single trigger mode SOUR BB GPS SEQ SING The unit of the entry is defined under Signal Duration Unit The maximum value for the sequence length depends on the selected unit It is possible to output deliberately just part of the signal an exact sequence of the sig nal or a defined number of repetitions of the signal Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 282 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands JT Trigger Settings Parameters lt SLength gt integer Range 1 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 1023 Example BB GPS SEQ SING sets trigger mode Single BB GPS TRIG SLEN 200 sets a sequence length of 200 chips The first 200 chips of the current frame will be output after the next trigger event Manual operation See Signal Duration on page 147 lt subsystem gt TRIGger RMODe Queries the current status of signal generation for all trigger modes with GPS modula tion on Return values lt RMode gt STOP RUN RST STOP Example BB GPS TRIG MODE ARET selects the Armed_Retrigger mode BB GPS TRIG SOUR EXT sets external triggering via the TRIGGER 1 connector BB GPS TRIG RMOD queries the current status of signal generation Response RUN the signal is generated an external trigger was executed Usage Query only Manual
192. SOCuration VOBS ROFFset X essere nennen rennes 182 subsystem OBSCuration VDBS ROFFsetY iieii arin iata d ENKE saacis 182 subsystem OBSOCuration VOBS ROFFset HEIGEN 182 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset MORIientation sees 182 subsystem OBSOCuration VOBS CATalog PREDefined sess 183 subsystem OBSOCuration RPL CATalog PREDefined sss 183 SUbevstemz OBGCuratton VOBGCATalogoUeGthR eene eene 183 subsystem OBSOCuration RPL CATalog USERQ sse rere nnne 183 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration VOBS FIEE erotici eade iaa 183 lt subsysten gt OBS Guration RPLFILE 4 EE 183 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration RPL ROFFset HEIGht asnnnnnnnnnnnnranarnrnvnvnnnnnnnnnennrererernrnrnnnn 184 subsystem OBS Curato RBD RuWINdow nnne nne ne 184 subsystem OBSOCuration RPL RWINdow STATe esses enne nnne nnne 184 subsystem OBSOuration RPL ILENgth cecinere nnne nnne nnne 184 subsystem OBSCuration FULL SCA Gis eiert eiue noua Satin e nete te REESEN 185 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL RWINGdoOW cite et teinte eterne i 185 subsystem OBSOCuration FULL RWINdow STATe essent 185 Subsvstemz OBGCuratton FULL AREACOUNT AA 186 subsystem OBSOCuration FULL AREA APPend assises nennen nennen 186 Subsvstemz OBGCuratton FULL AREA chzINSert
193. SS sys tem configuration comprising the satellites of two or more navigation standards Remote command lt subsystem gt HYBRid lt GNSS gt STATe on page 193 Use Common RF Frequency Enable this parameter if several R amp S SMBV instruments are connected to generate GNSS signal in the same GNSS band see figure 2 1 and phase coherent signal is required e g two instruments generating respectively up to 24 GPS 24 GLONASS and 24 BeiDou satellites in the L1 E1 RF band Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 86 Satellite Navigation User Interface GNSS System Almanac Configuration Settings This feature triggers the instruments to shift the baseband signal in the frequency domain so that both instruments can use the same RF frequency The effect is compa rable with enabled hybrid GNSS configuration With correct configured settings instru ments equipped with hardware option R amp S SMBV B90 generate phase coherent RF signals For more information on the required options connection and configuration steps refer to chapter 2 11 Generating GNSS Signal with Several Instruments on page 51 Remote command subsystem UCRF on page 193 Use Position Accuracy P Code GPS The generation of GPS signal modulated by P code requires the additional software option R amp S SMBV K93 This parameter is enabled only if GPS standard is activated in the GNSS system con figuration Activate Use Position Accuracy to enable the selection of
194. SVID20 GALileoMPATh TAP1 POWer 3 SOURce1 BB GPS SVID20 GALileoMPATh TAP1 DSHift 100 SOURce1 BB GPS SVID20 GALileoMPATh TAP1 CPHase 3 14 SOURce1 BB GPS SVID20 GALileoMPATh TAP2 TSHift 1 SOURcel BB GPS SVID20 GALileo MPATh TAP2 POWer 5 SOURce1 BB GPS SVID20 GALileo MPATh STATe ON Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 206 Static Multipath Configuration lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATHISTATE stent nnne nennen nnns 207 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou MPATR STATe sse rennen nene 207 subsystem SVID ch GALileo MPATR STATe sse nennen nnn 207 Subsvstemz SGVlD schz GlOhass MPAThSTATe nennen ennt 207 subsystem SVID ch GPS MPATR STATe sisse ener nnne rrr n nns 207 lt s bsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATRTARCOUN eren 208 subsystem SVID ch BElIDou MPATh TAP COUNL eese nennen nennt 208 subsystem SVID ch GALileo MPATh TAP COUN L eese tnnt 208 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass MPATh TAP COUNt rere nnn nns 208 subsystem SVID ch GPS MPATh TAP COUNE aicut ia eiecti stain rna enean 208 subsystem SVID ch GNSS MPATh TAP us CPHase esses 208 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou MPATh TAP lt us gt CPHase munnnnnnnnnanonnnnnnnrnrerernrnrnnnnnnnnen 208 Subsvsiemz SGVlDschzs GAl ijeoMbPAThTAbausz Case nnen 208 subsystem SVID ch GLONass MPATh TAP us CPHase
195. Satellite Navigation User Interface Localization Data E44 GPS Localization Data Geographic Location Attitude Waypoints Waypoints Attitude File Munich_Flight xtd Smooth Movement On Read Out Mode Position Format Latitude Longitude Altitude Yaw Heading Cyclic z DEG MIN SEC D 48 21 53 372 North 456 m I From Motion 92 460 deg Pitch Elevation I From Motion 0 000 deg D Roll Bank Spinning Rate IV From Spinning 0 000 deg 0 00 Hz D Vehicle Body Start Roll 0 000 deg Geographic Location Attitude Selects the geographic location of the GNSS receiver User Defined Waypoints Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 This mode enables the definition of the vehicle s body rotation param eters of the GNSS receiver when a static location in the WGS84 coor dinate system is defined e Latitude Longitude and Altitude e inistrument equipped with R amp S SMBV K103 also the attitude yaw pitch and roll The simulated altitude is the height above the ellipsoid HAE altitude requires option GNSS Enhancements R amp S SMBV K92 Enables the selection of a moving scenario i e the simulation of moving receiver Predefined or user waypoint files can be loaded The parameters Latitude Longitude and Altitude are set accord ing to the first simulated position defined in the file describing the movement i e the raw waypoint NM
196. Selecting a waypoint file The following example uses GPS entry standard SOURce1 BB GPS LOCation CATalog Response User Defined Waypoints New York San Francisco Beijing Seoul SOURce1 BB GPS LOCation SELect Waypoints SOURcel MMEM CAT var user Lists Gnss Waypoints Response 583768 52428800000 DIR 0 DIR 0 3gpp2 txt ASC 233703 Melbourne txt ASC 238949 Melbourne Movement txt ASC 2104 SOURcel BB GPS LOCation WAYPoints FILE var user Lists Gnss Waypoints Melbourne txt SOURce1 BB GPS LOCation WAYPoints ROMode CYCLic SOURce1 BB GPS LOCation COORdinates DECimal Response 144 966658 37 816663 100 Coordinates of the first simulation position defined in the selected file SOURce1 BB GPS LOCation COORdinates DMS Response 44 57 59 970 EAST 37 48 59 987 SOUT 100 lt subsystem LOC ation CA KE KE 170 subsystem LOCation SELect sessi nnne rere nnn nnns 170 amp subsystem LOCatliamWANYPoints FILE 2 in ica cu tain cana tado en etre exerce uta eeu tuba nd 170 subsystem LOCation WAYPoints ROMode essere nennen 171 subsystem LOCation COORdinates DECimal cessisse 171 lt subsystem gt LOCatien COORdinates DMS EE 172 subsystem dT OCation EE 173 ele EO We PITGR MEE 173 lt s bsystema LOCatON ROLL a nere enin nen en nennt nnns nsa s ss sn sns diaaa iiia 173 subsystenmis LOCation Y AW FMQOTIGB TEE 173
197. Set to 0 on page 115 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer PSTandard Sets the power relation between the signals belonging to the different navigation stand ard according to the relation determined in the specifications Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Standard on page 115 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CABCAGeo lt CaToGeo gt lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CABCAIgso lt CaTolgso gt lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CABCAMeo lt CaToBdsMeo gt lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CAE1Def lt CaToE1def gt lt subsystem gt POWer INTer CARCA lt CaToRca gt Sets the power relation between the signals belonging to the different navigation stand ards The power level of the GPS signal C A is used as reference Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 225 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Parameters lt CaToRca gt lt CaToE1def gt lt CaToGeo gt lt CaTolgso gt lt CaToBdsMeo gt Example Manual operation float Range Increment RST Default unit float Range Increment RST Default unit float Range Increment RST Default unit Power Tuning and Power Settings 0 to 6 0 01 3 03 dB 6 to 0 0 01 1 5 dB 0 to 6 0 01 4 5 dB See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 See GPS C A GALILEO E1 DEF GPS C A GLONASS R C A GPS C A BeiDou GEO MEO IGSO B C A on page 115 lt subsystem
198. T Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 279 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands HH Q gs S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands Return values Constellation Number of Sats gt lt STD SV ID of Sat1 gt lt STD SV ID of Sat2 gt The query returns a string composed of the number of satellites in the optimal constellation and the standard SV ID of the satel lites Use this information as a basis for manually performed exchange of satellites Example BB GPS SMOD USER BB GPS NAV SIM TBAS GPS BB GPS NAV SIM WNUM 1609 BB GPS NAV SIM TOW 61455 BB GPS GOC BB GPS RT SCON GPS 1609 61455 Response 6 G11 E11 E19 E28 G19 G14 1 The 6 active satellites G11 E11 E19 E28 G19 G14 build the sat ellite constellation BB GPS RT OCON GPS 1609 65455 Response 6 G20 E20 E23 64 G24 E31 The optimal constellation for the selected moment of time con sists of 6 satellites G20 E20 E23 G4 G24 E31 Example See also example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Usage Query only Manual operation See Get Optimal Constellation on page 102 lt subsystem gt RT RATTitude lt TimeBasis gt Year Month Day lt Hour gt Minutes Seconds lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Queries the receiver attitude parameter
199. T USER Manual operation See Test Scenario on page 59 lt subsystem gt SETTing CATalog SOURce lt hw gt BB BEIDou SETTing CATalog SOURce lt hw gt BB GALileo SETTing CATalog SOURce lt hw gt BB GLONass SETTing CATalog SOURce lt hw gt BB GPS SETTing CATalog Reads out the files with GPS Galileo GLONASS settings in the default directory The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory Only files with the file extension gps galileoorrespectively glonass are listed Return values Catalog string Example See example Save Recall Files with user settings on page 158 Usage Query only Manual operation See Save Recall on page 57 subsystem SETTing STORe Filename Stores the current settings of the specified GNSS standard into the selected file The directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory are read Only the file name has to be entered Configurations are stored with the predefined file extension gps for GPS settings or galileo for Galileo settings Setting parameters Filename string Example See example Save Recall Files with user settings on page 158 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Recall on page 57 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 162 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands M SS a
200. T radians sec BROADCAST ORBIT 5 e IDOT radians sec 3X 4D19 12 Codes on L2 channel e GPS Week to go with TOE Continuous number not mod 1024 e L2 P data flag BROADCAST ORBIT 6 SV accuracy meters 3X 4D19 12 SV health MSB only TGD seconds IODC Issue of Data Clock BROADCAST ORBIT 7 e Transmission time of message sec 3X 4D19 12 of GPS week derived e g from Z count in Hand Over Word HOW e spare e spare e spare A 2 2 Example of a RINEX File The following part of a script has the ephemeris info of satellites 4 and 9 at toc toe 352800 2 10 N GPS NAV DATA RINEX VERSION TYPE teqc 2002Mar14 Lisa McCormick 20090501 01 40 41UTCPGM RUN BY DATE Solaris 2 7 Ultra 2 cc SC5 0 Sparc COMMENT rnw Dataflow Processing 04 30 2009 00 00 21 COMMENT END OF HEADER 409 430 2 0 0 0 7 157493382690D 05 1 523403625470D 11 0 000000000000D 00 5 100000000000D 01 9 125000000000D 00 5 024495004670D 09 3 085066632770D 00 3 930181264880D 07 8 587007410820D 03 7 828697562220D 06 5 153723627090D 03 3 528000000000D 05 3 725290298460D 09 1 098217239560D 01 1 024454832080D 07 9 410577584670D 01 2 186875000000D 02 4 847291251310D 01 8 071407635100D 09 3 571577341960D 10 1 000000000000D 00 1 529000000000D 03 0 000000000000D 00 2 400000000000D 00 0 000000000000D 00 6 053596735000D 09 5 100000000000D 01 3 456060000000D 05 4 000000000000D 00 909 430 2 0 0 0 5 332380533220D 05 1 932676241270D
201. T Configuration and Real Time Commands subsystem ADGeneration IlONospheric CREate Filename Stores the current assistance data settings into the selected ionospheric file The direc tory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory are read Only the file name has to be entered Assistance data settings are stored as ionospheric file with the specific file extensions rs ion Parameters Filename string Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Generate lonospheric File on page 135 S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands Example Retrieving real time settings The following example uses GPS entry standard RST SOURcel BB GPS SMODe AUTO SOURCe1 BB GPS HYBRid GALileo STATe 1 SOURCe1 BB GPS HYBRid GLONass STATe 1 SOURCe1 BB GPS HYBRid BEIDou STATe 1 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite COUNt Response 12 constalation with 12 satellites SOURce1 BB GPS VEHicle TYPE LVEH SOURce1 BB GPS LOCation SELect Waypoints SOURce1 BB GPS LOCation WAYPoints FILE Melbourne Car Motion xtd SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation ALManac GPS FILE Lists Gnss Gps Almanac GPS SEM678 txt SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation WNUMber 1702 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation TOWeek 144016 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation lation TBASis UTC n x C SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation lation DATE
202. T OWeek eese 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS TOAPDplicability WNUMBber eseseeene 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac OGNGG WNUl Mier 199 subsystem NAVigation ALManac BEIDou DATE BEGin 196 SubevstemzNAVioation AL ManacBEIDou DATEENDN enne nnne 196 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac BEIDOu FILE nennen nnne nnne nnne enn 195 subsystem NAVigation ALManac BEIDou TOAPpDplicability TOWeek esee 198 SubevstemzNAVioation AL Manac BEIDou TOAboltcabiltv WNU Mer 198 SubevstemzNAVioation AL Manac BEIDou WNUlMber emen nnne nnns 199 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac GALileo DATE BEGIN 0 0 eee cee cece cece testcase eeeeeeaeeseaeeseeeseeeeaees 196 SubevstemzNAVioation AL Manac GA ileoDATEEND nennen nennen rnnt erret 196 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GALileo FILE sss eene enne nnne nnne 195 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GALileo TOAPDplicability TOWeek 198 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GALileo TOAPDplicability WNUMber sees 198 SubevstemzNAVioation AL Manac GA leo WhNlUlMber nennen nnne nnns 199 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GLONass FILE esee eene 195 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GLONass TOAPplicability DATE esses 197 Fee Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 311 Satellite Navigation List of Commands
203. TAP us CPHase Phase subsystem SVID ch GLONass MPATh TAP us CPHase Phase subsystem SVID ch GPS MPATh TAP us CPHase Phase Sets the carrier phase used in case of multipath simulation Suffix us 1 10 Parameters Phase float Range 0 to 6 28 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit rad Example See example Configuring the multipath settings for SV ID 20 on page 206 Options R amp S SMBV K92 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift lt DopplerShift gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift lt DopplerShift gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift lt DopplerShift gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift lt DopplerShift gt Defines the additional Doppler shift of the simulated signal of the satellite used to sim ulate multipath conditions Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 208 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands e n Static Multipath Configuration Suffix us 1 10 Parameters lt DopplerShift gt float Range 10 0E3 to 10 0E3 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit Hz Example See example Configuring the multipath settings for SV ID 20 on page 206 Options R
204. TCONversion GPS AONE sss nennen 202 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion NG AZERo 202 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion DEIDou AZERo erre 202 SubsvstemzNAVioaton TCOhverslon GA leo AZERo eene 202 SubsvstemzNAVigoation TCOhverslon GL Ohass A Ztho een 202 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion GPS AZERo essere 202 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion ONG TOTAL 203 apu CF C C C C p wRF te Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 201 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands EO n A A Time Conversion Configuration lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion DBE IDou TOT nnne 203 SubsvstemzNAVigoation TCOhverslon GA leo TOTAL 203 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GLONass TOT rrrnnaranarannvnnnnnnonnnnennrererrrarnrnnnnnnnn 203 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion GPS TOT sse nene 203 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion GNSS WNOT sse 203 SubsvstemzNAVigoation TCOhverslon BE IDouWNOT nennen 203 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion GALileo WNOT eese 203 subsystem NAVigation TCONversion GLONass WNOT sss eee 203 SubsvstemzNAVilgoation TCOhverslon GPS WNOT nennen enne nens 203 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion UTCSu AONE
205. The file is stored with the predefined file extension wv The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definable Setting parameters Filename string Example MMEM CDIR D user waveform sets the default directory BB GPS WAV CRE gnss 1 creates the waveform file gnss 1 wv in the default directory Usage Setting only Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 164 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands User Environment Antenna Pattern and Body Mask Manual operation See Generate Waveform File on page 58 4 3 User Environment Antenna Pattern and Body Mask Example Defining the vehicle type and selectg a xvd file The following example uses the GPS entry standard Query the available vehicle description files and load one of them SOURcel BB GPS SMODe AUTO SOURce1 BB GPS VEHicle TYPE PEDestrian SOURce1 BB GPS VEHicle CATalog PREDefined Response Aircraft Ship Pedestrian MMEM CDIR var user myXVDFiles SOURCe1 BB GPS VEHicle CATalog USER Response xvd pedestrian SOURce1 BB GPS VEHicle FILE var user myXVDFiles my pedestrian Example Selecting an antenna file The following example uses the GPS entry standard A user defined antenna pattern file exist The file contents are described in chapter A 1 3 Antenna Pattern Body Mask Files on page 301 Query the available antenna pattern files and loads one of them SOURcel BB GPS SMODe AUTO
206. The 6 active satellites G24 G10 G32 E11 E25 E14 build the sat ellite constellation An exchange of satellites will be performed in 1525s Example See also example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Usage Query only Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 278 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands 4 PT T S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands lt subsystem gt RT OCONstellation lt TimeBasis gt Year Month Day Hour Minutes Seconds lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Queries the optimal constellation for the selected moment of time Query parameters lt TimeBasis gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC lt Year gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 lt Hour gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 lt Minutes gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 lt Seconds gt float required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 lt WeekNumber gt integer required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 529947 Increment 1 lt TimeOfWeek gt float required for TimeBasis GPS GST BD
207. UER Y GNSS System Almanac Configuration Settings Parameter SCPI command Almanac File lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt FILE on page 195 lt subsystem gt SVID lt GNSS gt LIST on page 200 Week Number lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt WNUMber on page 199 Week Span subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS DATE BEGIn on page 196 subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS DATE END on page 196 Time of Applicability subsystem NAVigation ALManac GNSS TOAPplicability TOA 2 TOWeek on page 198 lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt TOAPplicability WNUMber on page 198 Time of Applicability TOA lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac DATE on page 197 GLONass TOAPplicability lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac TIME on page 197 GLONass TOAPplicability 1 Week Number and Week Span no SCPI command for Glonass 2 TOA format for GPS WN TOW WN_REF 6 Jan 1980 00 00 00 UTC TOA format for Galileo WN TOW WN_REF 22 August 1999 00 00 00 UTC RINEX Configuration Selects and activates one RINEX File per navigation standard Predefined or user RINEX files can be loaded Perform Import RINEX Files to upload the selected file The ephemeris and satellite clock parameters of the SV IDs included in the selected RINEX file are retrieved from this file However the parameter
208. VWNUlMier nenne 265 subsystem ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DECimal sse 260 subsystem ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DMS sse 261 subsystem ADGeneration GPS LOCation SYNChronize sess 259 subsystem ADGeneration GPS LOCation URADius sss ener ennt 262 ubevstemz ADGeneratton GbPG GVlD GdNChrontze seen nnne nnne nnn 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS SVID lt ch gt ACQuisition BLOCK 256 ubevstemz ADGeneratton GbG GVlD zchzGAlata o on eeir eetriiesirtsirstrrnnrirnstinnttrnnsstnnsen nnt 258 ubevstemz ADGenerattonGbG GVlD zchzGTAaTe nennen nennen nnne 259 subsystem ADGeneration GPS SYNChronize esses nennen nennen rennen nnne nn 259 subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData DATE sss eene enne eene nnn nennen nnn n trina 263 ubevstemz ADGeneratton GG TOAData DURaton ener 264 subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData RESolution essent 264 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData SYNCHToniZe nennen 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASIS eene nennen renis 262 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME ei subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData TOWeek esses nennen 264 ubevstemz ADGeneratton GG TOADatawWNUlMier nennen nennen rentre rennen 265 subsystem ADGeneration lONospheric CREate sess rennes 267 lt s
209. a Remote command subsystem ADGeneration IONospheric CREate on page 267 Generate Navigation File Access the Select Navigation File dialog for saving the generated navigation model ephemeris The generated navigation file is a file with extension xs nav the selected file name and data format as defined with the parameter Data Format Additionally RINEX file can be also generated to export the ephemeris assistance data The reference for the generating of the ephemeris page of each satellite is the Time of Assistance Data The generated RINEX file is a file with extension xx n for GPS and Galileo and lt xx gt g for GLONASS where xx stands for the year of the recording e g 12n for GPS ephemeris recording in 2012 The generated RINEX file is conformed to the standard RINEX file format as described in chapter A 2 1 RINEX Format Description on page 304 The generated navigation file comprises the GNSS standard ephemeris and clock cor rection parameters of the navigation model see table 3 22 Table 3 22 Contents of the generated navigation file GPS Parameter Unit SatlD Sat Status C A or P on L2 boolean URA Index boolean SV Health boolean IODC L2 P Data Flag boolean SF 1 Reserved Ten sec toc sec af2 sec sec2 afi sec sec afo sec Cr meters Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 136 Satellite Navigation User Interface
210. ac TOA e ftp ftp glonass iac ru MCC ALMANAC The file extension of the Glonass almanac file is xxx agl For detailed information on the content and frame structure of navigation data refer to the specifications 2 1 5 On the fly configuration of the satellites constellation The simulation mode User Localization makes the satellite constellation user defina ble Not only the individual satellite parameters and the navigation message parame ters are enabled for configuration but active satellites can be turned off or the satellite constellation can be extended with new satellites at any time and on the fly without causing an interruption of the currently running signal calculation Changes in ephem eris of an active satellite and the power settings are performed without signal calcula tion restart too Hence satellites ephemeris adjustment can be performed during the time the satellite is disabled and the updated parameters will be used from the moment this satellite is active again This functionality can be used to perform manual exchange of satellite s at user defined moment of time This on the fly re configuration during signal generation is especially beneficial by time consuming measurements or test 2 1 6 Signal generation with projection of the ephemeris navigation data The instrument employs a special algorithm for projecting the ephemeris navigation data that allows the generation of a navigation message without lim
211. ac Configuration Settings 3 4 GNSS System Almanac Configuration Settings gt To access this dialog select Main Dialog gt GNSS System Configuration amp H GPS GNSS System Almanac Configuration zl x GNSS System Configuration Active GNSS Standards GPS Iv On Use Common RF Frequency M On GALILEO iv On Use Position Accuracy P Code jv On GLONASS Iv On GPS Anti Spoofing jv On BeiDou iv On Almanac Configuration Almanac File Week Number Time Of Applicability sts Gnss Gps Almanac GPS SEM678 txt 1702 19 08 2012 26 08 2012 1702 14745635 678 147000s RINEX File Iv Update UTC and Atmospheric Params SS Gps Rinex GPS WeekK678 Day1 12n Galileo Rinex GAL Weekb78 Day1 12n lonass Rinex GLO Veek678 Day1 12g amp iDou Rinex Beidou Vveek678 Day1 12n Import RINEX Files jv Update Frequency Number Glonass The dialog comprises the general settings for GNSS system configuration such as selecting the GNSS standards and configuring the almanac and RINEX files Activate GNSS Standards Defines the navigation standards that will be part of the GNSS system configuration Only the satellites of an enabled standard are configurable in the Satellite Configura tion dialog The navigation standard of the entry point is always enabled The further available nav igation standards depend on the installed options Note Throughout this description the term hybrid cinfiguration denotes a GN
212. ag name Parameter Description lt attitudecontinu If lt attitudecontinuous no gt the attitude angles to be read are ous bounded by 2 PI The lt attitudecontinuous yes gt means that they are not boun ded lt waypoints gt Description of the trajectory as a list of waypoint vectors lt waypointvec lt data gt Coordinates of the waypoint in the format selected by lt coordsystem gt tor gt e time longitude latitude altitude geod wgs84 e time X Y Z cart ecef e time EAST NORTH UPPER enu Depending on the lt datavectorhastimestamp gt 3 or 4 values are evaluated with property waypointformat positiononly Depending on the property waypointformat more information can be provided The following is a list of the information appended to the coordinates of the waypoint mentioned above e lt property waypointformat positiononly gt no additional information e property waypointformat position attitude yaw heading pitch elevation roll bank e g time longitude latitude altitude yaw pitch roll The vehicle attitude yaw pitch and roll parameters are configured relative to the local horizon e property waypointformat position velocitymagnitude vel e g time X Y Z vel e property waypointformat position velocitymagnitude attitude vel yaw heading pitch elevation roll bank e g time EAST NORTH UPPER vel yaw pitch roll e property waypointformat position veloci
213. al Time SPOT Display Type Sky View v Sky View Real Time Information ime UTC 07 11 2010 17 22 38 200 Rec Loc 48 14550 N 11 57748 E 500 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 0 65 1 18 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 28 15 Legend Los OG LOS A P loss LOS Echoes LOS Echoes A P loss Echoes OG Obscured Ee Inactive Green color visible satellite with antenna power loss Possible further configurations e f your goal is to reproduce the exact satellite navigation message as in the reality load a RINEX file e Adjust the start simulation time The RINEX file should be around the same day of the start simulation time e Adjust the atmospheric parameters 2 10 15 Simulating the Effect of an Antenna Pattern 1 Execute GNSS Main Dialog gt Set To Default to adjust the instrument s settings to a standard set of operating conditions 2 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt GNSS System Configuration and enable the required navigation systems e g a hybrid GPS Galileo and GLONASS configuration 3 Enable GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt Auto Localization 4 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Maximum Number of Satel lites gt 24 5 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt User Environment gt Vehicle Type gt Aircraft 6 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt User Environment gt Vehicle Description File gt Select Predefined Vehicle Description gt Aircra
214. al generation is stopped BB GPS TRIG EXEC executes a trigger signal generation is started again Usage Event Manual operation See Execute Trigger on page 62 lt subsystem gt TRIGger SOURce Source Selects the trigger source Parameters lt Source gt INTernal EXTernal Example BB GPS TRIG SING selects a trigger mode that requires a trigger BB GPS TRIG SOUR EXT sets external triggering via the TRIGGER connector Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 148 subsystem TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut Output enabled for Trigger Source External Enables disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event Parameters Output 0 1 OFF ON RST 1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 284 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a Trigger Settings Example BB GPS TRIG SOUR EXT sets external triggering BB GPS TRIG EXT SYNC OUTP ON enables synchrounous output to external trigger Manual operation See Sync Output to External Trigger on page 148 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch DEL av Delay Defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the signal expressed in terms of chips Command BB GPS TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed can be used to restrict the range of values to the dynamic r
215. al selection NA not assigned It is not allowed to assign the same SV ID to more than one satellite of one GNSS standard Hence the selection N A can be used to exchange the assigned SV ID to different sat ellites belonging to the same standard Parameters Svid integer Range 1 to 40 Increment 1 RST 1 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See SV ID on page 104 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt TSHift lt TimeShift gt Defines the propagation delay from satellite to receiver Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 219 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands A u m Ss 5 Global Signal Configuration Parameters lt TimeShift gt float time shift in chips Range 0 to 2499999 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Time Shift chips on page 108 4 13 Global Signal Configuration lt subsystem gt SVID SIGNal COUPling State Enables the configuration of all SV IDs simultaneously Current settings are overwrit ten Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 1 Manual operation See SV ID Signal Coupling on page 110 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt SIGNal lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou SIGNal Signal lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt
216. all available SV ID of each of the enabled GNSS standards according to the selected almanac For each available SV ID a signal can be assigned Refer to table 3 8 for an overview of the supported signals pre GNSS standard SV ID Signal Coupling For quick configuration enables the configuration of all SV IDs simultaneously i e the value set for the first available SV ID is used for all other Current settings are overwrit ten Remote command subsystem SVID SIGNal COUPling on page 220 GPS Galileo GLONASS BeiDou Signals and Power In Auto Localization mode determine the type of signal and the power a SV ID will use in the moment the corresponding satellite becomes visible Remote command subsystem SVID ch GNSS SIGNal on page 220 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt POWer on page 220 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 110 Atmospheric Configuration 3 8 Atmospheric Configuration To access this dialog 1 Select Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration 2 Select Atmospheric Configuration GPS Atmospheric Configuration EE ini xl Klobuchar Satellite Navigation User Interface Atmospheric Configuration The atmospheric configuration comprises the parameters for adjusting the iono spheric and tropospheric models of the simulation as well as the corresponding atmospheric navigation parameters transmitted by each GNSS if available GPS and Galileo assume specific ionospheric models and h
217. ameters to motion direction even if the Waypoint Attitude has attitude information like for example in a xtd file with property waypointformat position attitude gt For specific applications like automotive it is realistic to set the yaw and pitch to vehi cle s motion direction because the usual body axes angles of a car are in the direction of the velocity vector For other applications however like for example aeronautics with a landing plane this parameter is not usefull the nose of the plane is in an upward direction at the time when the plane is moving downwards Tip Enable the parameter From Motion if you simulate an automotive scenario with instrument without the option R amp S SMBV K103 Remote command subsystem LOCation YAW FMOTion on page 173 subsystem LOCation PITCh FMOTion on page 173 subsystem LOCation ROLL FSPinning on page 173 Spinning Rate For instruments equipped with R amp S SMBV K103 simulates a constant rate of change of the roll defined with Vehicle Body Start Roll Remote command subsystem LOCation SPIN RATE on page 174 Vehicle Body Start Roll For instruments equipped with R amp S SMBV K103 defines the start angles of rotation of the vehicle Remote command subsystem LOCation SPIN SRoll on page 174 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 72 Satellite Navigation User Interface Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings 3 3 Obscuration and Auto Multi
218. amp S SMBV K92 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh TAP lt us gt POWer lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou MPATh TAP lt us gt POWer lt Power gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo MPATh TAP lt us gt POWer lt Power gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass MPATh TAP lt us gt POWer lt Power gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS MPATh TAP lt us gt POWer lt Power gt Sets the additional power of the satellite in dB used to simulate multipath conditions See chapter 3 6 1 Power Configuration on page 92 for information about the power calculation Suffix us 1 10 Parameters Power float Range 10 to 0 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dB Example See example Configuring the multipath settings for SV ID 20 on page 206 and example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Options R amp S SMBV K92 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh TAP lt us gt TSHift lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou MPATh TAP lt us gt TSHift lt TimeShift gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo MPATh TAP lt us gt TSHift lt TimeShift gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass MPATh TAP lt us gt TSHift lt TimeShift gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS MPATh TAP lt us gt TSHift lt TimeShift gt Sets an additional delay of the selected satellite used to simulate multipath conditions Suffix us 1 10 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 209 Satellite Navi
219. and the chip clock is derived internally from this The multiplier is entered with the com mand subsystem CLOCk MULTiplier Parameters Mode CHIP MCHip RST CHIP Example BB GPS CLOC MODE CHIP selects clock type Chip i e the supplied clock is a chip clock Manual operation See Clock Mode on page 152 lt subsystem gt CLOCk MULTiplier lt Multiplier gt Specifies the multiplier for clock type Multiplied subsystem CLOCk MODE MCHip in the case of an external clock source Parameters lt Multiplier gt integer Range 1 to 64 Increment 1 RST 4 Example BB GPS CLOC SOUR EXT selects the external clock source The clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector BB GPS CLOC MODE MCH selects clock type Multiplied i e the supplied clock has a rate which is a multiple of the chip rate BB GPS CLOC MULT 12 the multiplier for the external clock rate is 12 Manual operation See Clock Multiplier on page 153 lt subsystem gt CLOCKk SOURce Source Selects the clock source Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 290 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands ORE Clock Settings For two path instruments selecting EXTernal is only possible for path A since the external clock source is permanently allocated to path A Parameters Source INTernal EXTe
220. ange i e the range within which a delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and sig nal Parameters Delay float Range 0 to 2432 1 chips Increment 1 chip RST 0 Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 DEL 1600 sets a delay of 1600 chips for the signal on connector MARKER 2 Manual operation See Marker x Delay on page 151 lt subsystem gt TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt DELay MINimum lt subsystem gt TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt DELay MAXimum Queries the maximum marker delay for setting subsystem TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON Return values Maximum float Range 0 to max Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range BB GPS TRIG OUTP DEL MAX queries the maximum of the dynamic range Response 2000 the maximum for the marker delay setting is 2000 chips Usage Query only Manual operation See Current Range without Recalculation on page 151 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 285 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands EO Trigger Settings subsystem TRIGger OUTPut DELay FlIXed Fixed Restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range In this range the delay can be set without restarting the marker and signal If a delay is entered in setting ON but is outside this range the m
221. anual 1173 1427 12 08 166 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands es nme User Environment Antenna Pattern and Body Mask subsystem APATtern CATalog PREDefined Queries the names of the predefined antenna pattern files in the system directory Only files with the file extension ant pat are listed Example see example Selecting an antenna file on page 165 Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K102 Manual operation See Antenna Pattern Body Mask File on page 64 subsystem APATtern CATalog USER Queries the names of the user defined antenna pattern files in the default directory The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory Only files with the file extension ant pat are listed Example see example Selecting an antenna file on page 165 Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K102 Manual operation See Antenna Pattern Body Mask File on page 64 subsystem APATtern FILE Filename Loads the selected antenna pattern file Only files with the file extension ant pat are loaded see chapter A 1 3 Antenna Pattern Body Mask Files on page 301 Parameters Filename string Example see example Selecting an antenna file on page 165 Options R amp S SMBV K102 Manual operation See Antenna Pattern Body Mask File on page 64 subsystem APATtern ANTenna LIST Queries the antenna identifiers antenna id specified in
222. arameters Power float Range 20 to 20 dB for the query command 0 dB for the settings command Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Manual operation See Power on page 105 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt POWer RSIGnal lt RefSignal gt For mixed signals like C A P queries the signal used as a reference by power calcu lation The power reference is fixed to C A for mixed signals For signals modulated only with the P code the power reference is P Parameters lt RefSignal gt CA P RST CA Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 224 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands J4 AJ J Power Tuning and Power Settings Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K93 Manual operation See Power Reference on page 106 lt subsystem gt POWer TOTal Queries the total power of the GNSS signal Return values lt Power gt float Range 145 to 30 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dBm Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Usage Query only Manual operation See Total Power on page 100 lt subsystem gt POWer INTer PZERo Sets the Inter Standard Power relations to 0 dB Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Usage Event Manual operation See
223. arameters require software option R amp S SMBV K92 The time conversion parameters are enabled only in User Localization and Static modes The basis for the time conversion is the UTC The parameters of each of the navigation standards are set as an offset to the UTC To retrieve the time configuration parameters from an imported RINEX file enable the parameter Update UTC and Atmospheric Parameters For better readability the values of the time correction parameters are input as integer in the same way as they are included in the satellite s navigation message but the cor responding Scale Factor and the Scaled Value are displayed too Parameter Description SCPI Command A 0 Constant term of polynomial Ao lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GPS AZERo on page 202 A 1 15 order term of polynomial A lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GPS AONE on page 202 t ot UTC data reference Time of Week subsystem NAVigation TCONversion tot GPS TOT on page 203 WN_t UTC data reference Week Number lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion WN GPS WNOT on page 203 Leap Second Configuration The GPS time is not corrected to match the Earth s rotation and does not consider time corrections that are typical for the UTC such as the leap second for instance The UTC time corrections are performed periodically the date of the next expected correction is determined by the parameter
224. ario a static or a moving receiver may not always receive the signal of all theoretically visible satellites for its current position In rural or suburban areas in tunnels or in car parking places some or more satellites may be partly or completely obscured by a wall or other vertical plane Receivers experience additionally effects of signal reflection caused by a water surfaces e g the sea or the ground This option enhances the basic GNSS options to automatically simulate different obscuration and multipath effects caused for example from surrounding buildings in static or moving scenarios e g urban canyon The figure 2 3 is an example of a receiver placed in a car driving on a street The com bination option R amp S SMBV K101 K92 allows you to define any test scenario includ ing the particular moving behavior and surrounding buildings with their height and the distance to the receiver as well as the material they are built from Fig 2 3 Example Vertical obstacles for simulation of obscuration and multipath from surrounding buildings Approaches in the different simulation modes In User Localization mode the simulated user s environment conditions and effects are applied on the user defined subset of satellites Satellite Navigation General Description m T HMm U zc 5e Realtime Option GNSS Exte
225. arker signal for the associated MARKER output Note One marker signal In instruments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K96 disa bled parameter Use Position Accuracy P Code GPS and enabled satellites constella tion with more than 12 satellites only one marker signal is available Restart R amp S WinIQSIM2 only A marker signal is generated continuously A trigger event causes a restart This marker marks one repetition of the ARB and hence depends on Duration Of Satellite Simulation PPS A marker signal is generated for every start of second The used time basis is displayed rigth to the field The Pulse Width is set in the corresponding field The input is expressed as a number of chips 10PPS A marker signal is generated ten times per second hence once every 100 ms 1PP2S A marker signal is generated for every second start of second The used time basis is displayed rigth to the field The Pulse Width is set in the corresponding field The input is expressed as a number of chips Remote command subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe WIDTh on page 289 Pulse A regular marker signal is generated The clock frequency is defined by entering a divider The frequency is derived by dividing the chip rate by the divider The input box for the divider opens when Pulse is selected and the resulting pulse frequency is displayed Remote command subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe DIVider on page 288 sub
226. at gt Power level of the individual satellites 4 For the satellites undergoing static multipath effects a Select Sat gt Multipath Configuration gt Power and adjust the power level of the corresponding fading tap b Enable Multipath Configuration gt State gt On 5 f you work in Auto Localization mode select Satellite Configuration gt Global Signal and Relative Power Configuration and allocate the signals and the power values for the satellites that are not simulated yet 6 If not already enabled set GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt On The power level of the generated GNSS signal is displayed with the parameter Total Power 2 10 13 Handling NMEA Files 1 On your receiver record the NMEA messages to a log file with an extension nmea 2 Use an external hard disk USB stick or a LAN connection and transfer this NMEA log file to a network directory or the instrument 3 Select the GNSS main dialog Geographic Location Waypoints Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 43 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow 4 Select the GNSS main dialog gt Select Waypoint File navigate to the directory the loaded NMEA file is stored and select the file The instrument decodes the logged NMEA file nmea and automatically config ures the user location to the values retrieved from the logged file The information about possible receiver s moving is considered t
227. atellites Determines the maximum number of satellites that can be simulated The minimum allowed values depends on the selected Simulation Mode Configurations with one sat ellite are allowed only in Static mode Auto Localization and User Localization modes require four satellites or more Generating the navigation signal with more than 6 satellites is enabled only for instru ments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K91 K96 The maximum number of satellites is additionaly limitted by the available hardware resources of the instrument espessialy if P Code modulated signals are enabled in the GNSS system configuration Refer to chapter 2 4 1 Channel Budget on page 23 for detailed description The GNSS implementation in the R amp S WinIQSIM2 provides one satellite signal The number of satellites selected determines the number of rows in the Constellation Table Remote command subsystem SATellite COUNt on page 214 Constellation Table Comprises the setting of the satellites constellation These settings are enabled for configuration in Static and User Localization mode Satellite State Constellation Table Activates deactivates the satellite Note In User Localization mode changing the satellites state is performed on the fly and without interruption of the signal generation unless e Obscuration amp Auto Multipath gt Near Environment is different than LOS or e Antenna Pattern Body Mask File is di
228. ath subsystem OBSCuration RPL ROFFset HEIGht lt Heigth gt Sets the receiver height offset i e the antenna altitude relative to the ground Parameters lt Heigth gt float Range 0 to 500 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration RPL ROFFset HEIGht 20 SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration RPL ILENgth ON Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Receiver Height Offset on page 80 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration RPL RWINdow lt RepWindow gt Sets the repeating period in km of repeating objects Parameters lt RepWindow gt float Range 1E to 1E6 Increment 1E RST 10E3 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Repetition Window on page 80 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration RPL RWINdow STATe lt State gt Enables the repetition of the defined objects Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST OFF Example SOURCel BB GPS OBSCuration RPL RWINdow 10E3 SOURCel1 BB GPS OBSCuration RPL RWINdow STATe ON The defined objects are repeated eacht 10km Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Repetition Window on page 80 subsystem OBSCuration RPL ILENgth State If enabled assumes roadside planes with infinite width Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 184 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands X TP A Obscuration and Auto Multipath Parameters State
229. ation 12 Select GPS Main Dialog Real Time S P O T Display Type Sky View Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 49 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow L i GPS Real Time S P 0 T Display Type Sky View zl Sky View Real Time Information ime UTC 07 11 2010 17 03 53 600 Rec Loc 37 81609 S 144 96644 E 100 0m RecAtt R 158 400 P 90 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 1 27 2 48 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 04 15 Legend Los OG LOS P loss LOS Echoes LOS Echoes A P loss en Echoes OG Obscured G GPS e Kee E GALILEO R GLONASS The display is updated in real time and you can observe how depending on the current GNSS receiver position the spinning rate and the current active antenna sector the received GNSS signal changes 13 Select Display Type Power View EH GPS Real Time S P 0 T Display Type Power View Real Time Information Time UTC 07 11 2010 17 09 53 800 Rec Loc 37 81309 S 144 98280 E 100 2m Rec Att R 39 240 P 90 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 1 59 3 75 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 16 14 Power dBm Space Vehicles Standard Accuracy Echoes Position Accuracy The power levels of the space vehicles are updated in real time Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 50 Satellite Navigation General Description 2 11 Generating GNSS Signal with Several Instruments Generating GNSS Signal with Several Instrume
230. ation mode the expected time of each upcoming exchange is dis played in the Real Time S P O T view by the parameter Next Constellation Change Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt DURation on page 215 Initial Code Phase enabled only in Static mode and for arbitary navigation data source Sets the initial code phase In R amp S WinIQSIM2 the actual simulated resolution for initial code phase depends on the sample rate The selected Initial Carrier Phase is internally rounded to a sample To increase hte sample rate use the Oversampling function Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt CPHase on page 216 Pseudorange Displays the propagation delay from satellite to receiver in meters and is calculated as follow Pseudorange Time Shift c Standard Chip Rate where c is the speed of light In Auto power mode this parameter affects the calculation of the displayed power level of the corresponding satellite The parameter is enabled for configuration in Simulation Mode gt Static In R amp S WinIQSIM2 this parameter is fixed to 0 Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PRANge on page 217 Pseudorange Bias R amp S SMBV instruments only Sets a bias to the Pseudorange The parameter is updated on the fly and can be used to bias the pseudorange of a satellite The parameter is enabled for configuration in Auto User Localization modes Remote command lt su
231. atitude gt float Range 90 to 90 Increment 1E 6 RST 0 lt Altitude gt float Defines the altitude in meters above sea level Range 10000 to 1600000 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Reference Location on page 132 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou LOCation COORdinates DMS lt LongitudeDeg gt lt LongitudeMin gt lt LongitudeSec gt lt LongitudeDir gt lt LatitudeDeg gt lt LatitudeMin gt lt LatitudeSec gt lt LatitudeDir gt lt Altitude gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo LOCation COORdinates DMS lt LongitudeDeg gt lt LongitudeMin gt lt LongitudeSec gt lt LongitudeDir gt lt LatitudeDeg gt lt LatitudeMin gt lt LatitudeSec gt lt LatitudeDir gt lt Altitude gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 260 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands M M l lM Assistance Data Settings lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass LOCation COORdinates DMS lt LongitudeDeg gt lt LongitudeMin gt lt LongitudeSec gt lt LongitudeDir gt lt LatitudeDeg gt lt LatitudeMin gt lt LatitudeSec gt lt LatitudeDir gt lt Altitude gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DMS lt LongitudeDeg gt lt LongitudeMin gt lt LongitudeSec gt lt LongitudeDir gt lt LatitudeDeg gt lt LatitudeMin gt lt LatitudeSec gt lt LatitudeDir gt lt Altitude gt
232. ave Recall on page 57 lt subsystem gt DURation Duration Determines the duration of the satellite simulation Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 163 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Po Primary Settings The resulting duration of the simulation is calculated as follow Duration of Satellite Simulation Duration of Simulation Doppler Shift 1 Carrier where Froarier is the frequency selected with the parameter RF Band The maximum duration of satellite simulation depends on the Oversampling factor and the ARB memory size of the connected instrument Parameters Duration float Range 20 0e 3 to 64 Increment 20 0e 3 RST 20 0e 3 Example SOUR BB GPS DUR 20 sets 20 ms for the satellite simulation Manual operation See Duration Of Satellite Simulation on page 61 lt subsystem gt FILTer OSAMpling lt OSampling gt Determines the upsampling factor A higher upsampling factor improves the filtering but increases the waveform size pro portionally This leads to limitation for the maximum Duration Of Satellite Simulation Parameters lt OSampling gt integer Range 2 to 32 RST 2 Manual operation See Oversampling on page 61 lt subsystem gt WAVeform CREate Filename For R amp S WinIQSIM2 only This command creates a waveform using the current settings of the GNSS dialog
233. aximum possible delay is set and an error message is generated Parameters Fixed 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range Manual operation See Fix marker delay to current range on page 151 subsystem TRIGger EXTernal ch DELay Delay Specifies the trigger delay expressed as a number of chips for external triggering Parameters Delay float Range 0 to 65535 Increment 0 01 chip RST 0 0 chips Example BB GPS TRIG SOUR EXT sets an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector BB GPS TRIG DEL 50 sets a delay of 50 chips for the trigger Manual operation See External Delay on page 149 lt subsystem gt TRIGger EXTernal lt ch gt INHibit lt Inhibit gt Specifies the number of chips by which a restart is to be inhibited following a trigger event Applies only in the case of external triggering Parameters lt Inhibit gt integer Range 0 to 67108863 Increment 1 chip RST 0 Example BB GPS TRIG SOUR EXT selects an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector BB GPS TRIG INH 200 sets a restart inhibit for 200 chips following a trigger event Manual operation See External Inhibit on page 149 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 286 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands 4 20 Marker Settings Marker Settings subsystem TRIGger OUTPutech MODPB
234. bscuration amp Auto Multipath gt Near Environment is different than LOS or Antenna Pattern Body Mask File is different than Isotropic e n Auto power mode the displayed value is the power level of the satellite at the start of the simulation t0 A configured Inter Standard Tuning is automatically applied The power level changes automatically as function of the satellite receiver distance Pseudorange but the display is not updated Refer to chapter 3 6 1 Power Configuration on page 92 for detailed information about the power calculation Remote command subsystem SATellite st POWer on page 224 lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt TAP lt us gt POWer ABSolute on page 272 3 6 4 Individual Satellite Settings Comprises the settings of the selected satellite beginning of the simulation or at the time the specific satellite is activated These val ues will be updated internally to implement moving satellites and receivers However the displayed values are not updated o The values displayed in this section are the initial values of the parameters at the Standard Chip Rate Displays the chip rate Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt SCRate on page 218 Frequency Number enabled for GLONASS satellites only Frequency number indicates the sub carrier used to modulate the GLONASS satellite Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 105 Satellite Navigation User Interface
235. bsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PRBias on page 218 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 107 Satellite Navigation User Interface ae Satellite Configuration Time Shift chips The parameter is enabled for configuration in Static mode In R amp S WinIQSIM2 it is fixed to 0 Displays the propagation delay from satellite to receiver The time shift is displayed in chips In Localization mode this parameter is not configurable and is set automatically depending on the simulated Geographic Location Attitude and on the satellite s orbit Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt TSHift on page 219 Doppler Shift The parameter is enabled for configuration in Static mode Enters the Doppler shift of the simulated signal of the satellite The simulation of Dop pler shifted signals can be used to check the receiver characteristics under more real istic conditions than with zero Doppler In Localization mode this parameter is not configurable and is set automatically depending on the simulated Geographic Location and on the satellite s orbit The relevant change to the chip rate of the code is carried out automatically The cur rently valid values for Doppler shifted carrier frequency and chip rate are displayed under e Resulting Start Frequency e Resulting Start Chip Rate e Resulting P Code Chip Rate Remote command
236. bsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUC lt Cuc gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUC lt Cuc gt Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correction Term to the Argument of Latitude Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 234 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands T P neg n Navigation Message Configuration Parameters lt Cuc gt integer Range 32768 to 32767 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUS lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUS Cus lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUS lt Cus gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUS lt Cus gt Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Argument of Latitude Parameters lt Cus gt integer Range 32768 to 32767 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ECCentricity lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ECCentricity lt Eccentricity gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ECCentricity lt Eccentricity gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris EC
237. c file for the navigation standard The file is selected using lt subsystem gt NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt FILE Return values lt WeekNumber gt integer Range 0 to 529947 RST 1488 Example BB GPS NAV ALM GPS WNUM Response 585 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex lt GNSS gt FILE lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex BEIDou FILE Filename lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GALileo FILE Filename lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GLONass FILE Filename lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GPS FILE lt Filename gt Selects and activates one RINEX file per navigation standard Perform subsystem NAVigation RINex IMPort to upload the selected file Parameters Filename string Example See example Configuring a RINEX file on page 194 Manual operation See RINEX Configuration on page 88 lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex lt GNSS gt STATe lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex BEIDou STATe lt State gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GALileo STATe lt State gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 199 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands cG P H S me Almanac RINEX Configuration lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GLONass STATe State lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GPS STATe State Activates a RINEX configuration file previously selected see subsystem NAVigation RINex GPS FILE a
238. calization M sp 36 Generating A GPS Custom Build Scenarios User Localization Mode 37 Generating A GPS Test Signal eene meer 38 Generating A GNSS Test ona 39 Generating GNSS Assistance Data 39 Generating Multipath Gcenarios enne 40 Generating GPS Signal Modulated with P Code 40 Configuring the Navigation PDarameters emen 41 Adjusting the Power Geitmgs emm eee nennen 42 Handling NMEA FEiles ennemi 43 Creating GNSS Scenarios in a User Environment seen 44 Simulating the Effect of an Antenna Pattem ee 48 Generating GNSS Signal with Several Instruments seeeees 51 Functional Overview of the Basic Offline GNSS eene 53 Single satellite GNSS eigonal senem 53 Typical Offline VWorktflow nennen ennemis 53 Generating an one satellite static generic GNSS signal with R amp S WinIQSIM2 53 Loading and Processing a GNSS Waveform in the ARB of the Rohde amp Schwarz Signal GENS 1 140 m A 54 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 4 Satellite Navigation Contents J n aH n 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 3 6 4 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 13 1
239. cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeee lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E5BDVS lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt J INAV E5BHS subsystem GVlD zchz GA leohNME Gesaoel DAG us DNA TO ubevstemz GVlD zchz GA leo bOuWer nennen enne nennen nt nnr sentis nnn rnnn sena lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALil 0 SIGNAI nennen ener enne nennen nennen subsystem SVID ch GEONASS LIS T2 1 irrito er eerte depen eet a nare NEA esie cbr ena dde dee 201 ubevstemz GVlD zchz GLOhassMpAThGTATe enne eene nnne nnr nennen nnne 207 Subevstemz GVlD zchz GLOhass MPDATRTAP COUN neret 208 ubevstemz GVlD chz GL OhassMpAThTAb us ChbHase nennen 208 Subevstemz GVlD zchz GLOhass MPDAThTAb usz DH 208 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass MPATh TAP lt us gt POWer 209 subsystem SVID ch GLONass MPATh TAP us TSHift esses ees 209 ubevstemz GVlD zchz GL OhasshNME GeagebAGE COUN ener 230 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PRESet essen eene 230 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PRO Ject sse eene nnns 231 PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 317 Satellite Navigation List of Commands OO EG lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage RTPRojection s ubevstemz GVlD zchz GL OhNass
240. ce Location The Reference Location section is enabled in Map View display and provides the settings for configuration of the reference location Reference Location Coordinates The reference location is identified by a latitude and a longitude The values can be displayed in decimal or DMS format The display format is determined by the parame ter Position Format Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 143 Satellite Navigation User Interface SIHM OP H 3 13 4 Real Time S P O T For static receivers the initial values of the latitude and longitude are automatically set to the values of the Geographic Location Attitude selected in the Localization Data sec tion of the main dialog When simulating moving receivers the initial values are derived from the waypoints file and set to the coordinates of the first receiver position Parameter Description Position Format Sets the format in which the Latitude and Longitude are displayed e DEG MIN SEC The display format is Degree Minute Second and Direction i e XX XX XX XX Direction where direction can be North South and East West e Decimal Degree The display format is decimal degree i e XX XXXXX where indicates North and East and indicates South and West The Position Format selected heir changes the format the Receiver Location
241. cia 0 dB e Inter Standard Power Tuningeps cya cat 1 DEF 1 5 dB i e the displayed power levels of the Galileo satellites are internally boosted with 1 5 dB Calculation of the absolute power levels at the beginning of the simulation t t0 e Absolute Powersat ca Ref Power Displayed Powersa on 115 dBm 1 58 dB 113 42 dBm e Absolute Powersauz ener Ref Power Displayed Powergatwo ener 115 dB 1 46 dB 113 54 dB e Absolute Powergaws ener Ref Power Displayed Powergaty3 ener 115 dBm 1 49 dB 113 51 dB e Absolute Powergaty4 cia Ref Power 115 dBm Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 96 Satellite Navigation User Interface Satellite Configuration Select GNSS General Settings Real Time SPOT and select Display Type Power View and compare the displayed power levels L i GPS Real Time S P 0 T Display Type Power View Real Time Information Time UTC 07 11 2010 17 10 45 200 Rec Loc 37 81666 S 144 97552 E 100 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 1 447 2 31 E m B S o n Space Vehicles j Standard Accuracy Position Accuracy Fig 3 6 Example Power levels at the beginning of the simulation Another way to query the current power levels is by using the corresponding SCPI command e g see lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt TAP lt us gt POWer ABSolute on page 272 The total power of the generated GNSS signal
242. cribes the power response matrix of each antenna The instrument retrieves the phase response matrix from the phase file If the required phase file does not exist a zero phase response is assumed Both file ant pat and phase should have the same content but different data section data see table 1 4 The following are two examples of the file format an extract of the description of an antenna pattern with three antennas and description of an antenna with four sectors Example Anntena pattern with three antennas The follwoing is an extract of the description lt xml version 1 0 encoding ISO 8859 1 lt antenna_pattern gt antenna descr count 3 use same pattern no antenna id 1 YawAxis Z offset 5 5 PitchAxis Y offset 0 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 301 Satellite Navigation Annex RD CHUMn User Environment Files RollAxis X offset 11 0 Yaw offset 0 Pitch offset 0 Roll offset 0 antenna id 2 YawAxis Z offset 5 5 PitchAxis Y offset 4 RollAxis X offset 11 0 Yaw offset 0 Pitch offset 0 Roll offset 120 antenna id 3 YawAxis Z offset 5 0 PitchAxis Y offset 4 RollAxis X offset 11 0 Yaw_offset 0 Pitch offset 0 Roll offset 240 gt lt antenna descr az res 1 00000000e 000 az res lt elev res 1 00000000e 000 elev res data 21
243. cription Default unit lt RDot gt lt PDot gt attitude angular rate of change rad sec lt YDot gt lt RDotDot gt lt PDotDot gt attitude angular second order derivative rad sec 2 lt YDotDot gt lt RDotDotDot gt attitude angular third order derivative rad sec 3 lt PDotDotDot gt lt YDotDotDot gt See also chapter 2 5 8 Hardware in the Loop HIL on page 29 Parameters lt ElapsedTime gt float Elapsed time from the simulation start For description of the other parameters see table 4 6 Range 0 to 99999999 Usage Setting only Options R amp S SMBV K92 motion only R amp S SMBV K92 K103 motion attitude lt subsystem gt RT HILPosition LATency Queries the time delay or prediction latency between the time specified with the parameter ElapsedTime in a HIL command subsystem RT HILPosition MODE A Or lt subsystem gt RT HILPosition MODE B and the time this command is actually executed in the R amp S SMBV You can use the determined value for latency calibration See also chapter 2 5 8 Hardware in the Loop HIL on page 29 Return values lt Latency gt float Range min to max Increment 0 001 RST 0 Example SOURce1 BB GPS RT HILPosition LATency Usage Query only GNSS System Configuration lt subsystem gt HYBRid lt GNSS gt STA TC 2 ccccc s0c scncesesseasesscaasececesenanaeaeccedqacecaceeaenctndeasas 193 Subsvstemz HvBbRid BEIDoutSTATe
244. cu EE 72 Stat FROM 72 SOR UA vette 119 Satellite Navigation Index Square Root of the Semi Major Axis ss 119 lee Eve Eu e DT 57 State EE 56 ig C 147 Street orientation 2 oorr e 74 Suburban How to simulate emnt 44 Supported signals esee 103 Surface Cotiductivily EE 85 Permittivity Power loss Property SV Accuracy SV accuracy URA Index E TI 123 249 SV Health ient rire derer aa SV Health B n 1 n SV ID Signal Coupling EE 110 Sync Output to External Trigger sussssss 148 Synchronization mode Synchronize Assistance Data sssssssssss 132 Synchronizing Flight simulator 1 2 eric erre rhet eto terit 29 Synchronous signal generation sssssss 51 System latency atre Ure oTov 29 Systemi TNE ee ET 67 T DD 123 uos 123 Tag WAYPOINWWECIOF uenerat rr rb eee ker nne 296 TAU Ca fO m 126 246 Tb Index TbsInterval EE 123 Test scenarios A GLONASS HM 21 chic 21 EcL Rukke 20 Time conversion OVEIVICW H 27 TIMES OF EPhemeris rrr t temere 119 Time of Simulation Time of Week TOW tener tr rne rennen 68 TIME OSC ERR
245. cy of the marker signal Response 511511 038 the resulting pulse frequency is 511 511 kHz Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 150 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe WIDTh Width Sets the Pulse Width for 1PPS and 1PP2S marker mode lt subsystem gt TRIG OUTP MODE PPS PP2S Parameters lt Width gt integer Range 1 to 800 RST 1 Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 MODE PPS enables the 1PPS marker signal BB GPS TRIG OUTP1 PULS WIDT 2 sets the pulse width for the marker signal on output MARKER 2 to the value 2 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 150 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 289 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands 4 21 Clock Settings Clock Settings el ee De ee RTE 290 subsystem CEOCIEMUETiIpli amp r 212i uetrcdeia oa ocu tete rea Lear hune ERKENNEN EEN 290 amp subsystem CEOCKSOURDB uiii edere ance X axta exe eue orde cu suu r NENNEN i yen ek Rn e eR Rau Las 290 lt subsystem gt CLOCK SYNChronization EXECute rononanonnnnnanonnnnononananenennnnnnnannnnnnnnennnen 291 lt subsystem gt CLOCk SYNChronization MODE ccccceeceeeceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeteseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 291 lt subsystem gt CLOCk MODE lt Mode gt Enters the type of externally supplied clock lt subsystem gt CLOCk SOURce EXTernal When MCHip is used a multiple of the chip clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector
246. ded for configuration of the UTC differences UTC UTC SU as transmit ted by GLONASS satellites Parameter Description SCPI Command UTC SU Ref Indicates the UTC UTC SU time lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion erence Date conversion reference date UTCSu DATE on page 204 A_0 Constant term of polynomial Ao vir subsystem NAVigation TCONversion tual UTCSu AZERo on page 204 A 1 15 order term of polynomial A vir lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion tual UTCSu AONE on page 204 The Glonass satellites transmit the offset between GPS and GLONASS system time as part of their navigation message They assume only a delay and no frequency drift The time offset is calculated as following GPS GLONASS GPS UTC UTC UTC SU GLONASS UTC SU 3h 3h For hybrid GNSS configuration with activated GLONASS satellites this GPS GLO NASS time offset is maintained constant by automatically adjusting the GPS UTC drift parameters A_1 T_ot and WN ot while changing the UTC UTC SU parameters Satellite Configuration To access this settings 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 91 Satellite Navigation User Interface c X V M snst Satellite Configuration 2 Select Satellite Configurat
247. desired satellite standard e g GPS To simplify the description the selected satellite standard is referred as an entry standard D e The instrument may be equipped with different satellite navigation options To e Since most of the parameters provided for configuration are similar and do not depend on the entry standard this description uses the SW option GPS A GPS R amp S SMBV K44 K65 and the GNSS global options R amp S SMBV K91 K92 K96 Extension to 12 and 24 Satellites GNSS Enhancements as a reference Satellite standard dependent settings are described separately or the differences are explicitly stated e The GNSS implementation in the R amp S WinIQSIM2 is a simplified offline version of the real time one and provides the capability to generate an one satellite generic signal Therefore the relevant parameters are adjusted accordingly in R amp S WinlQ SIM2 You find the differences explicitly stated in the description 3 1 GNSS Main Dialog To access the available satellite standards GALILEO Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation and select the desired satellite standard e g GPS The dialog is split into several sections The upper section of the dialog is where you enbale the GNSS digital standard call the default settings and select the simulation mode Set To Default Save Recall Data List Management Update RF Frequency RF Band L1 E1 vi Test Scenario User Defined DI Si
248. dre dn et dee C 159 el EE E E One E 160 lt subsystem REBANd TL 159 subsystem RT GNSS SVID ch AZIMuth essent nennen 269 lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt ELEVation enne 271 ubevstemz HI OGNGG GVlD zchz Abus POMWerAbGolute 272 ubevstemz HI BE IDou GVlD zchz AZlMug enne nennen nnne tren nnn rnnr nenne 269 subsystem RT BEIDou SVID ch ELEVation 271 subsystem RT BElIDou SVID ch TAP us POWer ABSolute sss 272 subsystem RT GALileo SVID ch AZIMuth essen nennen 269 lt subsystem gt RT GALileo SVID lt ch gt ELEVation nere 271 ubevstemz HI GA leo GVilD zchz Abus POWerAbBGolute 272 subsystem RT GLONass SVID ch AZIMuth essen enne nnne enn nennen nnn 270 lt subsystem gt RT GLONass SVID lt ch gt ELEVation nennen eene 271 ubevstemz HI GL Ohass GVlD zchzTAb cusz POMWerAbGolute 272 subsystem HIT GPS GVlD cchz AZIMuth nennen ene ennennrenre erre nen nnns 270 subsystem RT GPS SVID ch ELEVation 211 ubevstemz HI GG GVlD zchz Abus POWerAbBGolute 272 subsystem RT HILPosition LATENCY einen nennt nennt diaaa aiaiai 192 lt s bsystem gt RT Hi Position MODE A 190 subsystem RT HIEPosition MODE B 1 3er teer riori guarder kaserne 191 subsystem A Eis Ae EE 269 subsystem
249. e Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 241 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands P T U Navigation Message Configuration Parameters B GD gt integer Range 512 to 511 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo FNAV Parameters on page 127 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV E5ADVS lt Dvs gt Defines the Data Validity Satellite Status transmitted on E5a E5apys of the freely accessible navigation message F NAV Parameters lt Dvs gt integer Range 0 to 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo FNAV Parameters on page 127 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV E5AHS Hs Defines the Signal Health Status for E5a E5aps of the freely accessible navigation message F NAV provided by the Eda signal for Open Service Parameters lt Hs gt integer Range 0 to 3 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo FNAV Parameters on page 127 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV K K Defines the F NAV Almanac Scheduling start index of the freely accessible navigation message F NAV provided by the E5a signal for Open Service Parameters lt K gt integer Range 0 to 3 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo FNAV Parameters on page 127 Opera
250. e AIO All 1 An internally generated sequence containing 0 data or 1 data e PNxx An internally generated pseudo random noise sequence e Pattern An internally generated sequence according to a bit pattern Use the Pattern box to define the bit pattern e Data List Select DList A binary data from a data list internally or externally generated Select Select DList to access the standard Select List dialog Select the Select Data List gt navigate to the list file dm iqd gt Select to select an existing data list Use the New and Edit functions to create internally new data list or to edit an existing one Use the standard File Manager function to transfer external data lists to the instrument See also Main Dialog gt Data List Management Remote command subsystem NAVigation DATA on page 175 subsystem NAVigation DATA DSELect on page 176 subsystem NAVigation DATA PATTern on page 176 Almanac RINEX Opens the GNSS System Almanac Configuration Settings dialog One almanac file and one RINEX file per navigation standard can be selected The available navigation standards depend on the installed options Selection of RINEX files is enabled for User Localization mode and requires installed assistance option of the navigation standard used as an entry standard For description of the RINEX file format see chapter A 2 RINEX Files on page 303 Time Conversion Configuration Opens t
251. e PAGE us EPHemeris CRC 234 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRC 234 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRS 234 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRS 234 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRS 234 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRS 234 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUC 234 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUC 234 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUC 234 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUC 234 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUS 235 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUS 235 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUS 235 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUS 235 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ECCentricity 235 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us g
252. e PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIC lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIC lt Cic gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIC Cic lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIC lt Cic gt Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correction Term to the Angle of Inclination Parameters lt Cic gt integer Range 32768 to 32767 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt J EPHemeris CIS lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIS Cis lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIS lt Cis gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIS lt Cis gt Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Angle of Inclination Parameters lt Cis gt integer Range 32768 to 32767 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CLTMode lt CltMode gt Type of code for L2 This value does not have any impact on the actual used ranging code of the generated satellite Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 233 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands mP g Pn Navigation Message Configuration Parameters
253. e See example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt RT lt GNSS gt SVID lt ch gt TAP lt us gt POWer ABSolute lt subsystem gt RT BEIDou SVID lt ch gt TAP lt us gt POWer ABSolute lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt lt subsystem gt RT GALileo SVID lt ch gt TAP lt us gt POWer ABSolute lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt lt subsystem gt RT GLONass SVID lt ch gt TAP lt us gt POWer ABSolute lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt lt subsystem gt RT GPS SVID lt ch gt TAP lt us gt POWer ABSolute lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Queries the absolute power of a specified Tap of a specific satellite at a selected moment of time Note The power refers to the reference signal component in case of many signals simulated with this specific satellite e g C A when simulating a satellite with signals C A P Q Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 272 Satellite Navigation b_n Suffix lt us gt Query parameters lt TimeBasis gt lt Year
254. e The provided navigation possibil ities in the dialog are self explanatory The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definable the file extension is however predefined The follwoing file extension are used gps galileo glonass respectively Determines whether the instrument performs an absolute or a differential storing of the settings Enable this function to accelerate the saving process by saving only the settings with values different to the default ones Note This function is not affected by the Preset function Remote command SOURce lt hw gt BB GPS SETTing CATalog on page 162 SOURce lt hw gt BB GALileo SETTing CATalog on page 162 subsystem SETTing STORe on page 162 SETTing STORe FAST on page 163 subsystem SETTing LOAD on page 163 SETTing DELete on page 163 subsystem subsystem Data List Management Accesses the Data List Management dialog used to create and edit data lists amp Data List Management Data List Edit Data List All data lists are stored as files with the predefined file extension dm_iqd The file name and the directory they are stored in are user definable Note All data lists are generated and edited by means of the SOURce BB DM subsys tem commands Files containing data lists usually end with dm iqd The data lists are selected as a data source for a specific function in the individual subsy
255. e 18 of subframe 4 7 ION BETA lonosphere parameters BO B3 of alma 2X 4D12 4 nac DELTA UTC AO A1 T W Almanac parameters to compute time in 3X 2D19 12 219 UTC page 18 of subframe 4 A0 A1 terms of polynomial T reference time for UTC data W UTC reference week number Contin uous number not mod 1024 j LEAP SECONDS Delta time due to leap seconds l6 END OF HEADER Last record in the header section 60X Table 1 6 Navigation message file data record description HEADER LABEL Columns DESCRIPTION FORMAT 61 80 PRN EPOCH SV CLK e Satellite PRN number 12 513 F5 1 e Epoch Toc Time of Clock 3D19 12 year 2 digits month day hour minute second e SV clock bias seconds e SV clock drift sec sec e SV clock drift rate sec sec2 BROADCAST ORBIT 1 e IODE Issue of Data Ephemeris 3X 4D19 12 e Crs meters e Delta n radians sec e MO radians BROADCAST ORBIT 2 e Cuc radians 3X 4D19 12 e Eccentricity Cus radians sqrt A sqrt m Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 304 Satellite Navigation Annex nF T 02000 RINEX Files HEADER LABEL Columns DESCRIPTION FORMAT 61 80 BROADCAST ORBIT 3 e Toe Time of Ephemeris sec of GPS 3X 4D19 12 week e Cic radians OMEGA radians CIS radians BROADCAST ORBIT 4 e i0 radians 3X 4D19 12 e Crc meters e omega radians e OMEGA DO
256. e Power 3 Set the Satellite Configuration gt Reference Satellite 4 If a hybrid GNSS System Configuration is activated select Satellite Power Tun ing gt Inter Standard Tuning gt Set to Standard to simulate the nominal power dif ference between the GNSS standard as defined in the standard 5 Forthe satellites undergoing static multipath effects Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 42 Satellite Navigation General Description m M n OXUMSRS RN RE ERNEUT Typical Realtime Workflow a Select Satz gt Multipath Configuration gt Power and adjust the power level of the corresponding fading tap b Enable Multipath Configuration State On 6 Set GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt On The power level of the generated GNSS signal is displayed with the parameter Total Power The power levels displayed in the Satellite Configuration gt Constellation Table are the power level at the simulation s start moment Select Real Time SPOT Display Type Power View to display the current power levels Power settings in User power mode This power mode is enabled in both Auto Localization and User Localization simula tion modes 1 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Power Mode gt User 2 Set the Satellite Configuration gt Reference Power 3 Set the Satellite Configuration gt Constellation Table gt S
257. e Selection are set The middle part of the dia log comprises the parameters of the Reference Location and Time Configura tion The lower part of the dialog offers assistance in the generation of the Alma nac lonospheric Navigation UTC and Acquisition files The R amp S SMBV provides a two level synchronization concept The Synchronize All function enables you to perform a fast reload of all parameters in the dialog Selective settings alignment is enabled by means of the Synchronize functions in each of the individual parameter groups Although the selection of the satellite the configuration of the reference location and the time configuration parameters are fully user definable it is recommended to use the synchronisation function to retrieve the values for the rele vant parameters from the GNSS main dialog as basis for further configuration Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 131 Satellite Navigation User Interface Assistance Data Generation Assistance Mode Defines the type of assistance data to be loaded Value Required Option A GPS R amp S SMBV K65 A GALILEO R amp S SMBV K67 A GLONASS R amp S SMBV K95 A BeiDou R amp S SMBV K107 Remote command subsystem ADGeneration MODE on page 259 Synchronize All Synchronize Parameter Description SCPI command Synchronize Synchronizes the parameters of the subs
258. e almanac file is used to extract all navigation parameters These parameters are transmitted as part of the navigation message Manual configuration of the navigation parameters 1 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt User Localization 2 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Sat gt Navigation 3 Adjust the Navigation Message Configuration Number of Pages 4 Select Navigation Message Configuration Page Number and configure the con tent of the selected ephemeris page s 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for all GNSS satellites Extracting the ephemeris the satellite clock correction parameters and the GLO NASS frequency numbers from RINEX file 1 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt User Localization 2 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt RINEX and select RINEX file 3 Select GNSS System Configuration gt RINEX Configuration gt Import RINEX Files Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 41 Satellite Navigation General Description m 4 Typical Realtime Workflow 4 Enable GNSS System Configuration RINEX Configuration Update Frequency Number GLONASS On 5 Select GNSS System Configuration gt RINEX Configuration gt State On The ephemeris and satellite clock correction part of the navigation message are extracted from the selected RINEX file for a GNSS system and used to simulate the position of the satellit
259. e current lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass satellite at TOE tb i e the middle of Tb NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris Interval ZDN on page 250 XDDOT_n The OX acceleration coordinate of the cur lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass rent satellite due to solar and lunar gravita NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris tional effects at TOE tb i e the middle of XDDN on page 249 Tb Interval YDDOT n The OY acceleration coordinate of the cur lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass rent satellite due to solar and lunar gravita NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris tional effects at TOE tb i e the middle of YDDN on page 249 Tb Interval ZDDOT_n The CZ acceleration coordinate of the cur lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass rent satellite due to solar and lunar gravita NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris tional effects at TOE tb i e the middle of ZDDN on page 249 Tb Interval 1 The coordinates correspond to the PZ 90 coordinate system GLONASS Clock Correction Parameters Comprises the GLONASS specific parameters for clock correction Table 3 17 GLONASS Clock Correction Parameters Parameter Description SCPI command TAU n a f0 SV Clock bias correction coefficient lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection TAUN on page 246 GAMMA n SV Clock drift correction coefficient lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass a f1 NMESsage PAGE lt us gt
260. e data on page 253 Options R amp S SMBV K65 K67 K95 Manual operation See Generate Almanac File on page 134 subsystem ADGeneration UTC CREate Filename Stores the current assistance data settings into the selected UTC file The directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory are read Only the file name has to be entered Assis tance data settings are stored as UTC file with the specific file extensions rs utc Parameters Filename string Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Generate UTC File on page 137 subsystem ADGeneration NAVigation CREate Filename Stores the current assistance data settings into the selected navigation file The direc tory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory are read Only the file name has to be entered Assistance data settings are stored as navigation file with the specific file extensions rs nav or into RINEX files with extension 10n Parameters Filename string Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Generate Navigation File on page 136 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 266 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a eS 4 18 S P O
261. e gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS MPATh STATe lt State gt Enables disables the generation of multipath signals for the satellite with the specified SV ID belonging to the specified GNSS standard Settings made with the subsequent lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh commands are considered only if the multipath configuration is enabled Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See example Configuring the multipath settings for SV ID 20 on page 206 Options R amp S SMBV K92 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands M M Static Multipath Configuration subsystem SVID ch GNSS MPATh TAP COUNt subsystem SVID ch BEIlDou MPATh TAP COUNt lt Taps gt subsystem SVID ch GALileo MPATh TAP COUNt lt Taps gt subsystem SVID ch GLONass MPATh TAP COUNt lt Taps gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS MPATh TAP COUNt lt Taps gt Sets the paths number The value determines the number of rows available for config uration For details see Number of Taps on page 129 Parameters lt Taps gt float Range 1 to 10 Increment 1 RST 1 Example See example Configuring the multipath settings for SV ID 20 on page 206 Options R amp S SMBV K92 subsystem SVID ch GNSS MPATh TAP us CPHase subsystem SVID ch BEIDou MPATh TAP us CPHase Phase subsystem SVID ch GALileo MPATh
262. e name without the path and the file exten sion Parameters lt DSelect gt string Example SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation DATA DLIS SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation DATA DLISt var user temp GNSS listi selects file GNSS_1list1 as the data source This file must be in the directory var user temp and have the file extension dm iqd Manual operation See Data Source on page 65 lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA PATTern lt Pattern gt Determines the bit pattern for lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA PATTern Parameters lt Pattern gt 64 bit pattern Example SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation DATA PATTern SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation DATA PATTern H3F 8 Manual operation See Data Source on page 65 lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation TBASis lt SystemTime gt Determines the time basis used to enter the simulation start time Parameters lt SystemTime gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC Example See example Selecting Real Navigation Data on page 175 Manual operation See System Time on page 67 lt subsystem gt NAVigation SiMulation DATE Year Month Day Defines the date for the simulation in DD MM YYYY format of the Gregorian calendar This setting is only available for lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA set to RNData and lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation TBASis set to UTC Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 176 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands
263. e time basis used to enter the time of assistance data parameters Remote command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis on page 262 Date dd mm yyyy enabled for Time Basis set to UTC or GLONASS Enters the date for the assistance data in DD MM YYYY format of the Gregorian calen dar Remote command subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData DATE on page 263 Time hh mm ss enabled for Time Basis set to UTC or GLONASS OO ra Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 133 Satellite Navigation User Interface unQus PA Assistance Data Generation Enters the exact start time for the assistance data in UTC time format Remote command subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME on page 263 Week Number enabled for Time Basis set to GPS GALILEO or BDT Enters week number WN the assistance data is generated for Remote command subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData WNUMber on page 265 Time of Week enabled for Time Basis set to GPS GALILEO or BDT Determines the Time of Week TOW the assistance data is generated for Remote command subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData TOWeek on page 264 Duration Sets the duration in ms of the assistance data Remote command subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData DURation on page 264 Resolution Sets the resolution in ms of the assistance data Remote command subsyste
264. eal Time S P O T gt Map View displays the trajectory the receiver should have 2 10 4 Generating GNSS Signal with Manual Exchange of the Satellites User Localization Mode 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 according to General Workflow 2 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt User Localization 3 Perform steps 6 to 18 from General Workflow Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 36 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow a To reproduce the exact satellite navigation message it is recommended to select a RINEX file if one exists For more information see chapter 2 10 11 Configuring the Navigation Param eters on page 41 b If required select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Atmospheric Configuration and adjust the settings c If required select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Time Conver sion Configuration and adjust the settings d Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Power Mode gt Auto to enable the dynamic automatic calculation of the power level and adjust the required power settings For more information see chapter 2 10 12 Adjusting the Power Settings on page 42 4 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt On The instrument generates the GNSS signal for the selected satellites constellation The satellite parameters can be additionally reconfigured to simulate multipath effects for instance see als
265. ed satellite The used Ranging Code is set in the Sat ellite Configuration menu e Reserved Reserved for future use e P Code ON Carrier L2 f_L2 1 2276 GHz is modu lated by P code BPSK e C A Code ON Carrier L2 f_L2 1 2276 GHz is modu lated by C A code BPSK lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CLTMode on page 233 L2 P Data Flag Use of carrier L2 P data flag This value does not have an impact on whether really data is transmitted on the sat ellite s carrier L2 or not lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris LTPData on page 238 Fit Interval Flag Indicates the curve fit interval used by the CS Control Segment in determining the ephemeris parameters lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris FIFLag on page 235 SF1 Reserved 1 2 3 4 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SFlIReserved lt gr gt on page 239 AODO Age of Data Offset lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris AODO on page 233 SV Configura tions lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SVConfig on page 240 As this parameter affects the satellite s orbit the value selected here also has an impact on the satellite s parameters Time Shift Doppler Shift and Durat
266. ek Number The Time of Week TOW is expressed in number of seconds and covers an entire week The value is reset to zero at the end of each week Remote command lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation TOWeek on page 178 3 1 4 Advanced Configuration Satellite Configurations Access the dialog for configuring the satellite data see chapter 3 6 Satellite Configu ration on page 91 Real Time S P O T enabled for Localization mode Access the dialog for real time display of the current PDOP and HDOP values display of the satellites states and position display of the receiver position and display of the received satellite power see chapter 3 13 Real Time S P O T on page 139 Assistance Data Generation enabled for User Localization mode and requires the basic BeiDou option R amp S SMBV K107 or installed assisted option e g Assisted GPS R amp S SMBV K65 Access the dialog Assistance Data Generation for generation of assistance data corre sponding to the selected Assistance Mode 3 2 Localization Data R amp S SMBV only To access this settings 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS 2 Select Simulation Mode gt Auto Localization User Localization 3 Select User Environment gt Localization Data In the Localization Data dialog you can configure the satellites signal correspond ing to a real static or moving geographic location Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 68
267. elect GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt ON The instrument generates an A GNSS signal according to the selected test sce nario Refer to the corresponding specification and customize the test scenario signal for the predefined specific test case i e perform the necessary changes on the satel lite constellation receiver location simulation time and power settings 2 10 8 Generating GNSS Assistance Data This step by step description explains the configuration in principle In hybrid A GNSS scenario generate the assistance data of the GNSS standards sep arately in different files 1 Select GNSS Main Dialog Simulation Mode User Localization and perform the required settings see e g chapter 2 10 5 Generating A GPS Custom Build Scenarios User Localization Mode on page 37 2 Execute GNSS Main Dialog Assistance Data and select the Assistance Mode gt A GPS A Galileo A GLONASS 3 Select Synchronize All to align the assistance data settings with the settings that have been already made for the satellites of the selected standard 4 lf required reselect the space vehicles for which assistance data is to be gener ated 5 Reconfigure the reference location i e enter the coordinates of the BS location instead of receiver location 6 Adjust the Duration and the Resolution of assistance data 7 Select the Assistance Data generation Acquisition Data Format Operating Manual 1173 1427 12
268. ellites The defined user environment model is applied on the current satellite s constellation For the current receiver s location some satellites are not simulated others are simula ted but are obscured or not have echos or with attenuated power due to antenna pat tern response To visualize the satellite s constellation state currently used by the receiver use the Sky View in the Real Time S P O T display Common Settings This section describes the parameters that are common for all near environmental models Type Selects a predefined obscuration amp auto multipath model or enables the configuration of the near environment and physical model e Customizable Type Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 73 Satellite Navigation User Interface u Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings User Defined the parameters Near Environment and Physical Model are configurable e Predefined Types City Block The model assumes average building height 20m Urban Canyon Correspond to an urban canyonas in commercial city places The model assumes street width 30m average building height 30m gap between the buildings along a street 10m street length 1200m Suburban Area The model assumes relatively high distance between the GNSS receiver and the main reflecting obstacles Cutting The model assumes
269. ellites To observe the movement trajectory use the Display Type Map View 11 Select GPS Main Dialog gt Obscuration amp Auto Multipath gt Type gt City Block and enable Physical Model Obscuration Only The instrument applies automatically the predefined Obstacles File City Block to simulate a real word environment conditions amp amp GPS Obscuration and Auto Multipath Type UserDefned ss Near Environment Vertical Obstacles zl Physical Model Obscuration only zl Start Rec X Offset 490 n z Start Rec Y Offset soom X d Start Rec Height Offs 30m zx Map Orientation oos d CE Top View 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Show Editor gt gt gt 12 In the GPS Main Dialog gt Real Time S P O T gt Display Type gt Sky View com pare the displayed satellite constellation Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 46 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow L i GPS Real Time S P 0 T Display Type Sky View M Sky View Real Time Information ime UTC 07 11 2010 17 03 58 200 Rec Loc 48 14550 N 11 57751 E 500 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 1 35 1 69 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 04 15 Legend Los OG OS P loss LOS Echoes LOS Echoes AP loss Echoes OG Obscured G GPS 210 E GALILEO ES Inactive R GLONASS Grey color invisible satellites i e satellites
270. els are calculated depending on the Simulation Mode the Power Mode and whether a signal component undergoes static multipath or not Table 3 7 Calculating the power levels of the satellite as a function of the Power Mode and the Simulation Mode Power Mode Auto User Simulation Mode Static Absolute Powersatt signal Ref Power Relative Power Signal u iza u W ional Pow u W i Pow Auto Localiza Absolute Powergaty signal Ref Power Absolute Powergaty signa raps Ref Power tion Power satt signal Powersatt signal Additional Powertapz User Localiza Absolute Power i Ref Power Sat _Signal Tap tion Power sau signa Additional Poweriapg 1 For a satellite in the satellite list with pseudorange at time t Pseudorange and Ref Standard Std Power sat Signat 20logio Ref Orbital Dist NDrer sta 20109 1o ND g 4 Pseudorange Inter Standard Powersatt Ret signal Where ND is the nominal orbital distance see Ref erence Signal Reference Orbital Distance Example Calculation of the Power if Ref Sattellite is different than N A Powe sat signal 2010910 Pseudorangerer sat Pseudorangesagsigna t Inter Stand ard Powersatt Ref sat Where t 0 represents the start moment of the simulation If Ref Satellite different than N A the power level displayed in the user inerface Power represents the power level at the start moment of the
271. emeris SEType 247 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TALignment 247 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TINDex 248 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TINTerval 248 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands O M J J Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE 248 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris URA 249 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris XN 249 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris YN 249 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ZN 249 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris XDDN 249 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris YDDN 249 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ZDDN 249 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris XDN 250 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris Y DN 250 subsy
272. ence transmit different atmospheric navigation parameters the one for GLONASS is not yet specified by the time this firmware had been developed and hence Glonass satellites transmit no data on the atmosphere The ionospheric navigation parameters only define what the satellites are transmitting as ionospheric correction parameters whereas the model configuration describes the actual ionospheric and tropospheric models used in the satellite receiver channel simulation The parameters in this dialog are enabled for configuration only for instruments equipped with the option GNSS Enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 Tropospheric Model Determines whether a STANAG tropospheric model is applied or not Remote command lt subsystem gt ATMospheric TROPospheric MODel on page 250 lonospheric Model Determines whether a Klobuchar ionospheric model is applied or the ionospheric effects are not simulated Remote command subsystem ATMospheric IONospheric MODel on page 251 Klobuchar Parameters Defines the ionospheric model used by the channel simulation The ionospheric model applies for all satellites irrespectively to the navigation standards they belong to Parameter Description SCPI Command alpha O Sets the parameter alpha 0 alpha 3 of lt subsystem gt ATMospheric alpha 3 the satellite s navigation message IONospheric KLOBuchar ALPHa lt chO0 gt on page 251 beta O beta 3 Sets the parameter beta 0 beta 3 of
273. enna The instrument retrieves the phase response matrix from the phase file If the required phase file does not exist the instrument sets the carrier phase matrix to zero Outdoor scenarios If the instrument is equipped with both options R amp S SMBV K101 K102 the antenna pattern is applied on reflections from the defined user environment e g roadside plane Indoor absorption scenarios The provided antenna pattern can be used to simulate the signal absorption as well as the carrier phase bias from every angle around a GNSS receiver The provided ant pat file format enables you to define up to four antennas per vehicle and to perform antenna switching trough real time scheduling see lt subsystem gt APATtern ANTenna ID The resolution of the antenna pattern power response and carrier phase offsets can go to 1 for both the elevation and azi muth Table 2 9 Example Power response matrix due to a car s body mask Power and phase profile of an antenna Car body mask Power response matrix of the antenna ant pat file 0 Elevation You can also load antenna patterns measured by some over the air OTA measure ments e g the R amp S DST200 RF Diagnostic Chamber Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 32 Satellite Navigation General Description Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Spinning and Attitude Simulation R amp S SMBV K103 2 8 Realtime Option GNSS Extensi
274. ephemeris are extracted from the almanac and displayed in the Navigation Message Configuration dialog The ephemeris data of all satellites are updated automatically and projected automatically to ensure that the age of the ephemeris is within the allowed time span Whenever a new almanac is selected the start time of the simulation will be set to the almanac s TOA Time of Application See also chapter 2 10 3 Generating GNSS Signal with Automatic Dynamic Exchange of the Satellites Auto Localization Mode on page 36 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 60 Satellite Navigation User Interface a J n GNSS Main Dialog User Localization R amp S SMBV only User localization mode enables the configuration of the satellites con stellation at the beginning of the simulation and editing it in real time i e satellites can be enabled or disabled in real time and without interruption of the signal generation For instruments equipped with assistance option e g R amp S SMBV K65 K95 K67 this mode additionally enables the configuration of all parameter of the Navigation Message the generation of assis tance data and the loading of RINEX files This mode is useful for the generation of A GNSS test signals differ ent than the standardized ones see chapter 2 10 5 Generating A GPS Custom Build Scenarios User Localization Mode on page 37 Remote command subsystem SMODe on page 160 Oversampling R amp S W
275. equired to perform signal generation with the satellite navigation options in a remote environment We assume that the R amp S SMBV has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S SMBV documentation A knowlage about the remote control operation and the SCPI com mand syntax are assumed ED Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions For a description of the conventions used in the remote command descriptions see section Remote Control Commands in the R amp S SMBV operating manual The SOURce BB GPS GALileo GLONass BEIDou subsystem contains commands for configuring hte GNSS standards Placeholder lt Subsystem gt To simplify the description of the remote control commands the placeholder lt Subsystem gt is introduced Depending on the navigation standard used as an entry standard replace this placeholder lt Subsystem gt with SOURce BB GPS SOURce BB GALileo for Galileo SOURce BB GLONass for GLONASS or SOURce BB BEIDou for BeiDou commands containing this placeholder are not recognized and accepted by the instru ment ED The replacement of the place holder lt Subsystem gt is mandatory i e remote control Example SCPI command subsystem STATe e Entry Standard GPS SOUR BB GPS STAT gt e Entry Standard Galileo SOUR BB GAL STAT e Entry Standard GLONASS SOUR BB GLON STAT e Entry Standard BeiDou SOUR BB BEID STAT
276. equires only the date and sign of the next leap second further calculations are performed automatically 2 5 6 Internal Waypoint Resampling For the simulation of motion and body rotation the R amp S SMBV uses a 100 Hz internal resolution The motion files you load into the instrument may contain waypoint and or attitude coordinates with a resolution that is either not constant or different than the internally used one The R amp S SMBV interpolates resamples externally supplied files and transform the user defined rates to the internal resolution The internal resampling algorithm is based on the great circle approximation The instrument resamples the vehicle attitude yaw heading pitch elevation roll bank parameters linearly in a common reference basis Depending on the contents of the motion file in particular on the way the velocity is defined the resampling is performed accordingly 2 5 7 Motion Smoothening Using Vehicle Description File The selected motion file e g waypoint file may contain a set of random waypoints without knowledge about the realistic dynamic Smoothening is a function that regener ates the motion file based on the specified maximum dynamics speed acceleration and jerk and sampling rate as they are defined in the vehicle description file xvd This approach ensures smoothening of the abrupt changes in the direction or in the velocity of a moving object Main characteristics of the smoothening algor
277. er mode enables an internal dynamical automatic power control The power is calculated automatically based on the satellite to receiver distance which varies with the time Refer to chapter 3 6 1 Power Configuration on page 92 for examples and informa tion about the power calculation The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 12 Adjusting the Power Settings on page 42 2 1 9 Simulation of uninterrupted location fix The simulation of uninterrupted location fix requires a GNSS signal that fulfills the fol lowing conditions e An optimal satellite s constellation is selected and monitored constantly i e the exchange of the satellites is performed automatically Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 17 Satellite Navigation General Description Ech 2 1 10 2 2 Realtime Option GPS P Code R amp S SMBV K93 e The power of the satellites is monitored and updated constantly depending on the satellite to receiver distance and some channel parameters e g atmospheric effects e The age of the ephemeris t toe is respected for example the simulation time is always within the allowed time span of 2h around the GPS reference time of the current ephemeris page For GLONASS this time is usually 30 minutes The table 2 2 gives an overview how these criteria are fulfilled by the provided localiza tion modes Table 2 2 Criteria for the generation of GNSS signal for simulation of uninterrupted location fix Criter
278. eral Description Typical Realtime Workflow Scenario Vehicle Predefined Vehicle Waypoint File Obscura Antenna Pattern Body Type Description File tion amp Auto Multi Mask File path gt Type Parking Land Vehicle Land Vehicle1 xvd Scen Park Parking 1min Car Medium ing mine Parking 10 min Car Medium OpenRoof SOS Fa Parking 1 h SUV ing 10min txt VAN Scen Parking 1h txt Bridge Tunnels Land Vehicle Land Vehicle1 xvd Scen Circle 5km txt Bridge 1 Car Medium Bridge 2 Car Medium OpenRoof Long Tunnel SUV Multiple Tunnels VAN To configure a city block scenario This step by step description is based on the scenario City Block see table 2 10 and explains the configuration steps in principle The main goal is to demonstrate the impact of enabled obstacles and multipath effects on the simulated signal 1 10 Execute GNSS Main Dialog Set To Default to adjust the instruments settings to a standard set of operating conditions Select GNSS Main Dialog gt GNSS System Configuration and enable the required navigation systems e g a hybrid GPS Galileo and GLONASS configuration Enable GNSS Main Dialog Simulation Mode Auto Localization Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Maximum Number of Satel lites gt 24 Select GNSS Main Dialog User Environment Vehicle Type Land Vehicle Select GNSS Main Dialog User Environment Vehicle Descriptio
279. eral Instruments Fig 2 8 Example Connecting two R amp S SMBV to generate GNSS signal using common RF frequency The following lists only the required task related settings We assume that the instruments are configured to ensure a carrier phase coherence In the Instrument perform the required steps according to General Workflow and configure the instrument to generate GPS signal with 12 or more satellites and RF Band gt L1 E1 see also figure 2 1 a Select GPS gt GNSS System Configuration gt Use Common RF Frequency gt ON b Execute GPS gt Update RF Frequency The value in the Frequency display in the header of the instrument is set to 1 58565 GHz The GPS signal is however modulated on the GPS frequency L1 1 57542 GHz In the Instrument 2 perform the required steps according to General Workflow and configure the instrument to generate GLONASS signal with 12 more satellites and RF Band gt L1 E1 a Select GLONASS gt GNSS System Configuration gt Use Common RF Fre quency gt ON b Execute GLONASS gt Update RF Frequency Satellite Navigation General Description M EEEREUUO U aS Functional Overview of the Basic Offline GNSS The value in the Frequency display in the header of the instrument is set to 1 58565 GHz The GLONASS signal is
280. es of the predefined vehicle description files in the system directory Only files with the file extension xvd are listed Example see example Defining the vehicle type and selectg a xvd file on page 165 Usage Query only Manual operation See Vehicle Description File on page 63 lt subsystem gt VEHicle CATalog USER Queries the names of the user defined vehicle description files in the default directory The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory Only files with the file extension xvd are listed Example see example Defining the vehicle type and selectg a xvd file on page 165 Usage Query only Manual operation See Vehicle Description File on page 63 subsystem VEHicle FILE Filename Loads the selected vehicle description file Use the command MMEM CDIRectory to define the directory Only files with the file extension xva are loaded Parameters Filename string Example see example Defining the vehicle type and selectg a xvd file on page 165 Manual operation See Vehicle Description File on page 63 lt subsystem gt VEHicle TYPE Type Sets the vehicle type Parameters lt Type gt HIL SPACecraft AlRCraft SHIP LVEHicle PEDestrian HIL Spacecraft Aircraft Ship Land Vehicle Pedestrian Example see example Defining the vehicle type and selectg a xvd file on page 165 Manual operation See Vehicle Type on page 63 Operating M
281. es of this particular GNSS system If a GLONASS file is used the frequency number allocations are also extracted The ephemeris and the clock correction parameters and for GLONASS satellites the frequency number allocation of all satellites that are not available in the RINEX files or had not been configured manually are extracted from the selected almanac of the corresponding GNSS system Extracting the ionospheric and time conversion parameters from RINEX file 1 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt User Localization 2 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt RINEX and select RINEX file 3 Perform GNSS System Configuration gt RINEX Configuration gt Import RINEX Files 4 Enable GNSS System Configuration RINEX Configuration Update UTC and Atmospheric Parameters 5 Select GNSS System Configuration RINEX Configuration State On The ionospheric and time conversion parameters are extracted from the header of the selected RINEX file If required adjust the extracted ionospheric and time conversion parameters 2 10 12 Adjusting the Power Settings Refer to chapter 3 6 1 Power Configuration on page 92 for explanation and exam ple on the power level calculation Power settings in Auto power mode We assume that the reference power is specified by a reference satellite 1 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Power Mode gt Auto 2 Set the Satellite Configuration gt Referenc
282. es the surface property permittivity conductivity or power loss for the selected surface type This value is a measure for the reflection caused by the surface Remote command subsystem OBSCuration GSR PERMittivity on page 187 subsystem OBSCuration GSR CONDuctivity on page 188 subsystem OBSCuration GSR PLOSs on page 188 h1 h2 d1 d2 Determines the height of the right left obstacle and the distance between the receiver and the obstacles Remote command subsystem OBSCuration GSR OlDistance on page 188 subsystem OBSCuration GSR O2Distance on page 188 BSCuration GSR OlHeight on page 189 BSCuration GSR O2Height on page 189 0 subsystem 0O l 201 lt subsystem gt Ground Altitude Sets the altitude of the ground level relative to the WGS84 ellipsoid i e the terrain ground level is set relative to WGS84 zero level or sea level Remote command subsystem OBSCuration GSR GALTitude on page 189 Obstacle Orientation For Geographic Location Attitude different than waypoint and Vehicle Type Air craft Ship Spacecraft defines the direction of the obstacles If the vehicle is moving the obstacles are assumed to be parallel to the motion The value zero means that the obstacles are parallel to the east direction Remote command subsystem OBSCuration GSR OORientation on page 189 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 85 Satellite Navigation User Interface GNSS System Alman
283. esentative of realistic test situations The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chapter 4 Remote Control Commands on page 155 3 1 1 General Settings for GNSS Simulation To access this settings gt Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS The provided settings enable you to perform general configurations like to set the default settings or access further dialogs State Enables disables the GNSS signal simulation Enabling this standard disables all the other digital standards and digital modulation modes Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 56 Satellite Navigation User Interface 2 ir im GNSS Main Dialog For R amp S SMBV instruments a continuous GNSS signal is generated for up to 24 satel lites in real time mode The maximum number is determined by the parameter Maxi mum Number of Satellites and the maximum value depends on the installed SW options For R amp S WinlQSIM2 a time limited GNSS signal is generated for one satellite in offline mode The time limited GNSS Signal is continuously played and repeated in the ARB of the vector signal generator In this case the Restart marker may be helpful to trig ger a GNSS receiver module when simulating an offline generated GNSS Signal Note Enabling the standard sets automatically the Frequency and Level displayed in the header of the instrument according to the se
284. et inani cedi zig een ect 151 Master slave mode sss 51 Material Permittivity 4 2 nce Power loss drei EE Maximum Number of Satellites ssussss Mean Anomaly at Reference Time Mean Motion difference From Computed Value Measured external clock ssssssssee Model Environmental cernis ene erento 74 weesde Sege 75 Motion Sim l amp tiOE EE 33 Motion file Selecting 4d n recti tee i eee a 70 Movement Simm latiOH EE 26 Moving scenario Required for ure cd setate e eee 26 Selecting waypoint file ssssesesssssss 70 Multi satellite GNSS signal esses 13 Multipath signal Cue H 27 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 321 Satellite Navigation Index N Next constellation change ssssssseseeese 143 Next handover time rrrnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnrnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrenernnnen 143 O Obscuration Distance to receiver c cccceeceeeetceeeeeteeeteeaeeeeeeaeeess 85 GIGI eem 85 Obscuration and auto multipath TE le EE 73 Obstacle omega Co OMEGA 0 EEN 119 OMEGA DOT tte er de nde 119 ON OFF Ratio Marker errnrrnnnnnrrnnrnnrrnnrnnrnnrnnnrnnrrnnrenennn 150 One satellite GNSS signal Generating waveform file sesssssssss 53 Processing in an ARB ssssssseee 54 Orbit type BeiDou satellite A 106 Orientation Map iiir e resi di rt
285. ets the format in which the Latitude and Longitude are displayed e DEG MIN SEC The display format is Degree Minute Second and Direction i e XX XX XX XX Direction where direction can be North South and East West e Decimal Degree The display format is decimal degree i e XX XXXXX where indicates North and East and indicates South and West Altitude Sets the geographic altitude of the reference location in meters above sea level Latitude Sets the latitude of the reference location Longitude Sets the longitude of the reference location Uncertainty Radius Sets the maximum radius of the area within which the two dimensional loca tion of the UE is bounded The uncertainty radius determines the required sensitivity of the DUT Remote command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation URADius on page 262 to enter the coordinates in Degree Minute Second format lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DMS on page 261 to enter the coordinates in decimal degree format subsystem ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DECimal on page 260 Uncertainty Radius Sets the Uncertainty Radius i e sets the maximum radius of the area within which the two dimensional location of the UE is bounded The uncertainty radius determines the required sensitivity of the DUT Remote command subsystem ADGeneration GPS LOCation URADius on page 262 Time Basis Determines th
286. example of the file format vehicle info name Car limits property property property property property property property property property property property property property property property property property limits vehicle The table 1 3 describes the used tags and parameters Table 1 3 Format of xvd file maxspeed 100 0 maxg 0 6 maxg lateral 0 6 gt maxjerk 15 maxjerk lateral 15 maxyawrate 0 gt maxyawacceleration 0 gt maxyawjerk 0 maxpitchangle 0 maxpitchrate 0 maxpitchacceleration 0 maxpitchjerk 0 maxrollangle 0 gt maxrollrate 0 gt maxrollacceleration 0 gt maxrolljerk 0 gt proximity 0 gt Container Tag name Parameter Description lt info gt lt name gt Vehicle name lt limits gt lt property gt lt maxspeed gt Maximal Speed m s lt maxg gt Maximum tangential acceleration in g unit lt maxg_lateral gt Maximum radial acceleration due to centrifugal force in g unit lt maxjerk gt Maximum tangential Jerk in m s2 Maximum radial Jerk in m s2 lt maxjerk lateral gt OO ee Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 300 Satellite Navigation Annex User Environment Files Container Tag name Parameter lt maxyawrate gt Description Maximum rate of change of the yaw headin
287. fferent than Isotropic Note Not enough hardware resources This error message appears and the satellite is disabled if the available hardware resources are not enough to generate the desired signal Hybrid GNSS configurations multipath configurations signals modulated by P code and activated satellites consume hardware resources Refer to chapter 2 4 1 Channel Budget on page 23 for description on how the available hardware resources are dis tributed Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt STATe on page 219 Standard Constellation Table Selects the navigation standard the corresponding satellite belongs to The available GNSS standards depend on the entry standard the selected GNSS System Almanac Configuration Settings and the installed options Remote command lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt STANdard on page 218 Signal s Constellation Table Selects the type of signal the corresponding satellite is using Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 103 Satellite Navigation User Interface Satellite Configuration According to the GPS specifications the C A code f ca 1 023 MHz is provided for civilian purposes They are used as spreading codes for the navigation data which is transmitted at a rate of 50 baud The carrier L1 or L2 signal can be modulated by C A code only P code only or by both C A P The modulation used is displayed with the parameter Modulation Note The generation of GPS s
288. figuration Table on page 83 lt subsystem gt O0BSCuration FULL AREA lt ch gt LENGth Length Length of the obscuring zone defined in km or sec Parameters Length float Range 1E 3 to 50 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 1 Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Full Obscuration Configuration Table on page 83 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR MPRoperty lt MaterialPropert gt Define whether the material is defined by its permittivity or power loss characteristic Parameters lt MaterialPropert gt PLOSS PERM RST PERM Example see example Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Material Property on page 84 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR STYPe lt SurfaceType gt Describes the surface Parameters lt SurfaceType gt SEA WATER WET MDRY DRY USER RST USER Example see example Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Surface Type on page 85 subsystem OBSCuration GSR PERMIittivity lt Permittyvity gt Sets the surface permittivity Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 187 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a Obscuration and Auto Multipath Parameters lt Permittyvity gt floa
289. for a first fix and up to 12 5 minutes to get all information almanac In A GNSS UE based mode the base station assists the UE by providing the complete navigation message along with a list of visible satellites and ephemeris data In addition to this information the UE gets the location and the current time at Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 12 Satellite Navigation General Description mzc gnws a uH H HN NENNEN Functional Overview of the Basic Realtime GNSS Options GPS Galileo GLONASS and BeiDou the Base Station and that speeds up both acquisition and navigation processes of the GPS receiver and hence reduces TTFF to a few seconds In A GNSS UE assisted mode the base station is even responsible for the calcu lation of the UE s exact location i e the base station performs the navigation based on the raw measurements provided by the UE Since the Acquisition Assis tance Data provided by the Base Station already serves speeding up the acquisi tion process the UE only has to track the code and carrier phase 2 1 Functional Overview of the Basic Realtime GNSS Options GPS Galileo GLONASS and BeiDou This section gives an overview of the options GPS R amp S SMBV K44 Galileo R amp S SMBV K66 GLONASS R amp S SMBV K94 and BeiDou R amp S SMBV K107 o Throughout this description these options are denoted as ba
290. ft1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 48 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow 7 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Localization Data and select Geographic Location Attitude gt Waypoints to enable a moving receiver 8 In the Localization Data dialog a select Waypoints File gt Select Predefined Waypoints navigate to a prede fined moving scenario and execute Select b select Read Out Mode Round Trip C set Yaw Pitch From Motion On d set Roll gt From Spinning gt On e set Spinning Rate 0 25 Hz 9 Select GNSS Main Dialog User Environment Obscuration amp Auto Multipath and configure the settings as displayed on die figure E amp GPS Obscuration and Auto Multipath Type User Defined zl Physical Model Obscuration amp Multipath gt Material Property Permittivity zl Surface Type Sea Water 3 Ground Permittivity 209 Ground Conductivity 4000000 1 500 0 m z al 1 000 0 km zl h1 500 0 m DI h2 1 000 0 fam D Ground Level Ground Altitude 0 0 m m 10 Select GNSS Main Dialog User Environment Antenna Pattern Body Mask File gt Predefined User Defined Files and navigate to the ant pat file In this example we use an user defined antenna pattern file that describes an antenna with four sectors see example Antenna with four sectors on page 302 11 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt On to enable signal gener
291. g 2 5 Example of A GPS Test Setup 2 10 Typical Realtime Workflow The workflow examples provided in this section assume an instrument fully equipped with all available GNSS options 2 10 4 General Workflow This section introduces the general workflow for configuring the primary settings that are common for almost all further configurations workflow The block diagram on the figure 2 6 shows an overview of the common configuration steps Typical Realtime Workflow o 9 H Enable hybrid GNSS System Configuration opt General Settings Auto amp User Localization i Static amp Auto Localization User Localization User Environment Navigation Data User Localization Static amp Auto Localization E Static amp User Localization Auto Localization Configure Nav Message opt Satellite Configurations Adjust Atmospheric Configiguration opt User Localization Static amp Auto Localization Enable static Multipath opt Oe ee O 6666066006000 000006 Open the Real Time S P O T display and compare the settings Fig 2 6 General workflow Satellite Navigation General Description pem M M M mPBEEDEEUEEEUUR gt Umm Typical Realtime Workflow 2 10 2 Generating GNSS Signal for Simple Receiver Tests Static Mode 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 according t
292. g rad s lt maxyawaccelera tion gt Maximum second rate of change acceleration of the yaw head ing rad s2 maxyawjerk Maximum third rate of change jerk of the yaw heading rad s3 lt maxpitchangle gt lt maxpitchrate gt Maximum pitch elevation angle rad Maximum rate of change of the pitch elevation rad s lt maxpitchaccelera tion gt Maximum second rate of change acceleration of the pitch elevation rad s2 lt maxpitchjerk gt Maximum third rate of change jerk of the pitch elevation rad s3 lt maxrollangle gt Maximum roll bank angle rad lt maxrollrate gt Maximum rate of change of the roll bank rad s lt maxrollaccelera tion gt Maximum second rate of change acceleration of the roll bank rad s2 lt maxrolljerk gt Maximum third rate of change jerk of the roll bank rad s3 lt proximity gt Specifies the maximum allowed deviation from the waypoints specified by the user m A 1 3 Antenna Pattern Body Mask Files The antenna patterns files are supported by instruments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K102 103 Some parameters additionally require option R amp S SMBV K92 Two files describe an antenna the antenna pattern ant pat file and the phase response phase file Both files must have the same file name and must be stored in the same directory The ant pat file des
293. g Manual 1173 1427 12 08 178 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands p E H Obscuration and Auto Multipath SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA APPend SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA COUNt Response 3 SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA3 DELete SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA COUNt Response 2 SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREAl INSert SOURCe1 BB GPS O0BSCuration FULL AREA2 REFerence 1 5 SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA2 LENGth 0 5 SOURce1 BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL AREA COUNt Response 3 Defining a full obscuration area as a zone pattern SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration FULL SCALe TIME SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration FULL RWINdow 1000 SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration FULL RWINdow STATe ON the defined objects are repeated eacht 1000 s Example Selectng a vertical obscuration environment The following example uses GPS entry standard SOURcel BB GPS SMODe AUTO Selecting and enabling a vertical obscuration environment SOURCe1 BB GPS OBSCuration ENVironment VOBS SOURcel1 BB GPS 0BSCuration TYPE URB1 SOURcel BB GPS 0BSCuration OMPath Query the available obstacles files and loads one of them SOURcel1 BB GPS 0BSCuration VOBS CATalog PREDefined Response Urban Canyon 1 MMEM CDIR var user my vobs SOURcel1 BB GPS 0BSCuration VOBS CATalog USER Response canyon 2 SOURcel BB G
294. gation TCOhversion GLOhNass AZERo rennen nennen tnnt eren nenne 202 subsystem NAVigation T CONversion GLONass TOT sssssssseseeeneenneeneee nennen nennen 203 subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion GL OhNassWNOT nennen enne nnne 203 subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion GPS AONE ener enne nnt tenerse nnne nnn 202 subsystem NAVigation T CONversion GPS AZERO E subsystem NAVigation T CONversion GPS TOT sssssssssssssseseeee ener nnne ener nennen nena 203 subsystem NAVigation TCOhNversion GPS WNOT eene nente rnnt nrnen rennen 203 subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion EAR DATE 205 subsystem NAVigation T CONversion LEAP SEConds sse eene nennen nnne 205 _ M M e M M M S M Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 312 Satellite Navigation List of Commands p p lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SIGN SubevstemzNAVioation TCOhversion LEAb GL Giransmtont GTATel eeaeee ereere 205 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SYNC nennen nennen nnns ennt 206 subsystem NAVigation TCOhNversion UTCSuAONE neret rennen nnns 204 subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion UTCZSuAZERo eene enne n nennt nennen 204 subsystem NAVigation TCOhversion UTCSu DATEN
295. gation Message Configuration eese nennen nennen 116 Static Multipath Configuration r xssvernnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnne 128 Assistance Data Generation eese enne nnne nnne 130 UE NC o A oes 139 Display AR E 142 Real Time Information 142 Reference Locatton eene menn enne nre nnns 143 Trajectory View Geitnges eene eee 144 Trigger Marker Clock SettingsS rrnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 145 ID O m 146 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 5 Satellite Navigation Contents Os n i 3 14 2 3 14 3 3 14 4 3 14 5 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 A 1 A 1 1 A 1 1 1 A 1 1 2 A 1 1 3 A 1 1 4 Marker ior m 150 MEngBr i 151 Clock dl e C E 152 Ee ESI m 153 Remote Control CommandsS rnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 155 Programming Exampl s iet terere eene eene EENS 157 Primary Settings E 157 User Environment Antenna Pattern and Body Mask eee 165 Localization BEIM 169 Navigation Data UE 175 Obscuration and Auto Multipath aeeorennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 178 Hardware in the Loop HI
296. gation Remote Control Commands n Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings Parameters lt TimeShift gt float Range 0 to 9 99999 Increment 0 00001 RST 0 Default unit Chips Example See example Configuring the multipath settings for SV ID 20 on page 206 Options R amp S SMBV K92 4 12 Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings Configurations with more than 6 satellites require option R amp S SMBV K91 more than 12 satelites require option R amp S SMBV K96 Example Configuring the satellite s constellation The following example uses GPS entry standard SOURcel BB GPS PRESet SOURcel BB GPS SMODe USER enable hybrid GNSS configuration SOURCe1 BB GPS HYBRid GPS STATe ON SOURCe1 BB GPS HYBRid GALileo STATe ON SOURce1 BB GPS HYBRid GLONass STATe ON SOURCe1 BB GPS HYBRid BEIDou STATe ON SOURCe1 BB GPS PRFL SOURCe1 BB GPS SEMask 7 5 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellite COUNt 8 SOURCe1 BB GPS SATellite GRTP ON SOURCe1 BB GPS SATellitel STANdard Response GPS SOURCe1 BB GPS SATellitel SIGNal Response CAC SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel SVID Response 30 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel SCRate Response 1023000 SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel MODulation Response BPSK SOURce1 BB GPS SATellitel DURation Response 13329 SOURCe1 BB GPS SATellitel PRANge
297. ge of satel lites can be performed by means of deactivation and activation of the individual satellites The power settings are enabled for configuration but the automatic dynamic calculation function of the instrument may also be utilized This mode is required for the generation of user defined assisted GPS test scenar ios The table 2 1 gives an overview of the supported functionality per simulation mode Some functionality require additional options Table 2 1 Cross reference between the simulation mode supported functionality and the required options Simulation Mode Static Auto Localization User Localization Required Options Function Configuration of static receiver location no R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 GNSS System Configuration yes R amp S SMBV K44 and R amp S SMBV K66 and R amp S SMBV K94 and R amp S SMBV K107 Almanac RINEX almanac almanac Almanac and R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 RINEX file suppor K107 ted R amp S SMBV K65 K67 K95 K107 for RINEX files Projection of Navigation Message no yes yes R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 S P O T Display no yes yes R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 Assistance GNSS Data Generation no no yes R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 and R amp S SMBV K65 K67 K95 Configuration of Satellite Constellation yes no yes R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 14 Satellite Navigation General Description n
298. gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 Remote Control Commands S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands 1 10 Determines the tap number The number of taps is set with the command subsystem SVID ch GALileo MPATh TAP COUNT UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC integer required for UTC time basis only Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 float required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 integer required for TimeBasis Range 0 to 529947 Increment 1 GPS GST BDT float required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT 0 to 604799 999 0 001 Range Increment 273 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands nA Yr eJ a H e S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands Return values Power float Example See example Retrieving real time settings on page 267 Usage Query only lt subsystem gt RT RLOCation COORdinates DECimal lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt
299. gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE COUNTL enne eubevstemz GVlD chz GA ieohHMt Geagoe PE Get subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PROJect sse nennen subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage RTPRojection sss subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIC sess subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CIS sesssssss subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRC ssssssss lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRS m subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUC sessssss subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUS suse subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ECCentricity 235 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOT sesssssss subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODA esses subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODNawv esses subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo sess subsystem GVlD zchz GA leohME Gsaoel PAG us LtEbHemers M ZERo lt subsystem gt SVID l
300. h axis left or right the location is aligned The available values depend on the selected Alignment Filter Reference Receiver Position Obstacles Configuration Table Distance mileage starting from which the corresponding roadside plane is considered for user obscuration and multipath simulation Pe Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 81 Satellite Navigation User Interface E Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings Distance Obstacles Configuration Table Defines the distance of the vertical obstacle to the OX or OY axis The distance is expressed in meters Height Obstacles Configuration Table Defines the obstacles height in meters Material Obstacles Configuration Table Defines the material the obstacle is build from Available are Glass Concrete Wood Gypsum Formica Marble Dry Wall Brick Permittivity Power Loss Obstacles Configuration Table Displays defines the material property permittivity or power loss for the selected mate rial This value is a measure for the reflection caused by the obstacle Material Property Obstacles Configuration Table Define whether the material is defined by its permittivity conductivity or power loss characteristic Alignment Filter Obstacles Configuration Table Filters the display of all obstacles for that the selected criteria is fulfilled Insert Left Right Delete
301. h gt GALileo LIST lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass LIST lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS LIST Queries the list of valid satellites SV IDs of the selected almanac file for the naviga tion standard To select the file use the command subsystem NAVigation ALManac lt GNSS gt FILE Example See example Selecting an Almanac file on page 194 Usage Query only Time Conversion Configuration Example Configuring the time conversion and leap seconds settings The following example uses GPS entry standard SOURcel1 BB GPS PRESet SOURce1 BB GPS SMOD USER SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion GPS AZERo Response 0 SOURcel BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion GPS AONE Response 0 SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion GPS TOT Response 0 SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion GPS WNOT Response 0 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SYNC SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SLSTransition STATe ON SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SEConds Response 15 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion LEAP DATE Response 2010 11 8 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation TCONversion LEAP SIGN Response PLUS subsystem NAVigation TCONversion GNSS AONE sese 202 SubsvstemzNAVigoation TCOhverslon BE IDOuAONE eene 202 SubsvstemzNAVigoation TCOhverslon GA leo AONE enne 202 SubsvstemzNAVigoaton TCOhverslon GL Ohass AONE 202 subsystem NAVigation
302. hNMtE GeagelPDAGE zuszTCCGObRrechton D TAU eeren 245 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection EN sssssss 245 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection GAMN eese 245 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TAUN esses 246 ubevstemz GVlD zchz GL OhasshNMtE Geagel PAG us TEbHemerte AOER 246 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth esssusse 246 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris P sss 247 ubevstemz GVlD zchz GL OhasshNMtE Geagel PAG us JTEbemerte GE Tvpe e lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TALignment amp ubevstemz GVlD zchz GL OhasshNMt Geaoel PAG us LEbHemerte TINDex subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TINTerval 248 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE sess 248 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris URA sssssssss ubevstemz GVlD chz GL OhasshNMt GeaoelbAGE us TEbHemerte SDDN subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris XDN esee subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris XN sss ubevs
303. has to be augmented with the data of all antennas consecutively Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 302 Satellite Navigation Annex RINEX Files Container Tag name Parameter Description antenna Descriptions of the individual antenna id Antenna identification number YawAxis Z off Position shift of the antenna along the X Y Z axis with respect to Setz the center of gravity of the body PitchAxis Y off Value in meters set RollAxis X off Setz Yaw offset Angular shift of the antenna along the X Y Z axis of the to the Pitch offset body Roll offset Value in degrees az res Resolution of the columns in the data section value in degrees integer divider of 360 elev res Resolution of the raws in the data section value in degrees integer divider of 180 data The file has to contain for every pattern e 1 360 lt az res gt columns e 1 180 lt elev res rows Title column and row are disregarded If the lt use same pattern yes only one pattern is suffi cient otherwise the other patterns must be appended after each others inside this section If the data represents the power response of the antenna ant pat file the power loss values are in dB between 0 and 40 If the data represents the phase response of the antenna phase file the phase values are in degrees A 2 RINEX Files The RINEX file format consists of three ASCII file types obse
304. hase 6 24 GALILEO E1 DEF GALILEO E1 DEF Res Start Freq 1 561 099 096 20 GHz GLONASS R C A Res Start Chip Rate 2 046 001 44 MHz 3 6 1 Power Configuration The power settings in the upper part of the dialog are relevant only for R amp S SMBV instruments Section Satellites applies also to WinIWQSIM however only one satel lite can be configured This section comprises the power settings The dynamic power control concept is based on two power modes the Auto and the User mode Use the auto mode if a dynamic automatic power calculation is preferred For flexible real time configuration of the power settings per satellite enable the user mode The table 3 6 gives an overview of the parameters that are considered by the calcula tion of the satellites power levels Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 92 Satellite Navigation User Interface M O N A Satellite Configuration Table 3 6 Overview of the parameters affecting the power level of the GNSS signal Power Mode Reference Reference Pseudorange Inter Stand Additional Relative Displayed Power of Power Satellite ard Tuning Power per the individual satellites sig Tap nal component Auto yes yes yes yes yes displays the power level at the simulation start time User yes yes yes The table 3 7 shows how the power lev
305. he Time Conversion Configuration dialog Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 66 Satellite Navigation User Interface O GNSS Main Dialog System Time Determines the time basis used to enter the simulation start time Per default the time basis of the entry standard is used but the user may choose or switch to a different time basis at any time The time is then automatically recalculated and displayed in the selected time format Note Use the Time Conversion Configuration dialog to configure the parameters nec essary for time conversion between the navigation s standard proprietary time and the UTC Remote command subsystem NAVigation SIMulation TBASis on page 176 Date dd mm yyyy enabled for Data Source Real Navigation Data and System Time UTC GLO Enters the date for the simulation in DD MM YYYY format of the Gregorian calendar The simulation time is not limited to the almanac week In Auto Localization mode the default value of this parameter depend on the selected almanac file The retrieved value is the week day corresponding to the TOA of the entry standard Remote command subsystem NAVigation SIMulation DATE on page 176 Time hh mm ss xxx enabled for Data Source Real Navigation Data and System Time UTC GLO Enters the exact simulation start time in UTC time format In Auto Localiza
306. he instrument expects the vehicle s motion and attitude coordinates in real time from for example an external application software see figure 2 2 Smoothening is not possible Remote command subsystem VEHicle TYPE on page 166 Vehicle Description File Provides an access to the standard File Select dialog to select a user defined vehicle description file The vehicle description files are files with extension xvd and prede fined file format see chapter A 1 2 Vehicle Description Files Used for Smoothen ing on page 300 The xv files include the limits on the vehicle s dynamics The firmware provides some predefined vehicle description files These files are stored at a predefined system directory If a file is selected the name of the selected file is displayed Remote command subsystem VEHicle CATalog USER on page 166 subsystem VEHicle CATalog PREDefined on page 166 subsystem VEHicle FILE on page 166 Localization Data Access to the dialog with setting to configure a real static or moving geographic loca tion see chapter 3 2 Localization Data on page 68 A summary information on the selected location is displayed Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 63 Satellite Navigation User Interface GNSS Main Dialog Start Geographic Location Displays the coordinates of the static geographic location or the coordinates of the start geographic location as defined in the
307. hile using the Auto Localization mode used to filter all low elevation satellites which are closer to the horizon and may witness in reality more unwanted multipath effects When the elevation decreases below the selected elevation mask the GPS satellite is considered as invisible by the receiver and hence the GPS receiver can not use this satellite for determining its position The GPS receiver has to search for another satel lite with better visibility Automatic dynamic exchange of the satellites is performed in Auto Localization only The expected time of the next upcoming satellites handover is displayed in the Real Time S P O T view with the parameter Next Constellation Change While analyzing the generated signal make sure that the Satellite Elevation Mask used by the signal generation is set to the elevation mask of the GNSS receiver Remote command subsystem SEMask on page 212 Initial HDOP PDOP R amp S SMBV only Displays the HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision PDOP Position Dilution of Pre cision of the selected satellite constellation at the beginning of the simulation The displayed HDOP PDOP value is not updated The dynamic HDOP and PDOP calculated on the current satellite constellation is displayed in the Real Time S P O T dialog The HDOP can be used as an indication of 2D positioning quality the PDOP is an indi cation of 3D positioning quality The general rule here is that the smaller
308. i red cedere ERR 83 Remote control programming examples ssssseee 157 Repetition KETTER Resulting Frequency rnnronnrvnnonnronnrnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnrennnnnrnnnnnn Resulting P Chip Rate mmrnnrnnnrnnrrnnrnnrrnnrrnrrnrnnrnnnnennnnnnn Resulting Start Chip Rate zx RE Dan EC EE Mille TEE Roadsides planes Alignment ineo conde ene eie tiec MH Eden 81 REI 82 Roll RUNDING ERREUR TEE 147 S Satellite Elevation Mask seeeeeeeee 101 Satellite Ephemeris Type M 123 247 Satellite signal Satellite Standard sess 103 144 Satellite State Satellite SV ID Satellites Constellation esee 103 Satellites exchange enne Save GPS settings Ete Scale BItsecE 83 Select Waypoint Te 1 corre rere ene entren pen Set Synchronization Settings e Set to Almanac EC Set 10 default Lunar SF1 Reserved 1 4 RP Signal Duratiori eon ree n nem Simulation Mode cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeaee Simulation of iyi 33 MOVING TeCelV6r 1 emt rete vean rts 26 SISA Se ENAU P copies 139 Smoothening Algorithm description esses 307 LSPB algotitliln eco rrr eren 28 Used algoritli i e rone etr eren ceres 28 Spinning lo
309. ia Optimal Satellite s Constella Power Monitoring and Age of Ephemeris Simulation tion Update Mode Auto Localiza selected and updated automati performed automatically projection of the ephem tion cally eris from the almanac automatic dynamic exchange of the satellites User Localiza initial optimal satellite s constel performed automatically projection of the ephem tion lation eris or many ephemeris manual user defined exchange pages are made available of the satellites Hence both localization modes provide a realistic signal the decision which localiza tion mode will be used is a trade off between the much better accuracy of the ephem eris retrieved from a RINEX file or a manual ephemeris configuration and the automatic selection of the optimal satellite s constellation with automatic exchange of the satel lites The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 3 Generating GNSS Signal with Automatic Dynamic Exchange of the Satellites Auto Localization Mode on page 36 and chapter 2 10 4 Generating GNSS Signal with Manual Exchange of the Satellites User Localization Mode on page 36 Real Time S P O T display The real word situation of disappearance and re appearance of satellites as well as the dynamic display of several parameters like HDOP PDOP receiver s location elapsed time and the trajectory of a moving receiver can be observed in real time in the special Rea
310. ialog gt Set To Default to adjust the instrument s settings to a standard set of operating conditions Select GPS Main Dialog gt Test Scenario gt A GNSS and select a predefined GSM 3GPP FDD 3GPP2 CDMA2000 or EUTRA LTE test scenario See also chapter 2 3 2 Full Set of Pre defined Test Scenarios as Basis for A GPS A GLONASS A GNSS Protocol and Conformance Test Cases on page 20 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt ON The instrument generates an A GPS signal according to the selected test scenario Refer to the corresponding specification and customize the test scenario signal for the predefined specific test case i e perform the necessary changes on the satel lite constellation receiver location simulation time and power settings Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 38 Satellite Navigation General Description mnr T UPPUMCECENN CNN NUUS Typical Realtime Workflow 2 10 7 Generating A GNSS Test Signal The generic workflow for generation of A GNSS test scenarios in conformance to Pro tocol and Conformance Test Cases is as follow 1 Select GNSS Main Dialog Set To Default to adjust the instrument s settings to a standard set of operating conditions 2 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Test Scenario gt A GNSS and select a predefined 3GPP FDD or EUTRA LTE test scenario e g 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S7 Signaling STA 3 S
311. igger signal and for configuring the marker signals see chapter 3 14 Trigger Marker Clock Settings on page 145 For R amp S SMBV instruments the currently selected trig ger source is displayed to the right of the button Note The trigger and clock functions are available for R amp S SMBV instruments only Remote command n a Arm R amp S SMBV only Stops signal generation This button appears only with Running signal generation in the Armed Auto and Armed Retrigger trigger modes Signal generation can be restarted by a new trigger internally with Execute Trigger or externally Remote command subsystem TRIGger ARM EXECute on page 283 Execute Trigger R amp S SMBV only Executes trigger manually A manual trigger can be executed only when an internal trigger source and a trigger mode other than Auto have been selected Remote command lt subsystem gt TRIGger EXECute on page 284 Clock R amp S SMBV only Calls the menu for selecting the clock source and for setting a delay see chapter 3 14 Trigger Marker Clock Settings on page 145 Remote command Neds User Environment The propagation channel between a GNSS satellite and an user is split into three envi ronment characteristics e Satellite Configuration orbit and satellite clock errors e Atmospheric Configuration lonosphere troposphere e User Environment or near user environment Environment model e g
312. ignal modulated by P code requires the additional soft ware option R amp S SMBV K93 The configuration of P and C A P signals is enabled only in a hybrid GNSS configuration with GPS navigation standard and enabled para metr GNSS System Configuration Use Position Accuracy P Code On Table 3 8 Overview of the supported signals Band Entry Point Standard Signal minimum Required Option L1 E1 GPS GPS C A R amp S SMBV K44 R amp S SMx P AMU K244 C A P Q R amp S SMBV K93 C A P I Galileo Galileo E1 DEF R amp S SMBV K66 R amp S SMx AMU K266 GLONASS GLONASS R C A R amp S SMBV K94 R amp S SMx AMU K294 BeiDou BeiDou B1 C A R amp S SMBV K107 L2 GPS GPS C A R amp S SMBV K44 R amp S z SMBV K244 C A P Q R amp S SMBV K93 C A P I GLONASS GLONASS R C A R amp S SMBV K94 R amp S SMBV K294 C A P Q is the standard transmitted signal on L1 and P is the standard transmitted signal on L2 old generation IIA satellites did not transmit P on L2 The standard men tions some cases where C A and P are in phase on L2 and hence the availability of the configuration C A P I Note Not enough hardware resources This error message appears and the satellite is disabled if the available hardware resources are not enough to generate the desired signal Hybrid GNSS configurations multipath configurations signals modulated by P code and activated satellites consume hardware resources Refer
313. ignment Filler NE EN rnm Almanac RINEX trn ten rh tnb alpha 0 alpha 3 Altitude ceva acne nine needs t ped peed Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correction Term to the Angle of Inclination ssssesee 119 Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correction Term to the Argument of Latitude sssssseseeee 119 Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correction Term to the Orbit Radius creen efr e ettet ne 119 Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Angle of Inclination ssssseee 119 Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Argument of Latitude ssssssseeeee 119 Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Orbit Radius nnt fre etd eer t 119 Antenna pattern RUE emt el tenera 64 Loading rnt remeras 32 OTA measurements sesseeeee 32 Antenna profile see antenna pattern seessssssssseees 32 Anti Spoofing Enabling assii aaa tedesca 87 Argument of Perigee ssssssssssseseeeeeeene 119 62 147 Assistance data Data Format 5 nre nene nine 134 Assistance Data ue Ihe Duration Latittde cec trece da terere Eongit de beeen aie asada Position Format z Reference Location rrrrnrrrnnnvrnrrnrnnnnnvrrvrnnnrnnsnnnnnnnn Resolution ERE c Space Vehicle State un Syn chronize aei De ede
314. ilite is activated Thus if projection is required trigger the projection at the beginning of the satellite signal generation Remote command subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PROJect on page 230 GPS Galileo and BeiDou Common Ephemeris Parameters The ephemeris parameters correspond to the SV ID and navigation standard displayed with the parameter SV ID Standard and to the navigation page determined by the Current Page Index Table 3 11 Common Ephemeris Parameters Value 1 Parameter Description SCPI command MO Mean Anomaly at Reference Time subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris MZERO on page 238 Delta N Mean Motion Difference From Computed lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris NDELta on page 238 Eccentricity UI lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ECCentricity on page 235 As this parameter affects the satellite s orbit the value selected here also has an impact on the satellite s parameters Time Shift Doppler Shift and Duration Eleva tion gt 2 5 5 7 5 10 The value of these parameters will be upda ted automatically N Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 119 Satellite Navigation User Interface Navigation Message Configuration Parameter SQRT A Description Square Root of the Semi Major Axis
315. inIQSIM2 only Determines the upsampling factor A higher upsampling factor improves the filtering but increases the waveform size pro portionally This leads to limitation for the maximum Duration Of Satellite Simulation Remote command subsystem FILTer OSAMpling on page 164 Duration Of Satellite Simulation R amp S WinIQSIM2 only Determines the duration of the satellite simulation The resulting duration of the simulation is calculated as follow Duration of Satellite Simulation D i T uration of Simulation 7 Doppler Shift F Carrier where F carrier is the frequency selected with the parameter RF Band on page 59 The maximum duration of satellite simulation depends on the Oversampling on page 61 and the ARB memory size of the connected instrument Remote command subsystem DURation on page 163 GNSS System Configuration R amp S SMBV only Opens the GNSS System Almanac Configuration Settings dialog for defining the GNSS system configuration and selecting the almanac RINEX files per navigation standards If a hybrid GNSS configuration is enabled the name of the selected GNSS navigation standard is displayed next to the button Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 61 Satellite Navigation User Interface A a 5 3 1 2 GNSS Main Dialog Trigger Marker Marker Calls the menu for selecting the trigger source for setting the time delay of an external tr
316. individual configuration of the time and Doppler shift power and carrier phase per tap The resulting propagation is displayed in the graph on the right side of the dialog Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 128 Satellite Navigation User Interface Static Multipath Configuration amp GPS Satellite 4 Multipath Configuration Number Of Taps 3 Doppler Carrier E Shit Phase Hz frad 050000 am 0 00 100000 500 0 00 0 00000 3 00 0 00 Power dB 0 5 1 0 1 5 Time Shift Chips State Enables disables the generation of multipath signal for the satellite with the displayed SV ID belonging to the displayed GNSS standard Settings made in the dialog are con sidered only if the multipath configuration is enabled Remote command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh STATe on page 207 SV ID Standard Displays the SV ID and the GNSS standard the satellite is belonging to Remote command n a Number of Taps Sets the paths number The value determines the number of rows available for config uration The maximum value for this parameter is calculated dynamically see chapter 2 4 1 Channel Budget on page 23 Remote command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh TAP COUNt on page 208 Multipath Taps Table Comprises the settings of the taps The number of taps i e the table rows is deter mined by the parameter Number of Taps Time Shift Chips Multi
317. ing 3GPP TS 51 010 1 v 7 7 0 10 9 A GPS Signaling sce nario R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 51 010 10 10 Performance 1 3GPP TS 51 010 1 v 7 7 0 10 10 A GPS Performance Test Scenario 1 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 51 010 10 10 Performance 2 3GPP TS 51 010 1 v 7 7 0 10 10 A GPS Performance Test Scenario 2 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 51 010 10 10 Performance 3 3GPP TS 51 010 1 v 7 7 0 10 10 A GPS Performance Test Scenario 3 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K92 3GPP TS 34 108 10 7 Signaling 3GPP FDD 3GPP TS 34 108 v 8 0 0 10 7 A GPS Signaling scenario R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 34 108 10 1 2 Performance 1 3GPP TS 34 108 v 8 0 0 10 1 2 A GPS Performance scenario 1 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 34 108 10 1 2 Performance 2 3GPP TS 34 108 v 8 0 0 10 1 2 A GPS Performance scenario 2 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 34 108 10 1 2 Performance 3 3GPP TS 34 108 v 8 0 0 10 1 2 A GPS Performance scenario 3 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K92 3GPP2 3GPP2 C S0036 2 1 1 Stationary 3GPP2 C S0036 2 1 2 Moving 3GPP2 C S0036 0 V1 0 2 1 1 A GPS Stationary 3GPP2 C S0036 0 V1 0 2 1 2 A GPS Moving R amp S SMBV K44 K65 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K91 K92 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 20 Satellite Navigation General Description Enhancements of Realtime Assisted GNSS Options GPS Galileo and GLONASS Test Scenario Required for Test Ca
318. ing axis direction Examples of predefined environment based on the vertical obstacles are City Block and Urban Canyon E amp GPS Obscuration and Auto Multipath Type city Block he dear Environment Vertical Obstacles v Physical Model Obscuration amp Multipath Sd Start Rec X Offset 490 0 m zl Start Rec Y Offset 500 0 m m Start Rec Height Offs 10 0 m v Map Orientation 0 00 deg m Obstacles File City Block View Type Top View i 700 650 600 550 500 450 400 350 200 250 200 150 100 50 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Fig 3 1 Vertical obstacles settings on the basis of a predefined city block Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 76 Satellite Navigation User Interface Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings amp amp GPS Obscuration and Auto Multipath Type Urban Canyon zs Near Environment Vertical Obstacles v Physical Model Obscuration amp Multipath zl Start Rec X Offset 150 m v Start Rec Y Offset om zj Start Rec Height Offs 2m rj Map Orientation o owes Obstacles File Urban Canyon 1 View Type Top View 50 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 10001050 1100 1150120012501300 Fig 3 2 Vertical obstacles settings on the basis of a predefined urban canyon Receiver Offset Determines the start position of a receiver vehicle in terms of height and left front offset rela
319. integer Range 8388608 to 8388607 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 4 16 Atmospheric Configuration subsystem ATMospheric TROPospheric MODel eese nnne 250 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric ONospheric MODel eren 251 subsystem ATMospheric IONospheric KLOBuchar ALPHaxch0 seen 251 subsystem ATMospheric IONospheric KLOBuchar BETA xch0 sse 251 Subsvsiemz A TMospbertcGbGiOhospbertc AL Dach 251 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric GPS lONospheric BETA lt ChO gt cccccssseseeeeeeceeeesseeeesseenseseess 252 Subsvsiemz A TMospbertc BEI DoujlOhospbertc AL PDHa cchtz 252 subsystem ATMospheric BElDou lONospheric BETA ch0 sees eene 252 subsystem ATMospheric GALileo IONospheric AI ch0 sees 252 subsystem ATMospheric GALileo IONospheric SF chz eene 253 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric TROPospheric MODel Model Determines the tropospheric model Parameters lt Model gt NONE STANag RST NONE Manual operation See Tropospheric Model on page 112 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 250 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands EN omne Atmospheric Configuration subsystem ATMospheric IONospheric MODel Model Determines the applied ionospheric model Parameters Model NONE
320. ion In the Satellite Configuration dialog you can activate and confuigure the signal simulation of up to 24 satellites The maximum number of the configurable satel lites depends on the installed options The GNSS implementation in R amp S WinIQSIM2 is a simplified offline version of the realtime option The offline version provides the possibility to generate an one sat ellite generic signal i e only 1 satellite can be activated and configured In the following description the relevant parameters are adjusted accordingly in R amp S WinlQSIM2 You find the differences explicitly stated in the description amp GPS Satellite Configurations lol xl Power Mode Auto v Ref Power 115 00 dBm Elevation Mask 5 v Ref Satellite 3 Total Power Initial HDOP PDOP 0 67 1 49 Ref Standard ces SI Ref Signal Dist C A 20814km Get Optimal Constellation Satellites Power Tuning Atmospheric Config Satellites Global Ephemeris Real Time Projection M On Satellite 4 Ke inene 24 i Standard Chip Rate 2 046 000 00 MHz Orbit Type MEO Modulation BPSK Sat 1 GPS Navigation Multipath GALILEO Duration Elev gt 5 08 19 00 GPS ze Pseudorange 2223170486 km z GLONASS R C A Pseudor Bias 0 000 m v GLONASS R C A GPS m Time Shift 151 725 190 Chips Sat 8 Off GPS CH i Doppler Shift 1 096 20 kHz D Sat 9 abet peus Init Carr P
321. ion Duration subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData DURation Duration lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData DURation Duration subsystem ADGeneration GPS TOAData DURation Duration Sets the duration of the assistance data Parameters Duration float Range 1E 3 to 5E3 Increment 1E 3 RST 1E 3 Default unit s Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Duration on page 134 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData RESolution Resolution lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData RESolution Resolution lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData RESolution lt Resolution gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData RESolution lt Resolution gt Sets the resolution of the assistance data Parameters lt Resolution gt float Range 1 0E 3 to 5 Increment 1 0E 3 RST 1 0E 3 Default unit s Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Resolution on page 134 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData TOWeek TOW lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData TOWeek TOW lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TOWeek TOW lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TOWeek TOW Enabled for GPS time basis lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis Determines the Time of Week TOW the assistance data is generated for Parameters lt TOW gt i
322. ion Eleva tion gt 2 5 5 7 5 10 The value of these parameters will be upda ted automatically Galileo Ephemeris Parameters Comprises the Galileo specific ephemeris parameters Pe Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 122 Satellite Navigation Ech Table 3 14 Galileo Specific Ephemeris Parameters User Interface Navigation Message Configuration Parameter Description SCPI command SISA Signal In Space Accuracy lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SISA on page 240 IODnav Issue Of Data Ephemeris and Clock correc lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo tion NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IODNav on page 237 IlODa Issue Of Data Almanacs subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IODA on page 236 GPS and BeiDou Clock Correction Parameters The ephemeris parameters correspond to the SV ID and navigation standard displayed with the parameter SV ID Standard and to the navigation page determined by the Current Page Index Table 3 15 GPS and BeiDou Clock Correction Parameters Parameter Description SCPI command T GD L1 L2 Correction Term lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMES sage PAGE lt us gt CCORection TGD on page 232 t OC Clock Correction Parameter lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt a f2 NMESsage PAGE us CCORection z T
323. ion parameters only define what the satellites are transmitting as ionospheric correction parameters whereas the model configuration describes the actual ionospheric and tropospheric models used in the satellite receiver channel simulation Time Conversion Configuration The instrument supports an advanced function for transformation of the GNSS time to the universal time coordinate basis UTC and vice versa The provided GNSS system time conversion parameters are zero order and first order system clock drift parame ters in addition to the current leap second The leap second describes the difference between the GPS Galileo GLONASS or BeiDou system time and UTC system time It Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 27 Satellite Navigation General Description pem M M M sl Functional Overview of Realtime Option GNSS Enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 is for example possible to simulate a system time drift between GPS and Galileo by configuring different time conversion sets for both UTC GPS and UTC Galileo conver Sion parameters The time conversion parameters can be either manually configured or fetched from the RINEX header It is recommenced to keep the default configurations without system time offset and or drift 2 5 5 Leap Second Simulation The instrument enables the simulation of leap second in a straightforward way The simulation r
324. iption files rs_obst respectively road side buildings description files xs buil Example see example Selectng a vertical obscuration environment on page 179 Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Planes File on page 81 subsystem OBSCuration VOBS CATalog USER subsystem OBSCuration RPL CATalog USER Queries the names of the user defined files in the default directory The default direc tory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory Listed are only obstacles description files rs_obst respectively roadside buildings description files rs buil Example see example Selectng a vertical obscuration environment on page 179 Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Planes File on page 81 subsystem OBSCuration VOBS FILE Filename lt subsystem gt OBSCuration RPL FILE Filename Loads the selected file Loaded are only obstacles description files xs obst respectively roadside build ings description files xs buil Parameters Filename string Example see example Selectng a vertical obscuration environment on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Planes File on page 81 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 183 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands O N HU U e Obscuration and Auto Multip
325. ircling the earth in low orbits The satellites transmit permanently information that can be used by the receivers to calculate their current position ephemeris and about the orbits of all satellites almanac The 3D position of a receiver on the earth can be deter mined by carrying out delay measurements of at least four signals emitted by differ ent satellites Being transmitted on a single carrier frequency the signals of the individual satel lites can be distinguished by means of correlation Gold codes These ranging codes are used as spreading code for the navigation message which is transmitted at a rate of 50 baud e Galileo Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 11 Satellite Navigation General Description H O INN UNE GN Galileo is the European global navigation satellite system that provides global posi tioning service under civilian control It is planed to be inter operable with GPS and GLONASS and other global satellite navigation systems The fully deployed Galileo system consists of 30 satellites 27 operational and 3 spares Three independent CDMA signals named E5 E6 and E1 are perma nently transmitted by all Galileo satellites The E5 signal is further sub divided into two signals denoted E5a and E5b see figure 2 1 e GLONASS Glonass is the russian global navigation satellite system It is expected to be fully operational before the end of 2011 with
326. itation in the simu lation time The ephemeris are updated and there is no limitation problem of maximum allowed time span of two hours GPS or half an hour Glonass between the simula tion time and the reference time of the current satellite ephemeris page 2 1 7 Dynamic exchange of satellites In this implementation the exchange of satellites can be performed automatically or be configured and triggered by the user e Toenable the instrument to perform automatic exchange of satellites select the Auto Localization mode Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 16 Satellite Navigation General Description qem M M sy Functional Overview of the Basic Realtime GNSS Options GPS Galileo GLONASS and BeiDou In this mode the instrument constantly monitors and updates the simulated satel lite s constellation based on two criteria the optimal satellite constellation with mini mum PDOP and the satellite s visibility respecting the Elevation Mask While the PDOP is a constellation parameter that is calculated by the instrument and dis played in real time the satellite s visibility is a satellite parameter which indicates that the satellite elevation at a specific user location is above a configurable eleva tion mask Depending on the current satellite s conditions and the used number of satellites a sophisticated algorithm decides how often the P
327. ite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Pseudorange on page 107 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 217 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands O Ae m Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PRBias lt PseudorangeBias gt Sets a bias to the pseudorange of a satellite see also lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PRANge on page 217 This setting is only available for lt subsystem gt SMODeAUTO or USER Parameters lt PseudorangeBias gt float Range 1000 to 1000 Increment 0 001 RST 0 Default unit m Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Pseudorange Bias on page 107 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt SCRate Queries the standard chip rate Return values lt ChipRate gt float Default unit Hz Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Usage Query only Manual operation See Standard Chip Rate on page 105 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt SIGNal Signal Selects the type of signal the corresponding satellite is using Enabled subsystem UMGPs is prerequisites for using P codes Parameters Signal CACode PCODe CAPQ CAPI E1Def RCA B1CA RST CACode Example See example Configuring the satel
328. ith configurable dis tance to vehicle height and surface type with different properties Use this model to simulate flights over sea lakes with surrounding can yon or for ships crossing sea straits See chapter 3 3 5 Ground Sea Reflection on page 84 Line of Sight LOS all No near field environment is defined The environment view displays the currently configured model Remote command subsystem OBSCuration ENVironment on page 181 Physical Model For Near Environment different than LOS the physical model determines whether the satellite signals are obscured and or multipath echoes are simulated The simulation of multipath effects in Physical Model Obscuration amp Multipath requires additionally the option R amp S SMBV K92 Remote command subsystem OBSCuration PMODel on page 181 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 75 Satellite Navigation User Interface Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings Viewport from to Zoom Out Zooms in the displayed model to the selected range To display the full model again use the Zoom Out function 3 3 2 Vertical Obstacles Settings This section comprises the parameters necessary to configure a near environmental model for simulation of obscurations and multipath effects expected in a city environ ment The vertical obstacles are defined in a static OX OY coordinate system and are either parallel to OX or OY axis follow
329. ithm e modified version of linear segment parabolic blend algorithm LSPB e guaranteed continuity in acceleration limited Jerk between the waypoints The smoothening algorithm uses a user defined proximity parameter to determine e the maximum deviation from the user s input waypoints e the number of inserted waypoints along the great circle With a proximity value of zero the motion is formed entirely of straight segments At any of the specified waypoints each direction change causes a motion stop Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 28 Satellite Navigation General Description n MMHR MH MGG RN GUNT Functional Overview of Realtime Option GNSS Enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 For more information refer to chapter A 4 1 Detailes on the Smoothening Algorithm on page 307 For description of the file formats refer to chapter A 1 1 Movement or Motion Files on page 293 and chapter A 1 2 Vehicle Description Files Used for Smoothening on page 300 2 5 8 Hardware in the Loop HIL The term Hardware in the Loop HIL describes the mode in which the R amp S SMBV acts as a slave and is remotely controlled by master application software see figure 2 2 The application software sends remote control commands in real time possibly from a flight simulator The R amp S SMBV processes the received position motion and attitude infor
330. iver location and at the simulation start time The Auto power mode is enabled in Auto Localization and User Localization modes Remote command subsystem POWer MODE on page 222 Reference Power Sets the power level that is used as a reference for the calculation of the power level of the satellites In Auto power mode the Reference Power is the power level of the reference signal component Reference Satellite at the reference orbital distance Example Power Mode Auto Ref Power 120 00 dBm Ref Satellite INA d Total Power Ref Standard ces Ref Signal Dist C A 20 300km Ref Orbital Dist 20300 km Ref Standard GPS Ref Signal C A The Inter Standard Power Tuning settings are applied automatically The power levels of all satellites are calculated automatically based on this reference power level for each moment of time depending on the ratio of their dynamic satellite receiver distance In User power mode the Reference Power represents the power level based on which all initial satellite power levels are calculated Remote command subsystem POWer REFerence POWer on page 222 Reference Satellite Determines the satellite used as a reference for the calculation of the power levels of the satellites in Power Mode gt Auto For Reference Satellite different than N A The values of Reference Standard and Reference Signal Reference Orbital Dis ta
331. l nenen en eee tetotorororsrsrnrurnsnnnrnnenerenerereeerene 193 SE Ek d Re TECH KC 193 subsystem HYBRid GLONass STATe ecoute eet ee n pene e sk edu huma aide 193 Subsysten gt FYBRIGGPSESTATE men sete ananas dad be banale 193 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 192 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands T Per GNSS System Configuration lt SUbSystem gt UGRF pu M 193 amp s bsystenis UMGP ET 193 subsystem SATellite ASPOOflhig 22 Lilian ninia stud Eia Ei ai iadaa 193 lt subsystem gt HYBRid lt GNSS gt STATe lt subsystem gt HYBRid BEIDou STATe State lt subsystem gt HYBRid GALileo STATe lt State gt lt subsystem gt HYBRid GLONass STATe lt State gt lt subsystem gt HYBRid GPS STATe lt State gt Defines the navigation standards that will be part of the hybrid configuration Only the satellites of an enabled standard are configurable see chapter 4 12 Satellites Config uration and Satellites Signal Settings on page 210 Parameters lt State gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Options R amp S SMBV K44 K66 K94 K107 lt subsystem gt UCRF lt UseCentral_RF gt Use this command if several R amp S SMBV instruments are connected to generate GNSS signal in the same GNSS band Parameters lt UseCentral_RF gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Manual operation See
332. l 219 ee m lt subsystem gt SPReading STATe State Activates deactivates spreading When spreading is deactivated the pure navigation data is modulated onto the RF carrier This setting is only available for subsystem SMODeSTATic Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 1 Example BB GPS SMOD STAT BB GPS SPR STAT ON Manual operation See Use Spreading on page 100 lt subsystem gt SEMask lt SEMask gt For lt subsystem gt SMODe AUTO or USER sets the satellite s elevation mask Parameters lt SEMask gt float Range 2 5 to 10 0 RST 5 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Elevation Mask on page 101 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands QOIU E P n E EX Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings lt subsystem gt HDOP For lt subsystem gt SMODe AUTO or USER queries the HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the selected satellite constellation at the beginning of the simulation Return values lt Hdop gt float Increment 0 01 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Usage Query only Manual operation See Initial HDOP PDOP on page 101 lt subsystem gt PDOP For lt subsystem gt SMODe AUTO or USER queries the PDOP Position Dil
333. l DAG uszFCCGObrechhon TOGD eee ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIDouNME Gsaoel DAG zuszFCCGObrechhon TO ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIDouNME Gsaoel PAG us EPHemeris CIC sess subsystem GVlD chz BEIDouNMtE Gsaoel PAG us LEPHemere Clg ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIDouNMtE Gsaoel PAG us LEPHemere Ch subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CRS esses lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CUC o subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris CUS esses subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ECCentricity 235 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris HEALth lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IDOT cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODOC esses lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt J EPHemeris IODE mnrnnnnnnnnvnnnvnnvrnnnnnrnnnrnrnnnrnnnen ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIDouNME Gsaoel PAG us TEPHemers LZERo ne lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris MZERo lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris NDELta subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris
334. l Time S P O T Satellites and Position Online Tracker display The Real Time S P O T display is enabled for Auto Localization and User Localiza tion modes Realtime Option GPS P Code R amp S SMBV K93 The option GPS P Code R amp S SMBV K93 is only available for instruments equipped with option GPS R amp S SMBV K44 It enhances the option GPS with the functionality Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 18 Satellite Navigation General Description 1 2 3 2 3 1 Enhancements of Realtime Assisted GNSS Options GPS Galileo and GLONASS to generate a position accuracy P Code signal and allows the configuration of P or C A P satellite signals in addition to the civilian C A signal enabled by the basic GPS option R amp S SMBV K44 P Codes are one week long codes with a high chip rate 10 23 MHz The higher chip rate significantly increases the performance compared to the civilian C A codes used by commercial receivers i e P Code signal provide better Carrier to Noise sensitivity Another difference compared to the C A signals is that P Code signals are only sensi ble to less than 30 m multipath delay whereas C A signals are sensible to 300 m The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 10 Generating GPS Signal Modula ted with P Code on page 40 Enhancements of Realtime Assisted GNSS Options GPS Galileo and GLONASS This secti
335. le Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See h1 h2 d1 d2 on page 85 subsystem OBSCuration GSR O1Height Height subsystem OBSCuration GSR O2Height Height Determines the height of the left right obstacle Parameters Height float Range 0 to 10000 Increment 0 1 RST 100 Example see example Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See h1 h2 d1 d2 on page 85 subsystem OBSCuration GSR GALTitude lt GroundAltitude gt Sets the altitude of the receiver according to the WGS84 geodetic system Parameters lt GroundAltitude gt float Range 0 to 10000 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example see example Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Ground Altitude on page 85 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR OORientation Orientation Sets the obstacle orientation Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 189 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands 4 7 Hardware in the Loop HIL Parameters Orientation float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Obstacle Orientation on page 85 Hardware in the Loop HIL s bsystemRI HIEPositiorr MDDEA aret et reo e Rire een ctn Ra E e than 190 subsystem RT HILPosi
336. lected settings e g RF Band and Total Power at the simulation start time Remote command subsystem STATe on page 159 Set to default Calls the default settings The following table gives an overview of the settings Refer to the remote control commands description for the preset value for each parameter Note Use Update RF Frequency function to preset the RF Frequency and level Parameter Value State Not affected by Set to default RF Band L1 E1 Simulation Mode Static Almanac GPS SEM678 txt GAL Yuma678 txt GLO 678 agl Beidou Yuma678 txt R amp S WinIQSIM2 R amp S WinIQSIM2 Oversampling 2 Duration of Satellite Simulation 1s Data Source PRBS9 System Time Time basis of the entry standard GNSS System Configuration GPS only Galileo only GLONASS only or BeiDou only depending on the entry standard Satellite configuration Maximum Number of Satellites 1 State satellite 1 On Standard GPS Galileo GLONASS or BeiDou depending on the entry standard Signal C A E1 DEF R C A or B1 C A depending on the entry standard Remote command subsystem PRESet on page 159 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 57 Satellite Navigation User Interface GNSS Main Dialog LE SavelRecall Accesses the Save Recall dialog i e the standard instrument function for storing and recalling the complete dialog related settings in a fil
337. leo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris MZERo lt MZero gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris MZERo lt MZero gt Mean Anomaly at Reference Time Parameters lt MZero gt integer Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris NDELta lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris NDELta lt NDelta gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris NDELta lt NDelta gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris NDELta lt NDelta gt Mean Motion Difference From Computed Value Parameters lt NDelta gt integer Range 32768 to 32767 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ODOT lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ODOT lt ODot gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 238 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands H A genne Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ODOT lt ODot gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ODOT lt ODot gt Rate of Right Ascension Parameters lt ODot gt integer Range 8388608 to 8
338. lid space vehicle IDs Arbitrary data is supported only in Static mode In Auto Localization and User Localization mode Real Navigation Data is pre selected and no other data source can be selected Real Navigation Data Real Navigation Data almanac RINEX can be downloaded from the internet and stored on the hard disk of the generator If required re configure manually the downloaded files Hence neither almanac nor RINEX files for Galileo are available In the R amp S SMBV some predicted almanacs and Rinexes are provided to simulate the movement of Galileo satellites on their designed orbits Use the chapter 3 4 GNSS System Almanac Configuration Set tings on page 86 dialog to select the almanac file per navigation standard Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 65 Satellite Navigation User Interface ie Jm GNSS Main Dialog PRBSxx Data List Pattern Arbitrary data can be used for basic tests on the GNSS signals Signals generated in this way can be recognized by a GPS receiver However since there is no real navigation data modulated with the GNSS spreading code only the signal level of the simulated satel lite s as carrier to noise ratio can be measured and displayed by the receiver sensitivity test A signal of this type is usually sufficient for performing simple function tests The following standard data sources are available
339. lite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Signal s on page 103 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt STANdard Standard Selects the navigation standard the corresponding satellite belongs to Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 218 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands D OD s A O Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings The available GNSS standards depend on the selected hybrid GNSS configuration and the installed options Parameters Standard GPS GALileo GLONass BElDou RST GPS Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Standard on page 103 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt STATe State Activates deactivates the satellite Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Satellite State on page 103 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt SVID Svid Defines the Space Vehicle ID of the satellite to be simulated This value is used to gen erate the corresponding spreading code For subsystem NAVigation DATARNData only the valid IDs which are listed in the almanac are selectable for arbitrary data any ID can be selected SV ID set to 1 corresponds to the manu
340. ll 90 Options R amp S SMBV K103 Manual operation See Vehicle Body Start Roll on page 72 lt subsystem gt LOCation SMOVement lt SmoothMovement gt Enables an internal algorithm to smooth the trajectory see also chapter 2 5 7 Motion Smoothening Using Vehicle Description File on page 28 Parameters lt SmoothMovement gt 0 1 OFF ON RST OFF Example SOURCe1 BB GPS LOCation SMOVement Options R amp S SMBV K92 Manual operation See Smooth Movement on page 70 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 174 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands 4 5 Navigation Data Navigation Data Example Selecting Real Navigation Data The following example uses GPS entry standard SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation DATA RND SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation ALManac GPS FILE GPS SEM585 txt SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation TBASis UTC SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation DATE Response 2008 7 13 SOURCe1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation TIME Response 17 4 0 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation TBASis GPS SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation lation WNUMber un Ss a Response 1488 SOURce1 BB GPS NAVigation SIMulation TOWeek Response 61455 lt subsystem gt NAVigation DATA EE 175 subsystem NAVigation DATA DSELect esses enne rere 176 SubsvstemzNAVigoaton DATA PATTem ener nn nnn tenens nenas 176 lt subsystem gt NAVigation SIMulation DAG 176 lt subsystem gt N
341. log are enabled for con figuration only in User Localization and Static Mode mode on the R amp S SMBV in Auto Localization and R amp S WinIQSIM2 Static modes the parameters of the naviga tion message of each satellite are read only QD The parameters of the Navigation Message are only configurable for R amp S SMBV To access this dialog 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS 2 Select Simulation Mode gt User Localization 3 Select Satellite Configuration gt Navigation Message Configuration Although the navigation messages are fully configurable it is recommended to use the almanac s parameter as basis for further configurations see Set To Almanac on page 119 For better readability of the parameters in the Navigation Message Configuration dialog the corresponding values are input as integer in the same way as they are included in the satellite s navigation message but the scaled values and the scal ing factors are also displayed Different scaling factors may apply for the same parameters in the different GNSS standards Number Of Navigation Pages Current Page Index 1 Real Time Projection C On Set To Almanac Project Navigation Message R amp S SMBV instruments only Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 116 Satellite Navigation hemmes Parameters lt lt lt Hide Details Code On L2 P Code ON zl 2 P Data Flag I On Fit Interval Flag T On SV
342. lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TALignment on page 247 PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 124 Satellite Navigation User Interface Navigation Message Configuration Parameter Tb Interval Description Displays the Tb Interval in the current day where the Ephemeris set page is valid Tb Interval Tb 1 P2 15 60 AgeOfEphemeris 2 Examples e tb 45 P2 1 and Age of Eph 30 Tb Interval 11 00 00 11 30 00 e tb 45 P2 1 and Age of Eph 45 Tb Interval 10 52 30 11 37 30 e tb 45 P2 0 and Age of Eph 60 Tb Interval 10 30 00 11 30 00 SCPI command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TINTerval on page 248 TOE tb Displays the time of Ephemeris in the current day Also referred to in the standard as the middle of the Tb Interval or tb This parame ter is equivalent to DayTime Tb 1 P2 15 60 seconds and independ ent of Age of Ephemeris Examples e tb 45 P2 1 e tb 45 P2 1 e tb 45 P2 0 TOE 7 11 00 00 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TOE on page 248 Reliability measure of system time conver sion parameters e 00 TAU C and TAU GPS relayed from control segment e 01 TAU C from control segment TAU GPS calculated on board GLO NASS M satellite e 10 TAU C on board Glonass M satellite and TAU
343. m ADGeneration GPS TOAData RESolution on page 264 Data Format In Assistance Mode gt A GPS determines the data format GPS or GNSS of the generated acquisition files Affected are the Almanac file the Navigation file and the acquisition file Remote command lt subsystem gt ADGeneration ACQuisition DFORmat on page 265 Generate Almanac File Access the Generate Almanac File dialog for saving the generated almanac file The file name is user definable the data format is defined with the parameter Data Format The almanac file is generated in one of the listed file formats e inacomma separated file format rs_al see table 3 20 e as standard Yuma formatted file rs yuma This file format is not supported for A GLONASS In case of GPS Galileo and BeiDou the xs yuma the almanac file can be used as the main almanac source for the specific GNSS standard Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 134 Satellite Navigation User Interface Assistance Data Generation Table 3 20 Contents of the generated almanac file GPS Parameter Unit SatlD e dimensionless toa sec delta i semi circles OMEGADOT semi circles sec SV Health boolean SQRT A meters OMEGAO semi circles MO semi circles w semi circles afo seconds afi sec sec The generated almanac file is conformant to the format appended to standards 3GPP 34 108 v 8 0 0 3GPP TS 51 010 1v 7 7 0 and 37
344. mation and generates the required signal The output GNSS signal is provided back to the application or to the flight simulator Slave Master Application Software i HIL e Remote Commands ejeg ouo AuBi J lt GNSS Signal Position Data gt Flight Simulator Fig 2 2 Example of HIL test setup To compensate for system latency the R amp S SMBV applies a prediction algorithm The instrument uses the high order dynamics of the master application software and pre dicts the user s position at the subsequent GNSS signal update time The R amp S SMBV accepts the real time HIL commands with a varying time resolution up to 100 Hz If you enable the R amp S SMBV to generate a 1PPS marker signal and syn chronize the flight simulator to it the flight simulator sends the real time commands right after 1PPS This ensures a prediction latency of 10 ms Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 29 Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Obscuration Simulation and Automatic Multipath R amp S SMBV K101 See also chapter 4 7 Hardware in the Loop HIL on page 190 2 6 Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Obscuration Simulation and Automatic Multipath R amp S SMBV K101 This option requires one of the basic realtime GNSS options R amp S SMBV K44 R amp S SMBV K66 R amp S SMBV K94 or R amp S SMBV K107 The automatic multipath func tionality additionally requires the option R amp S SMBV K92 In a real word scen
345. mines the length of the sensitivity assistance data to be generated The maximum length of the generated sensitivity assistance data is then 125 subframes i e 25 pages or one complete navigation message Return values lt Data gt list of floats The R amp S SMBV generates a sensitivity assistance message as a binary stream The returned value of this query for a healthy satellite is a sequence of integer values The first integer is the size of the message in bits to be returned The remaining each of which is a 32 bits long block represents the expected data bits of the navigation message The query returns 0 in case an unhealthy satellite has been selected An error will only be reported if an out of range value for any of the arguments has been selected Example SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis UTC SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS TOAData TIME 17 04 00 000 SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS SVID1 SAData 1 300 queries the sensitivity assistance data for SV ID 1 Response 0 The selected satellite is unhealthy SOURCe1 BB GPS ADGeneration GPS SVID2 SAData 2 300 queries the sensitivity assistance data for SV ID 2 Response 300 1962933360 78782016 68160383 10752 43007 172032 681727 1009778689 1 The first bits of the sensitivity assistance message are 1000 1011 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 258 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands
346. moving scenario e A GPS test scenarios for 3GPP FDD and GSM Performance Test Scenario 3 e CDMA test case 3GPP2 Moving Test Scenario e A GNSS Scenario 5 for EUTRA LTE Another application field of the moving scenarios is the testing of stand alone GNSS receivers In the R amp S SMBV a movement i e a moving receiver is defined in one of the follow ing ways e bya waypoint file that simulates a moving of the connected GNSS receiver A de de can be defined with the WGS 84 geodetic coordinates see chapter A 1 1 1 Waypoint File For mat on page 293 the East North Upper ENU 2D vector trajectoryparameters line arc see chapter A 1 1 2 Vector Trajectory File Format on page 294 e byextracting of the the location data from the NMEA files see chapter A 3 NMEA Scenarios on page 306 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 26 Satellite Navigation General Description Q220 ee 2 5 2 2 5 3 2 5 4 Functional Overview of Realtime Option GNSS Enhanced R amp S SMBV K92 e by configurable locations in Cartesian or geodetic coordinates with potentially defined velocity vector or velocity magnitude parameters in the xtd file see chapter A 1 1 4 Trajectory Description Files on page 296 e bythe provided predefined waypoint files for the land ship aircraft and spacecraft vehicles e by the KML file format of third party software
347. mple Selecting a predefined test scenario on page 158 Manual operation See State on page 56 lt subsystem gt RFBand lt RfBand gt Selects the center carrier frequency of the instrument Parameters lt RfBand gt L1 L2 Available values depend on selected standard RST L1 Example SOURce1 BB GPS RFBand L1 SOURCe1 BB GPS PRFLevel sets the RF level to 1 575420 GHz Example SOURce1 BB GALileo RFBand L1 selects the Galileo E1 RF band SOURCe1 BB GALileo PRFLevel sets the RF level to 1 575420 GHz Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 159 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands JJ Hv Primary Settings Manual operation See RF Band on page 59 lt subsystem gt PRFFrequency Sets the RF frequency in the Frequency display in the header of the instrument to the carrier frequency Tip The carrier frequency is calculated automaticaly and for hybrid signals may devi ate from the frequency set with the command lt subsystem gt RFBand Example BB GPS RFB L1 BB GPS PRFL sets the RF level to 1 575420 GHz Usage Event Manual operation See Update RF Frequency on page 59 lt subsystem gt SMODe lt SMode gt Sets the simulation mode Parameters lt SMode gt STATic AUTO USER Refer to Simulation Mode on page 60 for description of hte simulation modes RST STATic Manual ope
348. mulation Mode User Localization x GNSS System Configuration GPS GLONASS Trigger Marker Auto Clock Internal In the real time solution the User Environment section comprises the settings of the satellite signals the vehicle type and the obscurtion and enabled antenna Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 55 Satellite Navigation User Interface GNSS Main Dialog User Environment Vehicle Type Land Vehicle D Vehicle Description File LandVehicle1 Localization Data Waypoints Melboume_Car_Motion xtd Start Geographic Location 37 816663 S 144 966658 E 100 0m Obscuration amp Auto Multipath City Block Vertical Obstacles Antenna Pattern Body Mask File Car_Medium The Navigation Data section comprises the navigation data source settings Navigation Data Data Source Real Navigation Data Almanac RINEX Time Conversion Config System Time les 3 Week Number 1609 Time Of Week 61 440 000 s D Additionally you can access settings for configuring the satellite signals generating assistance data and displaying the Real Time S P O T Satellite Configurations Real Time S P O T Assistance Data Generation The screenshots provided in this description show parameter values that have been selected to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible inter dependencies between them These values are not necessarily repr
349. n Parameters Reserved integer Range 0 to 67108864 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GPS Ephemeris Parameters on page 121 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SISA lt Sisa gt Signal In Space Accuracy Parameters lt Sisa gt integer Range 0 to 255 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo Ephemeris Parameters on page 122 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA subsystem SVID ch BEIlDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA lt SqrA gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SQRA lt SqrA gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SQRA lt SqrA gt Square Root of the Semi Major Axis Parameters lt SqrA gt integer Range 100000 to 4294967295 Increment 1 RST 100000 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris SVConfig lt SvConfig gt SV Configurations Parameters lt SvConfig gt integer Range 0 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GPS Ephemeris Parameters on page 121 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 240 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands G OTIE RE QH m NR Q Navigation Message Configuration lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TOE lt subs
350. n File and select LandVehiclel Select GNSS Main Dialog Localization Data and select Geographic Location Attitude gt Waypoints to enable a moving receiver In the Localization Data dialog a select Waypoints File Select Predefined Waypoints navigate to a prede fined moving scenario e g Scen City Block txt and execute Select b select Read Out Mode Round Trip Tip In automotive applications and if the instrument is not equipped with option R amp S SMBV K103 force the attitude to the motion direction of the vehicle The atti tude parameters are extracted from the selected waypoint file Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt On to enable signal generation Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Real Time S P O T gt Display Type gt Sky View to visualize the automatically selected satellite constellation Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 45 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow E amp GPS Real Time S P O T Display Type Sky View zl Sky View Real Time Information ime UTC 07 11 2010 17 03 45 000 Rec Loc 48 14550 N 11 57675 E 500 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 0 84 1 68 Next Handover Time 07 11 2010 17 16 45 Legend LOS OG LOS AP loss LOS Echoes E LOS Echoes A P loss E Echoes OG Obscured G GPS inactive E GALILEO R GLONASS The Sky View displays the satellite constellation with the active GNSS sat
351. n URADius lt Radius gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation URADius lt Radius gt Sets the Uncertainty Radius i e sets the maximum radius of the area within which the two dimensional location of the UE is bounded Parameters lt Radius gt integer Range 0 to 1 E6 Increment 1 RST 3 E3 Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Reference Location on page 132 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData TBASis lt TimeBasis gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData TBASis lt TimeBasis gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData TBASis lt TimeBasis gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis lt TimeBasis gt Determines the time basis used to enter the time of assistance data parameters Parameters lt TimeBasis gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Time Basis on page 133 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData DATE Year lt Month gt Day lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GALileo TOAData DATE Year Month Day Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 262 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Assistance Data Settings lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData DATE Year Month Day subsystem ADGeneration
352. n of the GNSS receiver in degrees minutes and seconds Parameters lt LongitudeDeg gt integer Defines the longitude degrees Range 0 to 180 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LongitudeMin gt integer Defines the longitude minutes Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LongitudeSec gt float Defines the longitude seconds Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 lt LongitudeDir gt EAST WEST Defines the longitude direction RST EAST lt LatitudeDeg gt integer Defines the latitude degrees Range 0 to 90 Increment 1 RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 172 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands J Localization Data lt LatitudeMin gt integer Defines the latitude minutes Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 RST 0 lt LatitudeSec gt float Defines the latitude seconds Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 RST 0 lt LatitudeDir gt NORTh SOUTh Defines the latitude direction RST NORT Altitude float Defines the altitude in meters above sea level Range 10000 to 1600000 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Example See example Selecting a waypoint file on page 169 Manual operation See Location Coordinates on page 71 lt subsystem gt LOCation YAW lt Yaw gt lt subsystem gt LOCation PITCh lt Pitch gt lt subsystem gt LOCation ROLL lt Roll gt Sets the attitude
353. navigation standards with different RF Frequencies e g GPS and GLONASS in the L1 E1 upper RNSS band the resulting RF frequency is located between the GPS L1 and the GLONASS L1 frequency Remote command subsystem PRFFrequency on page 160 RF Band Determines the RF band i e the upper or lower RNSS band see figure 2 1 The different satellites will be modulated on their corresponding standard carrier fre quencies see table 3 1 Table 3 1 Carrier frequencies Navigation Stand RF Band Carrier Frequency GHz Required SW Option ard GPS L1 1 57542 R amp S SMBV K44 K244 L2 1 2276 GALILEO E1 1 57542 R amp S SMBV K66 K266 GLONASS L1 1 602 R amp S SMBV K94 K294 L2 1 246 BeiDou L1 1 561098 R amp S SMBV K107 Remote command lt subsystem gt RFBand on page 159 Test Scenario R amp S SMBV only Selects a predefined A GPS A GLONASS A GNSS test scenario see chapter 2 3 2 Full Set of Pre defined Test Scenarios as Basis for A GPS A GLONASS A GNSS Pro tocol and Conformance Test Cases on page 20 for an overview The available test scenarios depend on the installed SW options The A GNSS test cases require hybrid GNSS configuration see Activate GNSS Standards on page 86 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 59 Satellite Navigation User Interface a NR GNSS Main Dialog All parameters simulated position satellite configura
354. nce are updated for the selected Reference Satellite and the satellite to user distance at the start simulation time For Reference Satellite 2 N A Reference Standard is configurable and Ref Distance is set to the nominal orbi tal distance ND of the selected Reference Standard See also Reference Signal Reference Orbital Distance Remote command subsystem POWer REFerence SATellite on page 223 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 99 Satellite Navigation User Interface A c QOn u s Satellite Configuration Total Power By enabled signal generation displays the total power of the generated GNSS signal at a moment of time The total power is a real time parameter that follows the real time changes in the absolute power levels of all active satellites Remote command subsystem POWer TOTal on page 225 Reference Standard In Power Mode gt Auto determines the reference standard Note In a test setup involving two instruments in both instruments set the Reference Satellite gt N A and enable equal Reference Power and the same Reference Stand ard Remote command subsystem POWer REFerence STANdard on page 223 Reference Signal Reference Orbital Distance Power Mode Auto only e For Reference Satellite different than N A displays the signal component of the current reference satellite used as reference for the
355. nd imported see subsystem NAVigation RINex IMPort Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See example Configuring a RINEX file on page 194 Manual operation See RINEX Configuration on page 88 lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex IMPort Uploads the RINEX file selected by lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex GPS FILE Example See example Configuring a RINEX file on page 194 Usage Event Manual operation See RINEX Configuration on page 88 lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex UUAState State Synchronizes the time conversion and the atmospheric parameters to the correspond ing values retrieved from the RINEX file Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example See example Configuring a RINEX file on page 194 Manual operation See RINEX Configuration on page 88 lt subsystem gt NAVigation RINex UFNState State Updates the frequency number for Glonass satellites automatically at import of a RINEX File Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example BB GPS NAV RIN UFNS 1 Manual operation See RINEX Configuration on page 88 lt subsystem gt SVID lt GNSS gt LIST lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou LIST Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 200 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands EE IPnQ 4 10 Time Conversion Configuration lt subsystem gt SVID lt c
356. ndard Required option Signal c p C A resource units P code resource units GPS R amp S SMBV K44 C A 1 0 0 1 R amp S SMBV K44 and P 0 1 R amp S SMBV K93 C A P Q 1 1 0 2 Galileo R amp S SMBV K66 E1 2 0 1 1 0 2 GLONASS R amp S SMBV K94 R C A 1 0 0 1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 24 Satellite Navigation pem M M M w1 General Description Realtime Option Extension to 12 24 Satellites R amp S SMBV K91 K96 Standard BeiDou Required option R amp S SMBV K107 Signal c B C A 1 C A resource units p P code resource units Example According to the table the GPS C A P Q signal requires 1c 1p or 2p units The total available budget when GPS and P code signals are activated in a hybrid GNSS system configuration is 12c 12p QD Instruments equipped with R amp S SMBV K92 can generate multipath signal The gener ation of multipath satellite signal with n taps requires n times more resource units Example The table 2 8 lists some of the GNSS constellations that can be achieved based on the table 2 7 Table 2 8 Possible GNSS hybrid configurations GPS C A P Q GPS P signal GPS C A signal Galileo E1 signal GLONASS R C A signal signal 12 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 2 10 0 0 1 2
357. nnector Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 152 Satellite Navigation User Interface E o ww s Trigger Marker Clock Settings Multichip A multiple of the chip clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector the sample clock is derived internally from this The Multiplier window provided allows the multiplication factor to be entered Remote command subsystem CLOCk MODE on page 290 Clock Multiplier Enters the multiplication factor for clock type Multiple Remote command subsystem CLOCk MULTiplier on page 290 Measured External Clock Provided for permanent monitoring of the enabled and externally supplied clock signal Remote command CLOCk INPut FREQuency 3 14 5 Global Settings The buttons in this section lead to submenu for general trigger clock and mapping set tings Global Trigger Clock Settings Calls the Global Trigger Clock Input Settings dialog This dialog is used among other things for setting the trigger threshold the input impe dance and the polarity of the clock and trigger inputs The parameters in this menu affect all digital modulations and standards and are described in chapter Global Trigger Clock Input Settings in the Operating Manual Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 153 Trigger Marker Clock Settings Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands 4 Remote Control Commands The following commands are r
358. nsion for Antenna Pattern R amp S SMBV K102 In Auto Localization mode the optimal satellites constellation is selected based on the enabled Maximum Number of Satellites and configured Evaluation Mask A line of sight propagation LOS view is assumed in the first stage and the satellites constel lation is selected to minimize the HDOP PDOP Only now the selected constellation is filtered by simulating the user environment model s obscuration and multipath effects on the satellite constellation The satellite constellation is constantly proved and a sat ellite handover is performed automatically whenever a new satellite appears or because of the receiver s movement profile a satellite is not any more obscured simulation with 24 satellites Refer to the corresponding description for an overview of To simulate a real life scenario it is recommended that you enable a hybrid GNSS all required options Internal sampling rate The R amp S SMBV samples the user s environment different depending whether only obscuration or the combination of obscuration and automatic multipath is simulated For example the sampling rate of the model Urban canyon is 10 Hz if only obscura tion is enabled and 5 Hz in the other case Error Message Cut in the scenario dynamics If a multipath scenario requires more than the maximum available channel budget the instrument cuts the scenario dynamics See also chapter 2 4 1 Channel Budget on
359. nt 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo INAV Parameters on page 126 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 244 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands An C A J E QUT Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us INAV TOC Toc Defines the Clock correction data reference Time of Week t E1 E5b parameter of the Integrity navigation message INAV Parameters lt Toc gt integer Range 0 to 16383 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo INAV Parameters on page 126 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection DTAU lt Delta_TAU_n gt Defines the time difference between navigation RF signal transmitted in L2 and naviga tion RF signal transmitted in L1 band Parameters lt Delta_TAU_n gt integer Range 16 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GLONASS Clock Correction Parameters on page 126 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection EN lt E_n gt Sets the age of operation information Parameters lt E_n gt integer Range 0 to 31 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GLONASS Clock Correction Parameters on page 126 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection GAMN lt GAMMA_n gt Defines the SV Clock drift correction coefficient Parameters l
360. nteger Range 604800 to 604800 Increment 1 RST 0 Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 264 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands A Jgm HA Assistance Data Settings Manual operation See Time of Week on page 134 subsystem ADGeneration BElDou TOAData WNUMber lt WeekNumber gt subsystem ADGeneration GALileo TOAData WNUMber lt WeekNumber gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass TOAData WNUMber lt WeekNumber gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData WNUMber lt WeekNumber gt Enabled for GPS time basis lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData TBASis Sets the week number WN the assistance data is generated for Parameters lt WeekNumber gt integer Range 0 to 9999 0 53 Increment 1 RST 0 Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Week Number on page 134 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration AC Quisition DFORmat lt DataFormat gt Sets the format GPS or GNSS of the generated acquisition files Parameters lt DataFormat gt GNSS GPS RST GNSS Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Data Format on page 134 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration AC Quisition CREate Create Stores the current assistance data settings
361. nts This section provides example on connection and configuration of two R amp S SMBV instruments for generating common GNSS signal Overview of required relevant options Instrument 1 option GPS R amp S SMBV K44 e GNSS global option R amp S SMBV K91 Extension to 12 Satellites e generation of more than 12 satellites requires additionally GNSS global option R amp S SMBV K96 Extension to 24 Satellites option Phase Coherence R amp S SMBV B90 Instrument 2 e option GLONASS R amp S SMBV K94 e GNSS global option R amp S SMBV K91 Extension to 12 Satellites e generation of more than 12 satellites requires additionally GNSS global option R amp S SMBV K96 Extension to 24 Satellites option Phase Coherence R amp S SMBV B90 In this description only the GNSS related settings are discussed For detailed informa tion on cabling and required configuration refer to e R amp S SMBV Operating Manual section Synchronous Signal Generation e Application Note 1GP67 Phase Adjustment e Application Note 1GP84 Time Synchronous Signals with Multiple R amp S SMBV100A Vector Signal Generators The figure 2 8 provides an example of test setup The two instruments are connected to work in master slave mode and the local oscillators LO are coupled The first instrument provides the second one with its system clock trigger reference and LO signals Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 51 Generating GNSS Signal with Sev
362. nual operation See Reference Standard on page 100 lt subsystem gt POWer REFerence SIGNal Queries the signal component of the current reference satellite used as reference for the power calculation Return values lt SignalType gt CACode PCODe CAPQ CAPI E1Def RCA B1CA RST CACode Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Usage Query only Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 223 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Q u H qe Power Tuning and Power Settings Manual operation See Reference Signal Reference Orbital Distance on page 100 lt subsystem gt POWer REFerence DISTance Queries the pseudorange of the reference satellite at the beginning of the simulation t t0 Return values lt Distance gt float Range 0 to 0 2 SPEED OF LIGHT Increment 1E3 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the power settings on page 221 Usage Query only Manual operation See Reference Signal Reference Orbital Distance on page 100 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt POWer Power Sets queries the power offset of the satellite in dB The offset determines the power ratio of the activated satellites This setting command is only available for subsystem SMODeUSER See chapter 3 6 1 Power Configuration on page 92 for information about the power calculation P
363. nuously Every subsequent trigger event cau Ses a restart Button Arm stops signal generation A subsequent trigger event internal with Execute Trigger or external causes a restart Single The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs Then the signal is generated once to the length specified at Signal Duration Every subsequent trigger event internal with Execute Trigger or external causes a restart Remote command subsystem TRIGger SEQuence on page 282 Signal Duration Defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the Single trigger mode It is possible to output deliberately just part of the signal an exact sequence of the sig nal or a defined number of repetitions of the signal Remote command subsystem TRIGger SLENgth on page 282 Running Stopped Displays the status of signal generation for all trigger modes This display appears only when signal generation is enabled State On Running The modulation signal is generated a trigger was internally or exter nally initiated in triggered mode If Armed Auto and Armed Retrigger have been selected genera tion of signals can be stopped with the Arm button A new trigger internally with Execute Trigger or externally causes a restart Stopped The signal is not generated and the instrument waits for a trigger event internal or external Remote command subsystem TRIGger RMODe on page 283 Arm
364. o General Workflow 2 If required select GNSS System Configuration and enable a hybrid GNSS satel lite constellation 3 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt Static 4 Perform relevant steps 9 to 17 from General Workflow 5 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt ON The generated GNSS signal is calculated according to the satellite configuration settings the selected almanac file and selected moment of time date and time 2 10 3 Generating GNSS Signal with Automatic Dynamic Exchange of the Satellites Auto Localization Mode 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 according to General Workflow 2 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt Auto Localization 3 Perform relevant steps 6 to 17 from General Workflow 4 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt State gt On The instrument generates the GNSS signal for the selected satellites constellation calculated to fulfill the minimum PDOP and satellite visibility criteria The selected satellites are dynamically and on the fly exchanged as soon as an exchange of satellites is necessary The satellites parameters displayed in the Satellite Config urations dialog and the Navigation Message parameters are read only Open the Real Time S P O T display to show the position of the active and inac tive satellites The current values of the parameters PDOP HDOP Receiver Location and simulation Time are also displayed If a moving receiver has been configured the R
365. o chapter 2 10 9 Generating Multipath Scenarios on page 40 Open the Real Time S P O T display to show the position of the active and inac tive satellites The current values of the parameters PDOP HDOP Receiver Location and simulation Time are also displayed If a moving receiver has been configured the Real Time S P O T gt Map View displays the trajectory the receiver should have 5 To trigger a manual satellite s exchange for Sat 3 for instance select GNSS Main Dialog gt Satellite Configuration gt Sat 3 gt State gt Off 6 Select Satellite Configuration gt Sat 3 gt Navigation Message and adjust the parameters as required 7 Enable the satellite again or add a new satellite to the satellite s constellation The Real Time S P O T displays the updated position of the active and inactive satellites 2 10 5 Generating A GPS Custom Build Scenarios User Localization Mode This description lists the steps necessary to configure an A GPS custom build scenario and explains the configuration in principle The required steps for the other assisted scenarios are analogical 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 according to General Workflow 2 Select GNSS Main Dialog gt Simulation Mode gt User Localization 3 Perform steps 6 to 19 from from General Workflow Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 37 Satellite Navigation General Description Typical Realtime Workflow a Itis recommended to select a RIN
366. o the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S SMBV is not included in the option manuals Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 9 Satellite Navigation Preface OJ s 1 2 Typographical Conventions Service Manual The Service Manual is available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications on instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimina tion It contains all information required for repairing the instrument by the replacement of modules This manual can also be orderd in printed form see ordering information in the data sheet Release Notes The release notes describe new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The current release notes are provided in the Internet Web Helps Web helps are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The content of the web helps correspond to the user manuals for the latest product ver sions The web help is an additional file format that offers quick online access They are not intended to be downloaded but rather to access the required information directly form the R amp S website Web helps are available at the R am
367. oatellite Navigation Digital Standards for R amp S9SMBV and R amp S9WinIQSIM2 V Operating Manual LOS Ant pat loss e LOS Echoes e LOS Echoes Ant Pat loss E Echoes OG Obscured inactive III 1173 1427 12 08 ET o e 3 D oO o tn o m Operating Manual Test amp M This document describes the software options for satellite navigation GPS Assisted GPS GPS P Code Galileo Assisted Galileo GLONASS Assisted GLONASS COMPASS BeiDou Enh GNSS and GNSS Extensions incl Extension to 12 and 24 Satellites Obscuration Simulation and Automatic Multipath Antenna Pattern Spinning and Attitude Simulation Described are the following software options e R amp S SMBV K44 K244 K65 K266 K66 K67 K91 K92 K93 K94 K294 K95 K96 K101 K102 K103 K107 1415 8060 xx 1415 8260 02 1415 8560 xx 1415 8590 02 1415 8683 xx 1419 2509 xx 1415 8577 xx 1415 8583 xx 1415 8660 xx 1415 8677 xx 1415 8690 02 1419 2521 xx 1415 8790 xx 1415 8802 xx 1415 8819 xx 1415 8825 xx 1419 2709 xx e R amp S AMU K244 K266 K294 1402 7902 02 1403 0976 02 1403 0953 02 e R amp SYAFQ K244 K266 K294 1401 6454 02 1415 0330 02 1415 0318 02 e R amp S SMJ K244 K266 K294 1409 0810 02 1409 3502 02 1409 3483 02 e R amp S SMU K244 K266 K294 1408 5818 02 1408 8630 02 1408 8617 02 e R amp S9SMW K244 K266 K294 1413 4880 02 1413 7015 02 1413 7067 02 R amp S SFU K244 2115 2250 02 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH
368. ollDot gt lt YawDotDot gt lt PitchDotDot gt lt RollDotDot gt lt YawDotDotDot gt lt PitchDotDotDot gt lt RollDotDotDot gt Sets hardware in loop position of third order GEOD NED dynamics and attitude The yaw heading pitch elevation roll bank rotation angles and their derivatives are obtained by rotating the body XYZ frame starting from an aligned state with the local NED frame by a sequence of three consecutive Euler rotations about z axis then y axis and then x axis The attitude parameters Yaw Pitch Roll RDot etc are optional Table 4 6 Parameter description Parameter Description Default unit Latitude Geodetic location degrees Longitude Altitude lt NDot gt lt EDot gt lt DDot gt equivalently Vn Ve Vd Velocity vector in the North East meters Down NED coordinate system second lt NDotDot gt lt EDotDot gt equivalently An Ae Ad Acceleration vector in NED meters lt DDotDot gt second 2 lt NDotDotDot gt equivalently Jn Je Jd Jerk vector in NED meters lt EDotDotDot gt second 3 DDotDotDot lt Roll gt lt Pitch gt attitude angles yaw heading pitch elevation roll bank radians lt Yaw gt unlimited value range to simulate more that one cycle rota tion between two updates Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 191 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands 4 8 GNSS System Configuration Parameter Des
369. on Moscow Munich Paris Selects one of the predefined fixed geographic locations The parameters Latitude Longitude and Altitude are set according to the selected position Example See example Selecting a waypoint file on page 169 Manual operation See Geographic Location Attitude on page 69 lt subsystem gt LOCation WAYPoints FILE lt WayPoints gt Selects a predefind waypoint file A waypoint file must have the extension txt nmea or xtd This setting is only available if lt subsystem gt LOCation SELect is set to Waypoints Parameters lt WayPoints gt string Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 170 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a Localization Data Example See example Selecting a waypoint file on page 169 Options R amp S SMBV K92 Manual operation See Waypoint Attitude File on page 70 lt subsystem gt LOCation WAYPoints ROMode lt RoMode gt Defines the way the waypoint file is to be read This setting is only available if lt subsystem gt LOCation SELect is set to Waypoints Parameters lt RoMode gt CYCLic RTRip OWAY CYCLic The waypoint file is read out cyclic Using this read out mode is only recommended for waypoint files that describe a circle moving scenario or moving scenario in which the start and the end point are close to each
370. on TCONversion GLONass WNOT lt Whnot gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GPS WNOT lt Whnot gt For lt subsystem gt SMODe STATic or USER defines the UTC data reference week number WN Parameters lt Wnot gt integer Range 0 to 255 Increment 1 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the time conversion and leap sec onds settings on page 201 Manual operation See Time Conversion Parameters on page 90 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 203 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands n Time Conversion Configuration lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion UTCSu AONE A 1 Defines the 15 order term of polynomial A4 Parameters A 1 integer Range 512 to 511 Increment 1 RST 0 Options R amp S SMx AMU K294 R amp S SMBV K94 Manual operation See UTC UTC SU on page 91 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion UTCSu AZERo lt A_0 gt Defines the constant term of polynomial Ao Parameters lt A_0 gt integer Range 1024 to 1023 Increment 1 RST 0 Options R amp S SMx AMU K294 R amp S SMBV K94 Manual operation See UTC UTC SU on page 91 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion UTCSu DATE Enters the date for the UTC UTC SU data in DMS format Return values lt Year gt integer Range 1996 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt
371. on for Spinning and Attitude Simulation R amp S SMBV K103 This option requires the GNSS option R amp S SMBV K102 This option allows you to configure a vehicle attitude or the body rotation parameters yaw pitch and roll The R amp S SMBV calculates the power and the carrier phase response of a specific satellite or a multipath reflection at a specific angle of arrival AoA The calculation is based on the defined attitude profile and the selected antenna pattern The firmware updates the powers and carrier phase offsets of all satellite sig nals in real time and with an update rate of 800 Hz In a real word scenario a receiver placed in an airplane may not always receive the signal of all theoretically visible satellites at its current position Depending on the ori entation of the vehicle several satellites may be partly or completely obscured The orientation of the vehicle is described with the three flight dynamics parameters the yaw heading pitch elevation and roll bank see figure 2 4 With enabled spinning the instrument additionally simulates a constant rate of change of the roll Fig 2 4 Flight dynamics parameters yaw heading pitch elevation and roll bank Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 33 Realtime Test Setups 2 9 Realtime Test Setups 2 9 1 Example of A GPS Test Setup Assistance Data R amp S SMBV Protocol Tester RF Out Control Data GPS Receiver RF input Fi
372. on gives an overview of the options Assisted GPS R amp S SMBV K65 Assis ted Galileo R amp S SMBV K67 and Assisted GLONASS R amp S SMBV K95 e The option Assisted GPS R amp S SMBV K65 is only available for instruments equip ped with option GPS R amp S SMBV K44 It enhances the basic option with function ality required for A GPS A GNSS test scenarios for 3GPP FDD GSM and EUTRA LTE e The option Assisted Galileo R amp S SMBV K67 is only available for instruments equipped with option Galileo R amp S SMBV K66 It enhances the basic option with functionality to generate user defined test scenarios The option Assisted GLONASS R amp S SMBV K95 is only available for instruments equipped with option GLONASS R amp S SMBV K94 It enhances the basic option with functionality required for A GLONASS A GNSS test scenarios for 3GPP FDD and EUTRA LTE Support of RINEX files Additionally to the almanac files a Receiver Independent Exchange Format RINEX files are supported RINEX files are very well known and are standard formats gener ated by Control Stations CS and many commercial receivers RINEX Navigation Files usually comprise the ephemeris sets for several satellites with different TOE and TOC Hence only one RINEX File is enough to describe satellite orbits for a period longer than 2 hours and sometimes up to 1 day Current RINEX files can be downloaded via the Internet and stored on the hard disk of the instrument e g ht
373. onal Powertapy 115 dBm 0 dB 115 dBm e Absolute Powergaws r c a Ref Power Powersags pc Additional Powertapy 115 dBm 5 39 dB 120 39 dBm e Absolute Powergaty4 cia Ref Power Powersaga cia Additional Power 115 dBm 2 14 dB 117 14 dBm Open the Real Time SPOT dialog set the Display Type to Power View and com pare the displayed power levels EH GPS Real Time S DOT Display Type Power View v Real Time Information Time UTC 07 11 2010 17 03 51 000 Rec Loc 37 81636 S 144 96644 E 100 0m Rec Att R 0 000 P 0 000 Y 0 000 HDOP PDOP 1 00 1 00 E a ie 2 o o a c Space Vehicles Standard Accuracy Echoes Position Accuracy The power level are displayed sorted per navigation standard and in ascending order of the SV ID Power Mode Determines whether the power is calculated automatically or is based on user defined settings Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 98 Satellite Navigation User Interface Satellite Configuration User power mode is intended for dynamical configuration of the power of each satellite separately and manually Auto power mode enables an internal dynamical automatic power control The power of all satellites is calculated automatically based on the satellite to receiver distance and relative to the relative power of the reference satellite The Reference Satellite is simulated as relative O dB at the start reference rece
374. oo If required re configure the automatically applied settings The instrument decodes the complete NMEA file but settings related to deactivated or not installed navigation standards are ignored Refer to chapter A 3 NMEA Scenarios on page 306 for detailed description of the NMEA file format 2 10 14 Creating GNSS Scenarios in a User Environment The R amp S SMBV provides predefined files and settings to simplify the configuration of common scenarios If you relay on the predefined files it is recommended that you use the combinations listed in table 2 10 Table 2 10 Suitable configurations Scenario Vehicle Predefined Vehicle Waypoint File Obscura Antenna Pattern Body Type Description File tion amp Auto Multi Mask File path Type Urban Canyon Pedestrian Pedestrian1 xvd Scen Urban Can Urban Canyon Car Medium Land Vehicle Land Vehicle1 xvd Yor_1 txt Car Medium OpenRoof SUV VAN City Block Pedestrian Pedestrian1 xvd Scen City Block txt City Block Car Medium Land Vehicle Land Vehicle1 xvd Car Medium OpenRoof SUV VAN Suburban Pedestrian Pedestrian1 xvd Scen Circle 5km txt Suburban Area Car Medium Land Vehicle Land Vehicle1 xvd Car Medium OpenRoof SUV VAN Highway Cutting Land Vehicle Land Vehicle1 xvd Scen Circle 5km txt Highway Car Medium Cutting Car Medium OpenRoof SUV lt gt z Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 44 Satellite Navigation Gen
375. operating conditions 2 Select the required RF Band 3 Select an arbitrary data or Real Navigation Data as Data Source 4 When using Real Navigation Data use the Almanac Almanac File function and choose an almanac file The navigation message will be automatically formed to be conforming to this almanac file Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 53 Satellite Navigation General Description pem M MHEEERER UEU P Functional Overview of the Basic Offline GNSS 5 Adjust the Oversampling parameter to increase or decrease the sample rate used to generate the GNSS Satellite Signal 6 Adjust the Duration of Satellites Simulation 7 Adjust the date and the simulation time GNSS Mean Time 8 Select Satellite Configurations and configure the satellite as required e g Space Vehicle ID SV ID and Doppler Shift For disabled Real Time Navigation Message the Initial Code Phase and the Frequency Number of the GLONASS satellites can be configured Tip For Galileo satellites enable BOC 1 1 modulation instead of CBOC 6 1 to reduce the sample rate required to simulate a certain period of time 9 Set State gt ON to enable the GNSS Satellite signal generation 10 Select the Generate Waveform File to save the GNSS Satellite signal to a wave form file 2 12 2
376. operation See Running Stopped on page 147 subsystem TRIGger ARM EXECute Stops signal generation for trigger modes Armed Auto and Armed Retrigger A subsequent internal or external trigger event restarts signal generation Example BB GPS TRIG SOUR INT sets internal triggering BB GPS TRIG SEQ ARET sets Armed Retrigger mode i e every trigger event causes sig nal generation to restart BB GPS TRIG EXEC executes a trigger signal generation is started BB GPS TRIG ARM EXEC signal generation is stopped BB GPS TRIG EXEC executes a trigger signal generation is started again Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 283 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands d Ge Trigger Settings Usage Event Manual operation See Arm on page 62 subsystem TRIGger EXECute Executes a trigger The internal trigger source must be selected using the command subsystem TRIG SOUR INT anda trigger mode other than AUTO must be selected using the command subsystem TRIG SEQ Example BB GPS TRIG SOUR INT sets internal triggering BB GPS TRIG SEQ ARET sets Armed Retrigger mode i e every trigger event causes signal generation to restart BB GPS TRIG EXEC executes a trigger signal generation is started BB GPS TRIG ARM EXEC sign
377. ory can be observed in the Map View on the Real Time S P O T display Cyclic The waypoint file is read out cyclic Using this read out mode is only recommended for waypoint files that describe a circle moving scenario or moving scenario in which the start and the end point are close to each other One Way The file is read out only once By reaching the end of the file the last described position is assumed to be a static one Round Trip By reaching the end of the file the file is read out backwards Remote command subsystem LOCation WAYPoints ROMode on page 171 Location Coordinates In the ECEF WGS84 coordinate system a geographic location is identified by three coordinates the altitude latitude and longitude The last two can be displayed in deci mal or DMS format The display format is determined by the parameter Position For mat Parameter Description Position Format Sets the format in which the Latitude and Longitude are displayed e DEG MIN SEC The display format is Degree Minute Second and Direction i e XX XX XX XX Direction where direction can be North South and East West e Decimal Degree The display format is decimal degree i e XX XXXXX where indicates North and East and indicates South and West Altitude Sets the geographic altitude of the reference location in meters above sea level The simulated altitude is the height above the ellipsoid HAE altitude Latit
378. ote control program an instrument p reset is recom mended to set the R amp S SMBV to a definite state The commands RST and SYSTem PRESet are equivalent for this purpose CLS also resets the status registers and clears the output buffer In all of the examples we assume that a remote PC is connected to the instrument the remote PC and the instrument are switched on and a connection between them is established Primary Settings The following examples use GPS entry standard Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 157 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands URE E Primary Settings Example Save Recall Files with user settings This example shows how to query and load settings files stored with the save recall function ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ckckck SOURCel BB GPS SETTings CATalog var user settings Response gps settings settings SOURCel BB GLONass SETTings CATalog var user settings Response glo settings settings SOURCel BB GALileo SETTings CATalog var user settings Response gal settings There are five files in the var user settings directory gps settings gps settings gps glo settings glonass settings glonass and gal settings galileo SOURcel BB GPS SETTings STORe var user settings gps settings new SOURcel BB GPS SETTings LO
379. ource the clock type The buttons in the last section lead to the submenu for general trigger clock and map ping settings Sync Mode None Clock Source extemal Clock Mode muttiple Sample Chip Clock Multiplier Measured External Clock Global Trigger Clock Settings Trigger In The Trigger In section is where the trigger for the signal is set Various parameters will be provided for the settings depending on which trigger source internal or exter nal is selected The current status of signal generation Running or Stopped is indicated for all trigger modes Trigger Mode Selects trigger mode The trigger mode determines the effect of a trigger on the signal generation Auto The signal is generated continuously Retrigger The signal is generated continuously A trigger event internal or external causes a restart Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 146 Satellite Navigation User Interface oOMR M RMEE Trigger Marker Clock Settings Armed Auto The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs Then the signal is generated continuously Button Arm stops signal generation A subsequent trigger event internal with Execute Trigger or external causes a restart Armed Ret The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs Then the rigger signal is generated conti
380. p S website on the R amp S SMBV product page at the Downloads Web Help area Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 10 Satellite Navigation General Description 2 General Description The global navigation satellite system GNSS employs the radio signals of several navigation standards like GPS Galileo GLONASS BeiDou etc For several years GPS used to be the only standard available for civilian navigation through its C A civil ian code Nowadays the GNSS signals and systems are undergoing fast development some systems are getting modernized and some are completely new In the foreseea ble future several more GNSS satellites utilizing more and new frequency will be avail able Differences between
381. page 23 2 7 Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Antenna Pattern R amp S SMBV K102 This option requires one of the basic realtime GNSS options R amp S SMBV K44 R amp S SMBV K66 R amp S SMBV K94 or R amp S SMBV K107 This option enhances the basic options with the definition of different antenna patterns body masks and the simulation of real life scenarios like a GNSS antenna placed in a car see table 2 9 The instrument provides an interface for loading user defined antenna patterns The antenna patterns have to be defined in files with predefined file format and file extension ant pat seechapter A 1 3 Antenna Pattern Body Mask Files on page 301 Possible application fields This option enables you to automatically simulate satellite power and carrier phase depending on the antenna pattern and the attitude parameters e Automotive applications The provided attitude parameters can forced to the motion direction i e they are automatically extracted from the user defined motion vector e Body mask applications Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 31 Satellite Navigation General Description Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Antenna Pattern R amp S SMBV K102 Two files describe an antenna the antenna pattern ant pat file and the phase response phase file Both files must have the same file name and must be stored in the same directory The ant pat file describes the power response matrix of each ant
382. parameters effective loniza lt subsystem gt ATMospheric tion level 15 3 order of the satellite s GALileo IONospheric AI ch0 navigation message on page 252 SE 1 SF 5 Displays the parameters ionospheric dis subsystem ATMospheric turbance flag for region 1 to 5 of the sat GaLileo IONospheric SF lt ch gt ellite s navigation message on page 253 3 9 Satellites Power Tuning D The parameters of Power Tuning are only configurable for R amp S SMBV instruments To access this dialog 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 113 Satellite Navigation User Interface Satellites Power Tuning 2 Select Satellite Configuration Satellites Power Tuning EE GPS Satellites Power Tuning iol xl GPS Intra Standard Tuning Set To 0 Set To Standard C A P 3 00 dB Inter Standard Tuning samo GPS C A GALILEO E1 DEF 1 25uB gt GPS C A GLONASS R C A 2 50 46 gt GPS C A BeiDou GEO R C A 450 08 z GPS C A BeiDou MEO R C A 450 08 z GPS C A BeiDou GSO R C A 450 08 z The Satellite Power Tuning dialog comprises the setting for inter standard power relations and the power relation between the signals of a specific GNSS standard The inter standard parameters are required for the configuration of the nominal power difference between the different navigation standards These parameters
383. path Settings 0 3 3 1 The Obscuration and Auto Multipath dialog is available for instrument equipped with the additional option R amp S SMBV K101 To access this settings 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS 2 Select Simulation Mode gt Auto Localization User Localization 3 Select User Environment gt Obscuration and Auto Multipath The provided settings enables you to select a predefined near environmental model or to customize the model as required Most oft the user defined models are created in table form where each row corresponds to a object that causes obscu ration reflection of the signal and or multipath effects The configured objects are displayed on a graphical view with selectable orientation Each object is identified on the graphical view with its row index To simplify and accelerate the configuration the instrument provides e a subset of predefined but customizable user environment models like suburban area urban canyon tunnel bridge highway etc that can be used directly or as basis for further configurations e aninterface for loading of generated files or storing current configurations into files see Obstacles File on page 78 or Planes File on page 81 e aswell as setting for joint obstacle s configuration like defining of a subset of obstacles and automatically repeating the configured subset see Repetition Win dow on page 80 Visualizing the obscured sat
384. path Taps Table Sets an additional delay of the selected satellite used to simulate multipath conditions Remote command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh TAP us TSHift on page 209 Power Multipath Taps Table Sets the additional power of the satellite in dB used to simulate multipath conditions Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 129 Satellite Navigation User Interface 8 Assistance Data Generation See chapter 3 6 1 Power Configuration on page 92 for information about the power calculation Remote command subsystem SVID ch GNSS MPATh TAP lt us gt POWer on page 209 Doppler Shift Hz Multipath Taps Table Enters the additional Doppler shift of the simulated signal of the satellite used to simu late multipath conditions Remote command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh TAP lt us gt DSHift on page 208 Carrier Phase rad Multipath Taps Table Sets the carrier phase used in case of multipath simulation Remote command lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt MPATh TAP lt us gt CPHase on page 208 3 12 Assistance Data Generation The Assistance Data Generation dialog is available for instrument equipped with the basic BeiDou option R amp S SMBV K107 or one of options for assisted satellite naviga tion e g A GPS R amp S SMBV K6
385. r Location Displays the current location of the receiver in decimal format For static Geographic Location Attitude the Receiver Location is as selected in the Localization Data dialog For moving receivers however the receiver position specified in the Localization Data section of the main dialog is the initial location of the receiver The current receiver location is retrieved from the waypoints file as function of the simulation Time and displayed in the Real Time S P O T gt Map View display Remote command n a Receiver Attitude Displays the current receiver attitude parameters yaw heading pitch elevation roll bank in degrees The initial receiver attitude parameters are selected in the Localization Data dialog Remote command lt subsystem gt RT RATTitude on page 280 HDOP PDOP Displays the current HDOP and PDOP value of the selected satellite constellation The HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision can be used as an indication of 2D posi tioning quality The PDOP Position Dilution of Precision can be used as an indication of 3D positioning quality The general rule here is that the smaller the HDOP and PDOP are the better the preci sion of the position fix will be Remote command Ila Next Constellation Change enabled for Auto Localization mode Displays the expected date and time of the upcoming satellites handover Remote command subsystem SPOT NHOTime on page 269 Referen
386. r Phase on page 108 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PCRate Queries the currently valid values for the chip rate of the P code Return values lt PCRate gt float Usage Query only Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 216 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings Options R amp S SMBV K93 Manual operation See Resulting P Code Chip Rate on page 109 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt MODulation Modulation Defines the modulation used for modulating the carrier signal Parameters Modulation BPSK CBOC RST BPSK Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Modulation on page 106 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt ORBit lt OrbitType gt enabled for BeiDou satellites only For BeiDou satellites querries the orbit type the corresponding satellite is using Parameters lt OrbitType gt MEO IGSO GEO RST GEO Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Manual operation See Orbit Type on page 106 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt PRANge lt Pseudorange gt For lt subsystem gt SMODe STATic defines the propagation delay from satellite to receiver in meters Parameters lt Pseudorange gt float Range 0 to 2 499E6 1 023E6 SPEED OF LIGHT Increment 0 001 RST 0 Default unit m Example See example Configuring the satell
387. rameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Options R amp S SMBV K65 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORection AF lt gr0 gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection AF lt gr0 gt lt Af gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection AF lt gr0 gt lt Af gt Defines the clock correction parameters a f2 a f1 a fO Suffix lt gr0 gt 0 1 2 Parameters Af integer Value range GPS parameters a f2 2 to 27 1 a f1 215 to 279 1 a fO 2 to 21 1 Value range BeiDou parameters a_f2 210 to 210 1 a f1 2 to 221 1 a f0 2 to 223 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 231 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands I u U Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us CCORection TGD subsystem SVID ch BElDou NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TGD lt Tgd gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection TGD lt Tgd gt Defines the L1 L2 correction term Parameters lt Tgd gt integer GPS parameter Range 128 to 127 Increment 1 RST 0 lt Tgd gt integer BeiDou parameter Range 512 to 511 Increment 1 RST 0 Example SOURce1 BB GPS SVID1 GPS NMESsage PAGEL CCORrection TGD 10 l
388. ration See Simulation Mode on page 60 SOURce lt hw gt BB GPS ATSCenario Scenario Selects the file with the predefined A GPS A GNSS test scenario Table 4 1 A GPS test scenarios Test Scenario SCPI 3GPP TS 51 010 10 9 Signaling GSMSIG 3GPP TS 51 010 10 10 Performance 1 2 3 GSMPER1 GSMPER2 GSMPER3 3GPP TS 34 108 10 7 Signaling W3GSIG 3GPP TS 34 108 10 1 2 Performance 1 2 3 W3GPER1 W3GPER2 W3GPER3 3GPP2 C S0036 2 1 1 Stationary W3G2M 3GPP2 C S0036 2 1 2 Moving W3G2S 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S7 Signaling ST1 LTESIGST1 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 1 2 5 ST1 LTEPERIST1 LTEPER2ST1 LTEPERSST1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 160 Satellite Navigation El Table 4 2 A GNSS test scenarios Remote Control Commands Primary Settings Test Scenario SCPI 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S6 Signaling ST4 W3GSIGST4 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 1 2 5 ST4 W3GPER1ST4 W3GPER2ST4 W3GPER5ST4 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S7 Signaling ST4 LTESIGST4 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 1 2 5 ST5 LTEPERIST5 LTEPER2ST5 LTEPER5ST5 Parameters Scenario USER GSMSIG GSMPER1 GSMPER2 GSMPER3 W3GSIG W3GPER1 W3GPER2 W3GPER3 W3G2S W3G2M W3GSIGSTA W3GPER1ST4 W3GPER2STA WS3GPERSSTA LTESIGST1 LTESIGST4 LTEPER1ST1 LTEPER1ST5 LTEPER2ST1 LTEPER2ST5 LTEPERSSTI LTEPER5ST5 User No predefined test scenario is selected RST U
389. ration GSR PLOSS ener ennt nnenes intense enne nnns 188 ubevetemz OBGCuration GSbGTvbe sett ns ennt s nnns a aiad ennt 187 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration PMODel e ubevstemz OBGCuration RP CATaloo PhREDetned enne 183 subsystem OBSOCuration RPL CATalog USERQ sss eene tenerent nnne n rnnt rennes nenne 183 subsystem OBSOCuration RPL FILE sees nnne rennen rennes sense aiiin 183 lt subsystem gt OBS Curation RPL IL ENG 184 ubevstemz OBGCuraton RP ROEtserHEIGht eene eene nnne nnne nnne nnn 184 eubevstemz OBGCuraton RP PRWINdow ters senrs etse tense 184 ubevstemz OBGCuraton RP PRuWWlNdow GTATe eene eene nnne enters nennen nennt enn 184 lt subsystem gt OBS Curation TYPE cick ideae nderit E ta deed o ce EE gna ce a cce oe ga p va pee ud 181 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration VOBS CATalog PREDefined 183 subsystem OBSOCuration VOBS CATalog USER sessi trennen 183 subsystem OBSCuration VOBS FILEE 2 2 proie dia aigu pd deb Un CH e dae up db sesam 183 subsystem OBSOCuration VOBS ROFFset HEIGht sess nnne 182 ubevstemz OBGCuration VOBGROFtserMOhRientation enne 182 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration VOBS ROFFSet X nenne nnne ee nenrn en rnnr enn rnnr enne 182 subsystem OBSOCuration VOBS ROFFset Y sss eene nnne renes eneren nene sne 182 lt SubsysStem gt P DOP ce
390. rnal AINTernal INTernal The internal clock reference is used to generate the chip clock 1 023 MHz EXTernal The external clock reference is supplied to the CLOCK connec tor RST INTernal Example BB GPS CLOC SOUR EXT selects an external clock reference The clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector BB GPS CLOC MODE CHIP specifies that a chip clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector Manual operation See Clock Source on page 152 subsystem CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute Performs automatically adjustment of the instrument s settings required for the selected synchronization mode Usage Event Manual operation See Set Synchronization Settings on page 152 subsystem CLOCk SYNChronization MODE Mode Selects the synchronization mode This parameter is used to enable generation of very precise synchronous signals from several connected R amp S SMBVs Note If several instruments are connected the connecting cables from the master instrument to the slave and between each two consecutive slave instruments must have the same length and type Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 291 Parameters Mode Example Manual operation Clock Settings NONE MASTer SLAVe NONE The instrument is working in stand alone mode MASTer The instrument synchronizes all connected instruments includ ing the trigger and reference clock signals SLAVe
391. rrent Range without Recalculation 151 Custom build scenarios rnnrrorrrrnrnnnnnvrrnnrrnrnnnnnnvrnennnnnnnnn 22 Cutting How to simulate rrrnrrrrrnrnrrnnnnvrrrnrrnrrrnnvnvrensnnrsnnnnrnnr 44 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 320 Satellite Navigation Index D Data format Assistance data 134 Data SOURCE E 65 Date 2 Def ult s ttings Hinis 3 reel e 57 Delete GPS settings AA 57 delta N Delta TAU di iiir ert Ee teret IBI IER Direction axis Display Type RR T Distance Reference Satellite 5 5 ne ne 100 Documentation Overview rrrrrrnnrnnnnnvrrvrenrrrnsnnnrrnnsnrnrrnnnnr 9 Doppler Shift eter ert ri reete eet 108 Duration of Simulation sssssssss 61 163 164 E Exchange of satellites AAA 16 Execute Trigger EE 62 148 F File Antenna pattern uio erre trt terret e 64 Body mask 64 Roadside Planes 81 Vertical obstacles 18 Fix marker delay to current range Frequency number GLONASS satellite sssssssssseesse 105 Full obscuration Reference suo e etit eege eege 83 mr RR 83 G Galileo Sat Modulation rrrrrrrnnrrrrrrrnrronnnnrrrnnrnnnnnnvnnneer 100 GAMMA n a f1 126 245 Generate Acquisition File eeseeeseeessess 138 Generate Almanac File 134 Generate lonospheric File Generate
392. rvation data file naviga tion message file and meteorological data file The navigation RINEX files comprises the Ephemeris information of all visible satellites at a control station or a commercial receiver Each file type consists of a header section and a data section The header section con tains global information for the entire file and is placed at the beginning of the file The format of the data records of the RINEX navigation message files may contain naviga tion messages of more than one satellite system GPS GLONASS Galileo etc See RINEX Format Description for description of the RINEX file format RINEX Navigation Files can be downloaded from http cddis gsfc nasa gov gnss data sum html brdc Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 303 Satellite Navigation Annex E I R 1 X J J T sn RINEX Files A 2 1 RINEX Format Description Records marked with are optional Table 1 5 Navigation message file header section description HEADER LABEL Col DESCRIPTION FORMAT umns 61 80 RINEX VERSION TYPE e Format version 2 16 14X A1 19X e File type N for Navigation data PGM RUN BY DATE e Name of program creating current A20 A20 A20 file e Name of agency creating current file e Date of file creation i COMMENT Comment line s A60 ION ALPHA lonosphere parameters A0 A3 of alma 2X 4D12 4 nac pag
393. s CRC on page 234 C rs Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Orbit Radius lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CRS on page 234 C ic Amplitude of the Cosine Harmonic Correc tion Term to the Angle of Inclination lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIC on page 233 C_is Amplitude of the Sine Harmonic Correction Term to the Angle of Inclination 1 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris CIS on page 233 TOE Time Of Ephemeris lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TOE on page 241 As this parameter affects the satellite s orbit the value selected here also has an impact on the satellite s parameters Time Shift Doppler Shift and Duration Eleva tion gt 2 5 5 7 5 10 The value of these parameters will be upda ted automatically PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 120 Satellite Navigation User Interface GPS and BeiDou Ephemeris Parameters The ephemeris parameters correspond to the SV ID and navigation standard displayed with the parameter SV ID Standard and to the navigation page determined by the Current Page Index Table 3 12 GPS and BeiDou Ephemeris Parameters Navigation Message Configuration Parameter Description SCPI command
394. s IODNav lt lodnav gt Issue Of Data Ephemeris and Clock correction Parameters lt lodnav gt integer Range 0 to 1023 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo Ephemeris Parameters on page 122 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo subsystem SVID ch BElDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo Izero subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo Izero subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IZERo Izero Inclination Angle at Reference Time Parameters lt lzero gt integer Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Increment 1 RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 237 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands O 4 C m S A DPERR ERN UN QT Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris LTPData lt LtpData gt Use of carrier L2 P data flag This value does not have an impact on whether data is really transmitted on the satel lite s carrier L2 or not Parameters lt LtpData gt 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Manual operation See GPS Ephemeris Parameters on page 121 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris MZERo lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris MZERo lt MZero gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALi
395. s of SV IDs that are not included in the RINEX file are retrieved from the almanac of the corresponding GNSS Enable the Update UTC and Atmospheric Parameters to synchronize the time con version parameters and the atmospheric parameters to the corresponding values retrieved from the RINEX file Enable the Update Frequency Number GLONASS to extract the frequency number allocations from the RINEX file See also e chapter A 2 RINEX Files on page 303 for description of the RINEX file format e chapter 2 10 11 Configuring the Navigation Parameters on page 41 Remote command subsystem subsystem subsystem subsystem subsystem Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 NAVigation NAVigation NAVigation NAVigation NAVigation 08 RINex RINex RINex RINex RINex DESS SEL E on page 199 GPS STATe on page 200 IMPort on page 200 UUAState on page 200 UFNState on page 200 88 Satellite Navigation User Interface Time Conversion Configuration 3 5 Time Conversion Configuration To access this settings 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS 2 Select Localization Data gt Time Convertion Configuration This dialog provides the settings necessary to configure the time conversion from a navigation standard GPS Galileo GLONASS or BeiDou to UTC The conversion settings are necessary for switching from one time basis to another amp GPS Time Conversion
396. s permittivity conductivity or power loss characteristic Insert Left Right Delete Undo All Save Obstacles Configuration Table Standard functions for adding appending and removing table rows undo and save changes Roadside Planes Settings This model is enabled in instrument equipped with option R amp S SMBV K92 This section comprises the parameters necessary to configure a near environmental model for simulation of obscurations and multipath effects that a moving receiver expe riences while moving on a road surrounded by buildings or other objects Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 79 Satellite Navigation User Interface Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings The vertical roadside planes are defined alongside the road and parallel to the motion direction of the moving receiver A maximum of two vertical planes at max left and right are considered based on current user mileage Examples of predefined environ ment based on roadside planes are Suburban Area Highway and Cutting L i GPS Obscuration and Auto Multipath Type fSuburbanaea zl ear Environment Roadside Planes v Physical Model Obscuration amp Multipath zl Receiver Height Offset 20m d IV Repetition Window osoofm zl Set Length to Infinite T On Planes File Suburban_1 View Type Height vs Position v 25 20 Height m 0 0 05 0 1 0 15 0 2 0 25 0 3 0 35 0 4 0 45 0 5 0 55 0 65 0 7 0 75 0 8 0 85 0 9 0 95 1 1
397. s yaw pitch roll in degrees for the selected moment of time Query parameters lt TimeBasis gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC lt Year gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 280 S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands Day integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Hour integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 Minutes integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 Seconds float required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 lt WeekNumber gt integer required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 529947 Increment 1 lt TimeOfWeek gt float required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 Return values lt Yaw gt float Range 3 14 to 3 14 Increment 0 01 RST 0 lt Pitch gt float Range 3 14 to 3 14 Increment 0 01 RST 0 lt Roll gt float Range 3 14 to 3 14 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands O QIM JVe Re 4 19 Trigger Settings Example SOURce1 BB GPS SMODe AUTO SOURCe1 BB GPS RATTitude GPS 1609 61455 Response 0 10 0 00 1 00 The current receiver attitude parame
398. sage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris NDELta i ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG NME GesaoelPDAGE us JTEPHemerte ODOT ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG NME GeaoelPDAGE us JEbHemerte OMEGa eenen ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG NME GeaoelbDAGE us JEbHemerte OZERo suse ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG NME GeaoelPDAGE us JEbHemerte GOHA een subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE sss ubevstemz GVlD zchz OGNGG NME GsaoelbAGE us TEbemerte UpnA lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt POWED eee EAEE INEN ENR rea daii aa subsystem SVID ch GNSS SIGNAal sse eene nennen rehenes nnne e entre nennen subsystem SVID ch BEIDou LIST ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIDouMPAThGSTATe eene enne enhn enne nennt nennen nne Subevstemz GVlD zchz BEIDouMPDATTAR COUN ennemi subsystem GVlD zchz BEIDouMbPDAThTAbauszChtaee enne nennen tene Subevstemz GVlD zchz BEIDouMbPDATh Abus DH lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou MPATh TAP lt uUs gt POWED enne enne nennen Subevstemz GVlD zchz BEIDouMbPAThTAbausz TH ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIDouNME Gsaoe PDAGECOUN eene ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIlDouNMtE Gsaoe PE Get lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PROJect subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage RTPRojection essent subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection AF oz 231 ubevstemz GVlD chz BEIDouNME Gsaoe
399. scured area zones Return values lt AreasCount gt integer Range 0 to 50 Increment 1 RST 0 Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Usage Query only Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Full Obscuration Configuration Table on page 83 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL AREA APPend lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL AREA lt ch gt INSert lt subsystem gt OBSCuration FULL AREA lt ch gt DELete Appends inserts or deletes an obscured zone Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Usage Event Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Full Obscuration Configuration Table on page 83 subsystem OBSCuration FULL AREA ch REFerence Reference Defines the reference starting position in km or time stamp in s of a specific obscured zone Suffix ch 1 to 50 Use the command subsystem OBSCuration FULL AREA COUNt to define the number of the obsured zones Parameters Reference float Range 0 to 1E4 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Example see example Defining a full obscuration environment on page 178 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 186 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Y A i Obscuration and Auto Multipath Manual operation See Full Obscuration Con
400. se EUTRA LTE Required SW Option 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S7 Signaling ST1 3GPP TS 37 571 2 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A GPS Signal ing scenario Subtest 1 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 1 ST1 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A GPS Per formance scenario 1 Subtest 1 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 2 ST1 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A GPS Per formance scenario 2 Subtest 1 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S7 Performance 5 ST1 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 7 A GPS Per formance scenario 5 Subtest 1 R amp S SMBV K44 K65 K92 The table 2 4 lists the currently supported predefined A GLONASS test scenarios Table 2 4 A GLONASS test scenarios overview Test Scenario Required for Test Case Required SW Option 3GPP FDD 3GPP TS 37 571 2 S6 Signaling ST1 3GPP TS 37 571 2 v 10 0 0 subclause 6 A Glonass Sig naling scenario Subtest 1 R amp S SMBV K94 K95 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 1 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 2 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 6 A Glonass Performance scenario 1 Subtest 1 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 6 A Glonass Performance scenario 2 Subtest 1 R amp S SMBV K94 K95 R amp S SMBV K94 K95 3GPP TS 37 571 1 S6 Performance 5 3GPP TS 37 571 1 v 10 0 0 subclause 6 A Glonass Performance scenario 5 Subtest 1 R amp S SMBV K94 K95 K
401. ses a restart RST PPS Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 PATT B000000011111111 15 Sets a bit pattern BB GPS TRIG OUTP1 MODE PATT activates the marker signal according to a bit pattern on output MARKER 1 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 150 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 287 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands EO EE J Marker Settings subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime lt OnTime gt lt subsystem gt TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt OFFTime lt OffTime gt Sets the number of chips in a period ON time OFF time during which the marker signal in setting subsystem TRIGger OUTPut MODE RATio on the marker out puts is OFF Parameters lt OffTime gt integer Range 1 to 2424 1 chips Increment 1 chip RST 1 Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 OFFT 200 sets an OFF time of 200 chips for marker signal 2 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 150 lt subsystem gt TRIGger OUTPut lt ch gt PATTern lt Pattern gt Defines the bit pattern used to generate the marker signal in the setting lt subsystem gt TRIGger OUTPut MODE PATTern 0 is marker off 1 is marker on Parameters lt Pattern gt 64 bit pattern Range B0 1 to B111 1 64 RST 4B0 1 Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 PATT B000000011111111 15 Sets a bit pattern BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 MODE PATT activates the marker signal according to a bit pat
402. sic GNSS options 2 1 4 Real time generation With the option R amp S SMBV K44 up to six GPS satellites transmitting L1 or L2 signals with C A code can be simulated in real time With the option R amp S SMBV K66 up to six Galileo satellites transmitting E1 signal can be simulated in real time With the option R amp S SMBV K94 up to six GLONASS satellites transmitting L1 or L2 signal can be simulated in real time With the option R amp S SMBV K107 up to six BeiDou satellites transmitting L1 or L2 sig nal can be simulated in real time 2 1 2 Multi satellite GNSS signal The instrument calculates a multi satellite GNSS signal in three different simulation modes the static mode the auto localization mode and the user localization mode In Static mode static satellites with constant Doppler shifts are provided for simple receiver test like receiver sensitivity acquisition and tracking test etc production tests Selection and configuration of any localization data such as receiver location for instance is not enabled The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 2 Generating GNSS Signal for Simple Receiver Tests Static Mode on page 36 The superposition signal of up to 6 dynamic satellites at a specific receiver location is generated in one of the localization modes The major difference to the static mode implies the possibility to specify the receiver s location Although both the localization Operating Manual
403. sistance data on page 253 Options R amp S SMBV K65 K67 K95 K107 Manual operation See Assistance Mode on page 132 subsystem ADGeneration BElDou SVID ch STATe State subsystem ADGeneration GALileo SVID ch STATe State lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass SVID lt ch gt STATe State lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS SVID lt ch gt STATe State Enables disables a space vehicle with the selected SV ID for generation of assistance data Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 259 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands H HA H T II Assistance Data Settings Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST OFF Example See example Generating of GPS assistance data on page 253 Manual operation See Space Vehicle State on page 132 subsystem ADGeneration BElDou LOCation COORdinates DECimal Longitude Latitude Altitude subsystem ADGeneration GALileo LOCation COORdinates DECimal Longitude Latitude Altitude lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GLONass LOCation COORdinates DECimal lt Longitude gt lt Latitude gt lt Altitude gt lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation COORdinates DECimal Longitude lt Latitude gt lt Altitude gt Sets the geographic reference location in decimal format Parameters lt Longitude gt float Range 180 to 180 Increment 1E 6 RST 0 lt L
404. stem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ZDN 250 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE COUNt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE COUNt lt NumberOfPages gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE COUNt lt NumberOfPages gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE COUNt lt NumberOfPages gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE COUNt lt NumberOfPages gt Number of navigation pages Several navigation pages are available per satellite If a RINEX file is used the value of this parameter is retrieved from the file A RINEX file may contain ephemeris information for up to 24 hours Since the ephemeris are updated every two hours the RINEX file contains a maximum number of 12 navigation pages This setting is only available for lt subsystem gt SMODeUSER Parameters lt NumberOfPages gt float Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 RST 1 Options R amp S SMBV K65 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PRESet lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PRESet lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PRESet lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PRESet lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PRESet The navigation message s parameters are calculated according to the selected alma nac This setting is only available for subsystem SMODeUSER Usage Event lt subsystem gt SV
405. stems of the digital standard Generate Waveform File R amp S WinIQSIM2 only With enabled signal generation triggers the instrument to store the current settings as an ARB signal in a waveform file Waveform files can be further processed by the ARB and or as a multi carrier or a multi segment signal The file name and the directory it is stored in are user definable the predefined file extension for waveform files is wv See also e chapter 2 12 2 1 Generating an one satellite static generic GNSS signal with R amp S WinlQSIM2 on page 53 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 58 Satellite Navigation User Interface ma A H EgQ Q GNSS Main Dialog e chapter 2 12 2 2 Loading and Processing a GNSS Waveform in the ARB of the Rohde amp Schwarz Signal Generator on page 54 Remote command lt subsystem gt WAVeform CRI Update RF Frequency R amp S SMBV only Eate on page 164 Sets the Status Bar Frequency display to the resulting frequency The RF Fre quency is calculated automatically depending on the selected RF Band on the entry standard and on the enabled navigation standards Note RF Frequency vs RF Band e Fornavigation standards with overlapping carrier frequencies e g GPS and Gali leo in the L1 E1 upper RNSS band see figure 2 1 the RF frequency is the carrier frequency L1 E1 1 57542 GHz e For
406. system TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency on page 289 Pattern A marker signal that is defined by a bit pattern is generated The pat tern has a maximum length of 32 bits and is defined in an input field which opens when pattern is selected Remote command subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern on page 288 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 150 Satellite Navigation User Interface es Trigger Marker Clock Settings ON OFF A regular marker signal that is defined by an ON OFF ratio is gener Ratio ated A period lasts one ON and OFF cycle The ON Time and OFF Time are each expressed as a number of samples and are set in an input field which opens when ON OFF ratio is selected ON time OFF time ON time OFF time Remote command subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime on page 288 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime on page 288 Trigger A marker signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs Then the signal is generated continuously Every subsequent trigger event causes a restart Remote command subsystem RIGger OUTPut ch MODE on page 287 3 14 3 Marker Delay The delay of the signals on the MARKER outputs is set in the Marker Delay section Marker x Delay Enters the delay between the marker signal at the marker outputs and the start of the frame or slot The input is expressed as a number of chips If the setting Fix marker dela
407. system gt SVID lt 6h gt GPS NMESsa ge bbRt Get 230 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PROJect sse 230 Subsvsiemz SGVlD schz BEIDouNME Geage bbOlect ererererorerersrerernenennn 230 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PROJect esee 230 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PRO Ject essen 231 Subsvstemz GVlDschz GbPSNME GesagebbOlect nntu ntnnnerenene 231 Subsvsiemz SGVlDschz OGNGG NMEGsaoebRfbolechon 231 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage RTPROojection sse 231 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage RTPROojection seen 231 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage RTPROjection ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeananaea 231 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage RTPRojection cesses 231 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us CCORection AF gr0 231 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection AF grO0 231 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection AF grO 231 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us CCORection TGD 232 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TGD 232 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TGD 232 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PA
408. t lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt lt subsystem gt RT GPS SVID lt ch gt ELEVation lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Queries the satellite s elevation in the selected moment of time The required query parameters depend on the selected time basis Query parameters lt TimeBasis gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC lt Year gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 lt Hour gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 271 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a Ug S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands Minutes integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 Increment 1 lt Seconds gt float required for TimeBasis UTC Range 0 to 59 999 Increment 0 001 lt WeekNumber gt integer required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 529947 Increment 1 lt TimeOfWeek gt float required for TimeBasis GPS GST BDT Range 0 to 604799 999 Increment 0 001 Return values lt Elevation gt float Exampl
409. t EPHemeris ECCentricity 235 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris ECCentricity 235 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ECCentricity 235 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris FlIFLag 235 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth 236 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth 236 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris HEALth 236 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOT 236 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOT 236 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOT 236 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOT 236 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris lIODA 236 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOC 236 subsystem SVID ch BEIDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODC 236 subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODC 236 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOE
410. t NAVigation TCONversion GPS AZERo lt AZero gt For lt subsystem gt SMODe STATic or USER defines the constant term of polynomial Ao Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 202 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands PJJ gen Time Conversion Configuration Parameters lt AZero gt integer Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Increment 1 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the time conversion and leap sec onds settings on page 201 Manual operation See Time Conversion Parameters on page 90 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion lt GNSS gt TOT lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion BEIDou TOT Tot lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GALileo TOT Tot lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GLONass TOT Tot lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GPS TOT lt Tot gt For lt subsystem gt SMODe STATic or USER defines the UTC data reference time of week to Parameters lt Tot gt integer Range 0 to 255 Increment 1 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the time conversion and leap sec onds settings on page 201 Manual operation See Time Conversion Parameters on page 90 lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion lt GNSS gt WNOT lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion BEIDou WNOT lt Wnot gt lt subsystem gt NAVigation TCONversion GALileo WNOT lt Wnot gt lt subsystem gt NAVigati
411. t Range 1 to 100 Increment 0 1 RST 10 Example see example Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Ground Permittivity Conductivity Power Loss on page 85 subsystem OBSCuration GSR CONDuctivity lt Conductivity gt Sets the surface conductivity Parameters lt Conductivity gt float Range 1E 6 to 20 Increment 1E 6 RST 1 Example see example Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Ground Permittivity Conductivity Power Loss on page 85 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR PLOSs lt PowerLoss gt Sets the surface power loss Parameters lt PowerLoss gt integer Range 0 to 20 RST 5 Example see example Defining a user defined ground and sea reflection on page 179 Options R amp S SMBV K101 Manual operation See Ground Permittivity Conductivity Power Loss on page 85 lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR 01Distance Distance lt subsystem gt OBSCuration GSR O2Distance Distance Sets the distance between the receiver and the obstacles Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 188 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands P UG exp Obscuration and Auto Multipath Parameters Distance float Range 0 to 1000 Increment 0 1 RST 150 Example see examp
412. t ag E1 E5b a f0 E1 E5B E1B DVS SV clock bias correction coefficient ap E1 E5b Data Validity Satellite Status transmitted on E1 B E1 Bpys lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMES sage PAGE lt us gt INAV E1BDVS on page 243 E5B DVS Data Validity Satellite Status transmitted on E5b E5bpys lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E5BDVS on page 244 E1B HS Signal Health Status for E1 E1 Bys lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMES sage PAGE lt us gt INAV E1BHS on page 244 E5B HS Signal Health Status for E5b E5bjs lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMES sage PAGE lt us gt INAV E5BHS on page 244 Galileo FNAV Parameters Comprises the parameters of the freely accessible navigation message F NAV provi ded by the E5a signal for Open Service Table 3 19 FNAV Parameters Parameter Description SCPI command B GD E1 E5A T OC E1 E5A E1 E5a Broadcast Group Delay BGD E1 E5a Clock correction data reference Time of Week t c E1 E5a lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV BGD on page 241 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV TOC on page 243 a f2 E1 E5A SV clock drift rate correction coeffi cient ap E1 E5a lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt
413. t GAMMA_n gt integer Range 1024 to 1023 Increment 1 RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 245 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands T O M E H I P HH Navigation Message Configuration Manual operation See GLONASS Clock Correction Parameters on page 126 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TAUN lt TAU n Defines the SV Clock bias correction coefficient Parameters TAU n integer Range 2097152 to 2097151 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GLONASS Clock Correction Parameters on page 126 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris AOEP lt AgeOfEph gt Sets the time interval between 2 adjacent values of TOE It defines hence the age of the current GLONASS Ephemeris page Parameters lt AgeOfEph gt A30M A45M A60M A30M age of Ephemeris 30 min A45M age of Ephemeris 45 min A60M age of Ephemeris 60 min RST A30M Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris HEALth lt Health gt A health value The user navigation equipment analyzes only the MSB of this word Parameters lt Health gt integer B_n 3 1_n 1 Satellite is not healthy B_n 3 1_n 0 Satellite is healthy Range 0 to 7 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation
414. t ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris NDELta oe subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ODOT sss subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OMEQa sss subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris OZERo esee subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SISA sss subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris SQRA sesssusss subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TOE sess subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV AF oz subsystem GVlD zchz GA leohME Gesaoel PAG us IENAVBGID lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV E5ADVS T subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV ES5AHS seen subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV K sse 242 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV TOC sese subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us INAV AF oz subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us INAV BGD essen lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E1BDVS lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E1BHS c
415. t gt equivalently Jx Jy Jz Jerk vector in ECEF meters lt YDotDotDot gt second 3 lt ZDotDotDot gt lt Roll gt lt Pitch gt attitude angles yaw heading pitch elevation roll bank radians lt Yaw gt unlimited value range to simulate more that one cycle rota tion between two updates lt RDot gt lt PDot gt attitude angular rate of change rad sec lt YDot gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 190 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Hardware in the Loop HIL Parameter Description Default unit lt RDotDot gt lt PDotDot gt attitude angular second order derivative rad sec 2 lt YDotDot gt lt RDotDotDot gt attitude angular third order derivative rad sec 3 lt PDotDotDot gt lt YDotDotDot gt See also chapter 2 5 8 Hardware in the Loop HIL on page 29 Parameters lt ElapsedTime gt float Elapsed time from the simulation start For description of the other parameters see table 4 5 Range 0 to 99999999 Usage Setting only Options R amp S SMBV K92 motion only R amp S SMBV K92 K103 motion attitude lt subsystem gt RT HILPosition MODE B lt ElapsedTime gt lt Latitude gt lt Longitude gt lt Altitude gt lt NDot gt lt EDot gt lt DDot gt lt NDotDot gt lt EDotDot gt lt DDotDot gt lt NDotDotDot gt lt EDotDotDot gt lt DDotDotDot gt lt Yaw gt Pitch Roll lt YawDot gt lt PitchDot gt lt R
416. t subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORection TOC lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection TOC lt Toc gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection TOC lt Toc gt Defines the Clock Correction Parameter As this parameter affects the satellite s orbit the value selected here also has an impact on the satellite s parameters Time Shift Doppler Shift and Duration Elevation gt 2 5 5 7 5 10 see subsystem SATellite lt st gt TSHift on page 219 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt DSHift on page 215 lt subsystem gt SATellite lt st gt DURation on page 215 This setting is only available for subsystem SMODeUSER Parameters Toc integer GPS parameter Range 0 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 0 lt Toc gt integer BeiDou parameter Range 0 to 131071 Increment 1 RST 0 Options R amp S SMBV K65 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 232 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands a EU PH m GJ n HERR Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris AODO lt Aodo gt Age of Data Offset Parameters lt Aodo gt integer Range 0 to 31 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See GPS Ephemeris Parameters on page 121 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsag
417. te of Inclination Angle Parameters lt Idot gt integer Range 8192 to 8191 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IODA lt loda gt Issue Of Data Almanacs Parameters lt loda gt integer Range 0 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo Ephemeris Parameters on page 122 subsystem SVID ch GNSS NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IDOC subsystem SVID ch BEIlDou NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris IODC lt lodc gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IODC lt lodc gt Issue of Data Clock Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 236 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands U P JJ J P A u n Navigation Message Configuration Parameters lt lodc gt integer Range 0 to 1023 for GPS 31 for BeiDou Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IDOE lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IODE lt lode gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris IODE lode Issue of Data Ephemeris Parameters lt lode gt integer Range 0 to 255 for GPS 31 for BeiDou Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeri
418. teet ARSAN TARASA ANARTEAN A 293 Movement or Motion Files eee neenon tree a LI Rb aa Deux FER DRE SERE EEN 293 Waypoint side 293 Vector Trajectory File Format 1 eiiis tienne either AREETAN 294 NMEA Files as Source for Movement Information esse 296 Trajectory Description Files nennen 296 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 6 A 1 2 Vehicle Description Files Used for Gmoothenimg 300 A 1 3 Antenna Pattern Body Mask Eiles annen nen 301 A 2 RINEX iles iiri irre te ee ER Pe C eie rer in E o rf rv ba EE 303 A 2 1 RINEX Format Description 304 A 2 2 Example of a RINEX File eren idia nnn nnns 305 A 3 NMEA Scenatrios inrer recte tec Lea e Fuss Dru a C EE ER Ra et ra de aeuo ER xe era ane E 306 A4 Used Algorithiris torrenti rene tton terne eee ea nena ENEE 307 A 4 1 Detailes on the Smoothening Aloorttbm 307 List of Commands eerie renta eidnindssiensenkasdet 309 jj e C eee 320 Satellite Navigation Preface 1 1 Documentation Overview Preface Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S SMBV consists of the following parts e Online Help system on the instrument e Quick Start Guide printed manual e Documentation CD ROM with Online help system chm as a standalone help Operating Manuals for base unit and options Service Manual Data sheet and specifications
419. tellation with radio signals of all navigation standards Mixed configurations are enabled only in the common or close range frequency bands e g L1 E1 GNSS system configurations can be also used to configure general purpose global parameters for the simulation 2 1 4 Multiple almanacs The instrument supports the configuration of the almanac files used One almanac file per GNSS navigation standard can be selected The Galileo satellite constellation is not yet in orbit Hence no almanac files for Galileo are available In this implementation Galileo almanac files are provided for test purpo ses The almanac files for GPS and Galileo use the same format PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 15 Satellite Navigation General Description pem M M i Functional Overview of the Basic Realtime GNSS Options GPS Galileo GLONASS and BeiDou Current GNSS almanac data can be downloaded via the Internet and stored on the hard disk of the instrument e U S Coast Guard Navigation Center GPS Homepage http www navcen uscg gov pageName gpsAlmanacs The almanac files are named xxx alm for YUMA files or xxx a13 for SEM files whereas xxx denotes the day of a year e http www celestrak com GPS almanac The naming convention of the almanac file is almanac sem yuma weekXXXX YYYYYY txt whereas xxxx denotes the GPS week and yyyyyy the time of alman
420. tellites including definition of the complete navigation message The simulation mode User Localization can be used to get an optimal satellite s constella tion and to adjust the navigation message to the exact requirements The basic BeiDou option R amp S SMBV K107 is sufficient for this kind of tests Addi tional assisted option is not required The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 5 Generating A GPS Custom Build Scenarios User Localization Mode on page 37 Generation of assistance data Besides generating the satellite signals for predefined test scenario the assisted options R amp S SMBV K65 K67 K95 are also able to provide all kinds of assistance data in line with the simulated scenario which can be provided to the UE by a protocol tester Certainly this also applies to user defined test scenarios For the generation of A BeiDou user defined test signals the basic BeiDou option R amp S SMBV K107 is sufficient Additional assisted option is not required Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 22 Satellite Navigation General Description pm 91 Realtime Option Extension to 12 24 Satellites R amp S SMBV K91 K96 Refer to chapter 2 9 1 Example of A GPS Test Setup on page 34 for an example of the A GPS setup The generic workflow is described in chapter 2 10 8
421. temz GVlD chz GL OhasshNMt GeaoelbAGE us TEbHemerts vDDN lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris YDN Cie ubevstemz GVlD zchz GL OhasshNMtE Geagel PAG us TEbemerts vN ubevstemz GVlD zchz GL OhasshNMt Geagel PAG us JTEbemerte ZDDN subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ZDN esses subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris ZN sse ubevstemz GVlD zchz GL OhNass bOWer eene enne tnnet enters enr nnr nennen enter nnne subsystem GVlD zchz GL OhNassGichal sessi nnne enne ainiaan aiaiai REN EU e RE EICH E KEE 201 ubevstemz GVlD zchzs GbPSMPDAThSTATe nennen netten erret nnne nns lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS MPATh TAP COUNt s ubevstemz GVlD zchz GPS MPDAThTAb ousz Case ubevstemz GVlD zchz GPS MbPDAThTAb usz DH ubevstemz GVlD zchz GPS MPDAThTAb cusz POMWer nennen nnne nennen ubevstemz SGVlD zchzs GbPSMbPDAThTAbausz TH ubevstemz GVlD zchz GPSNME GeagebAGE COUN enne nnne nnns subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PRESet esses nennen rennen neret nee ubevstemz GVlD zchz GbPGSNME GeagebROlect eene eene nnne ubevstemz GVlD zchzGbPGNME Geagehfbbolechon enne lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt CCORrection AF lt gr0 gt s subsystem SVID ch GPS NMESsage PAGE us CCORrection TGD sss
422. tern on output MARKER 2 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 150 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe DIVider lt Divider gt Sets the divider for Pulse marker mode subsystem TRIG OUTP MODE PULSe The resulting pulse frequency is derived by dividing the chip rate 1 023 MHz by the divider Parameters lt Divider gt integer Range 2 to 1024 Increment 1 RST 2 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 288 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands T 0 Im M Marker Settings Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 PULS DIV 2 sets the divider to 2 for the marker signal on output MARKER 2 BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 FREQ queries the resulting pulse frequency of the marker signal Response 511511 038 the resulting pulse frequency is 511 511 kHz Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 150 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency Queries the pulse frequency of the pulsed marker signal in the setting subsystem TRIGger OUTPut MODE PULSe The pulse frequency is derived by dividing the symbol rate by the divider Return values Frequency float Example BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 PULS DIV 2 sets the divider for the marker signal on output MARKER 2 to the value 2 BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 MODE PULS enables the pulsed marker signal BB GPS TRIG OUTP2 PULS FREQ queries the pulse frequen
423. ters yaw Y 7 0 1 pitch P 0 and roll R 1 0 Usage Query only Manual operation See Yaw Heading Pitch Elevation Roll Bank on page 72 Trigger Settings subsystem TRIGger SEQUGRCO 5 2 iieri adocc na delenit ctae u Lade rak bade DH EA AR 282 le ee ee E 282 Subsvstemz TRlGoerRMODe enhn een i en nsn sns sr titi sit nt iieri reri nrns 283 subsystem T RIGgerARM er TEEN 283 lt subsystem gt TRIGgerEXEGUG EE 284 lt s bsystem gt TRIGger GOUbce senes dankan Anaan eren nnns 284 subsystem TRIGger EXTernal S YNChronize OUTbut enne 284 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay uuu iicet eterne neta na Toe me kamera ne 285 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay MlNimum cesses 285 Subsvstemz TRlGoer OUTbutzchz D I av M ANimum rennen 285 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed esses 286 subsystem TRIGger EXTernal ch DELay sessi 286 subsystem TRIGger EXTernal ch INHibit esee eese enne 286 lt subsystem gt TRIGger SEQuence Sequence Selects the trigger mode Parameters Sequence AUTO RETRigger AAUTo ARETrigger SINGIe RST AUTO Example BB GPS SEQ AAUT sets the Armed auto trigger mode the device waits for the first trigger e g with TRG and then generates the signal continu ously Manual operation See Trigger Mode on page 146 subsystem TRIGger SLENgth lt
424. th lt subsystem gt RT BEIDou SVID lt ch gt AZIMuth lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt lt subsystem gt RT GALileo SVID lt ch gt AZIMuth lt TimeBasis gt lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 269 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands RMA S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commands lt subsystem gt RT GLONass SVID lt ch gt AZIMuth lt TimeBasis gt Year lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt lt subsystem gt RT GPS SVID lt ch gt AZIMuth lt TimeBasis gt Year lt Month gt lt Day gt lt Hour gt lt Minutes gt lt Seconds gt lt WeekNumber gt lt TimeOfWeek gt Queries the satellite azimuth in the selected moment of time The required query parameters depend on the selected time basis Query parameters lt TimeBasis gt UTC GPS GST GLO BDT RST UTC lt Year gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1980 to 9999 Increment 1 lt Month gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 lt Day gt integer required for TimeBasis UTC
425. the GNSS implementation in R amp S SMBV and R amp S WinlQ SIM2 The GNSS implementation in the R amp S SMBV provides you with the ability to generate the signal of up to 6 12 or 24 GNSS satellites depending on the installed options Sig nal generation is done in real time and thus it is not limited to a certain time period The GNSS implementation in the R amp S WinIQSIM2 allows you to generate waveform files that can be loaded to an Rohde amp Schwarz vector signal generator e g the R amp S SMU200A It provides you the ability to generate the signal of one GPS Galileo or Glo nass satellite on either an R amp S SMU200A R amp S SMJ100A R amp S AMU200A R amp S AFQ100A R amp S SMW200A or R amp S SMBV100A Depending on the availability of the respective options e g R amp S SMU K244 K266 K294 you can simulate one GPS Galileo GLONASS satellite respectively on the generator As a major difference to the real time solution the satellite signal is limited to a certain time period depending on the ARB capacity of the vector signal generator and the user configurable sample rate of the satellite signal o This description follows the GNSS implementation in the R amp S SMBV For information on the GNSS implementation in the R amp S WinlQSIM2 see chap ter 2 12 Functional Overview of the Basic Offline GNSS on page 53 Brief introduction to the GNSS standards e GPS The Global Positioning System GPS consists of several satellites c
426. the HDOP PDOP the better the precision of the position fix will be At least four different satellites have to be configured to get a reasonable value other wise 1 will be displayed This parameter is enabled only for Auto Localization and User Localization mode Remote command subsystem HDOP on page 213 subsystem PDOP on page 213 Atmospheric Configuration R amp S SMBV only Access the Atmospheric Configuration dialog for configuring e the ionospheric tropospheric models used for the satellite channel s simulation Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 101 Satellite Navigation User Interface Pe Satellite Configuration e the atmospheric parameters as transmitted in the corresponding GNSS navigation message Get Optimal Constellation R amp S SMBV only In User Localization mode the satellites are fully configurable Use this function prior to and as basis for further configurations and retrieve an optimal satellites constellation for the selected Almanac RINEX file Elevation Mask and the selected Maximum Num ber of Satellites Note The retrieved satellite s constellation includes satellites with State Off if the number of satellites with elevation higher than the selected Elevation Mask is less than the selected Maximum Number of Satellites Remote command subsystem GOConstellation on page 213 subsystem RT OCO
427. the Use Position Accu racy P Code GPS Off case the following rules apply e The total number of available resource units depends on the Activate GNSS Standards gt BeidDou state as follows 14a 10b if BeidDou Off 24a if BeidDou On e Any of the GPS C A Glonass R C A and BeiDou B C A satellite multipath tap channel consumes 1a or 1b resource units e A Galileo E1 satellite multipath tap consumes 1a or 2b Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 23 Satellite Navigation General Description Realtime Option Extension to 12 24 Satellites R amp S SMBV K91 K96 Example The table 2 6 lists some of the GNSS constellations with 24 satellites that can be ach ieved Table 2 6 Possible GNSS hybrid configurations with 24 satellites GPS C A signal Galileo E1 signal GLONASS R C A sig BeiDou B C A nal 24 0 0 0 12 0 12 0 8 8 8 0 12 0 0 12 0 0 0 24 8 0 8 8 5 2 5 10 etc With activated P code in the GNSS system configuration For enabled Use Position Accuracy P Code GPS or Maximum Number of Satellites is less or equal to 24 only a subset of hybrid GNSS configurations are possible see table 2 8 The table 2 7 describes the number of C A and P Code resource units needed per sig nal when both the C A GPS and position accuracy P Code GPS signals are activated in GNSS system configuration Table 2 7 Number of resource units required per signal Sta
428. ting Manual 1173 1427 12 08 242 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands E H ge Navigation Message Configuration subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV TOC Toc Defines the Clock correction data reference Time of Week t E1 E5a of the freely accessible navigation message F NAV provided by the E5a signal for Open Service Parameters Toc integer Range 0 to 16383 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo FNAV Parameters on page 127 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV AF lt gr0 gt lt Af gt Defines the SV clock drift rate correction coefficients ajo ar ap E1 E5b of the Integrity navigation message INAV Suffix lt gr0 gt 0 1 2 Parameters Af integer Value range af2 2 5 2 5 1 af1 2 20 2420 1 af 2 30 2430 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo INAV Parameters on page 126 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us INAV BGD B GD gt Defines the E1 E5b Broadcast Group Delay BGD E1 E5b parameter of the Integrity navigation message INAV Parameters lt B_GD gt integer Range 512 to 511 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo INAV Parameters on page 126 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt INAV E1BDVS lt Dvs gt Defines the Data Validity
429. tion Almanac navigation data etc will be set according to the selected test scenario The selection User Defined enables the configuration of all parameters Remote command SOURce lt hw gt BB GPS ATSCenario on page 160 SOURce lt hw gt BB GLONass ATSCenario on page 161 Simulation Mode Sets the simulation mode Note Refer to table 2 1 for an overview of the supported functionality per simulation mode Some functionality require additional options Static The satellite signals are configured by the user See also chapter 2 10 2 Generating GNSS Signal for Simple Receiver Tests Static Mode on page 36 for R amp S SMBV instru ments For WinIQSIM2 see chapter 2 12 2 1 Generating an one satellite static generic GNSS signal with R amp S WinIQSIM2 on page 53 Auto Localization R amp S SMBV only The satellite signals are configured corresponding to a real user defined location Four satellites will be selected depending on the selected almanac For instruments equipped with option R amp S SMBV K91 K96 the num ber of configurable satellites is extended to 12 resp 24 The number of configurable satellites is adjusted with the parameter Maximum Number of Satellites In this localization mode a new satellite will be exchanged in real time with a current one as soon as the elevation of the latter is less than the selected Elevation Mask or a new satellite constellation with better PDOP is found The
430. tion The blend is symmetric with respect to the axis bisecting the angle formed by three way points Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 307 Satellite Navigation Annex Used Algorithms The starting and the exit waypoint coordinates of the blend in addition to the blend s sixth order polynomial coefficients and velocity are determined by the proximity param eter mentioned before Once the starting and exit waypoints coordinates for the blends of all the user s input waypoints are determined these waypoints can later be connec ted using the modified LSPB mentioned before to form the entire motion trajectory In case the user specifies zero proximity value then the motion is formed entirely of straight segments with no blends since the starting and the exit waypoints are the user s input waypoints in such a case the simulated motion will stop at every waypoint in order to change direction of motion Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 308 Satellite Navigation List of Commands List of Commands LSOUbRce hwzslBBBEIDou GETTingChTalogd nennen 162 SOURce hw BB GALileo SETTing CATalog essere nennen 162 TGOUlbce cbwsBBGL OhNassATGCenarto nennen nennen nnne nnns nnn nennen 161 LSOUbRce chwzlBBGLOhases GETTingCATalog nennen nnne 162 SOURce hw BB GPS ATSCenario eee eee eee eene tenent athens nn sitate tnnt natn hates ndn 160 LSOUbRce chwzlBBGbG GETTingcCAhTalogy enemies 162 subs
431. tion mode the default value of this parameter is equal to the TOA of the almanac that corresponds to the navigation standard used as an entry standard Remote command subsystem NAVigation SIMulation TIME on page 177 Week Number enabled for System Time GPS GST BDT Enters the week number WN the navigation signal is generated for The satellite clocks in the GPS and Galileo navigation systems are not synchronized to the UTC one but use a proprietary time e g the GPS Galileo System Time The format used for these system time basis is week number and Time of Week TOW The weeks are numbered starting form a reference point of time WN_REF 0 that depends on the navigation standard e GPS reference point January 6 1980 00 00 00 UTC e GALILEO reference point August 22 1999 e BeiDou reference point Januar 01 2006 The default value of this parameter is equal to the Week of the almanac that corre sponds to the navigation standard used as an entry standard The parameter is only available if data source Real Navigation Data is selected Remote command subsystem NAVigation SIMulation WNUMber on page 177 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 67 Satellite Navigation User Interface JGGEP Localization Data Time of Week TOW enabled for System Time GPS GST BDT Define the simulation start time within the We
432. tion MODE B esses eene nnenennnenentt irren nnne 191 subsystem RT HILPosition EA Tebey 12r icio creep ota a Darme EMT SEENEN 192 lt subsystem gt RT HILPosition MODE A lt ElapsedTime gt X Y lt Z gt lt XDot gt lt YDot gt lt ZDot gt lt XDotDot gt lt YDotDot gt lt ZDotDot gt lt XDotDotDot gt lt YDotDotDot gt lt ZDotDotDot gt lt Yaw gt lt Pitch gt lt Roll gt lt YawDot gt lt PitchDot gt lt RollDot gt lt YawDotDot gt lt PitchDotDot gt lt RollDotDot gt lt YawDotDotDot gt lt PitchDotDotDot gt lt RollDotDotDot gt Sets hardware in loop position of third order ECEF dynamics and attitude The yaw heading pitch elevation roll bank rotation angles and their derivatives are obtained by rotating the body XYZ frame starting from an aligned state with the local NED frame by a sequence of three consecutive Euler rotations about z axis then y axis and then x axis The attitude parameters Yaw Pitch Roll RDot etc are optional Table 4 5 Parameter description Parameter Description Default unit lt X gt lt Y gt lt Z gt coordinate in the Earth Fixed Earth Centered ECEF coor m dinate system lt XDot gt lt YDot gt lt ZDot gt equivalently Vx Vy Vz Velocity vector in ECEF meter second lt XDotDot gt lt YDotDot gt equivalently Ax Ay Az Acceleration vector in ECEF meter lt ZDotDot gt second 2 lt XDotDotDo
433. tive to the reference point i e the 0 0 0 coordinate The reference point is the reference for the definition of the vertical obstacles Tip Use this parameters to redefine the receiver s start location relative to the config ured obstacles geometry without changing the obstacles definition in the table Obsta cles Configuration Table Note Simulation of vehicle If a vehicle is simulated the position describes a vehicle geometric reference The offset between antenna and the vehicle s reference is descri bed in the antenna pattern ant pat The simulated GNSS signal refers to the antenna and not the vehicle geometric reference Start Receiver X Offset X offset of the first simulated receiver location in the OX OY coordi nate system Start Receiver Y Offset Y offset of the first simulated receiver location in the OX OY coordi nate system Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 77 Satellite Navigation User Interface d SA g n Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings Start Receiver Height Offset Height offset Remote command subsystem OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset X on page 182 subsystem OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset Y on page 182 subsystem OBSCuration VOBS ROFFset HEIGht on page 182 Map Orientation The map is aligned to the points of the compass The value represents the angle between East direction and OX axis A value of 0 means that
434. tp cddis gsfc nasa gov gnss_datasum html brdc or ftp ftp glonass iac ru MCC BRDC Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 19 Satellite Navigation General Description Enhancements of Realtime Assisted GNSS Options GPS Galileo and GLONASS 2 3 2 Full Set of Pre defined Test Scenarios as Basis for A GPS A GLO NASS A GNSS Protocol and Conformance Test Cases An instrument equipped with the assisted options supports test scenarios as basis for A GPS A GLONASS A GNSS Protocol and Conformance Test cases Some of the test cases may require additional options Test scenario vs test case An instrument equipped with the required options provides predefined test scenarios not the standard conform test cases The provided test scenarios are suitable basis for the test cases However to perform a particular test case as specified by the 3GPP test specification you have to subse quently configure several settings You may have to adjust the receiver location the simulation time active satellites in the pre selected satellite constellation power set ting etc Refer to the corresponding 3GPP test specification for the required values See also chapter 2 10 7 Generating A GNSS Test Signal on page 39 The table 2 3 lists the currently supported predefined A GPS test scenarios Table 2 3 A GPS test scenarios overview Test Scenario Required for Test Case Required SW Option GSM 3GPP TS 51 010 10 9 Signal
435. tyvector velocity vector Vx Vy Vz e g time X Y Z Vx Vy VZ e property waypointformat position velocityvector attitude yawlheading pitch elevation roll bank Vx Vy Vz e g time longitude latitude altitude yaw pitch roll Vx Vy Vz Note If the waypoints are in geod wgs84 velocity vector is assumed in Cartesian ECEF coordinate system Example Trajectory description files in lt positiononly gt waypoint format The following are two examples in property waypointformat positiononly format The examples emphasize on the dif ferent formats and explain the used time stamp principle e The lt waypointvector data parameters in the following example are vectors with size of 3 because of the tag property datavectorhastimestamp no Evenif a fourth value have been defined it would have been ignored The time stamp is defined with the tag property timeresolution 0 05 T4 0 T 2 1 0 05 0 05 etc T42 12 1 0 05 0 55 trajectory general info name position only and user defined time stamp up uc P P W oss Sei Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 298 Satellite Navigation lt property waypoint format positiononly gt lt property datavectorhastimestamp no gt lt property coordsystem enu gt lt property timeresolution 0 05 gt lt property enurefpoint 54
436. u lation estes cot ere ENEE inue cide SEA Eed Nee AEN 28 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 3 Satellite Navigation Contents 8 2 5 6 2 5 7 2 5 8 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 9 1 2 10 2 10 1 2 10 2 2 10 3 2 10 4 2 10 5 2 10 6 2 10 7 2 10 8 2 10 9 2 10 10 2 10 11 2 10 12 2 10 13 2 10 14 2 10 15 2 11 2 12 2 12 1 2 12 2 2 12 2 1 2 12 2 2 Internal Waypoint Resampling esee mem 28 Motion Smoothening Using Vehicle Description File 28 Hardware in the Loop HI 29 Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Obscuration Simulation and Automatic Mul tipath R amp S SMBV K101 5 ien ire e Ea b ie Fei e ens 30 Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Antenna Pattern R amp S SMBV K102 31 Realtime Option GNSS Extension for Spinning and Attitude Simulation CET ETG enitn puer ede aaae Daa Le AE ERE REA EE 33 Realtime Test Setups eit terrain En nu FRNRRRERRRANRE EES gege ee EES 34 Example of A GPS Test Setup tee NEE tr adit addu EAR 34 Typical Realtime Workflow essen nnne nnne nnne nnne nennen 34 General WOrkflOWw EE 34 Generating GNSS Signal for Simple Receiver Tests Static Mode 36 Generating GNSS Signal with Automatic Dynamic Exchange of the Satellites Auto Localization Mode 5 ide t n i Mae EUER Aa 36 Generating GNSS Signal with Manual Exchange of the Satellites User Lo
437. ubsystem ADGeneration UTC CREate on page 266 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 137 Satellite Navigation User Interface O Q Assistance Data Generation Generate Acquisition File Access the Select Acquisition File dilaog for saving the generated acquisition file The generated Acquisition file is a file with extension xs acq the selected file name and data format as defined with the parameter Data Format This file consists of e one or more rows each corresponding to the Receiver Referenced GNSS Time of Week GNSS TOW for GPS Galileo and BeiDou satellites elapsed time relative to GLONASS Time of Assistance data Time of Validity ms for GLONASS satellites The number of generated rows is calculated as follow Number Of Generated Rows Duration Of Assistance Data Resolution of Assistance Data e one or more sequential acquisition blocks per row where each block comprises the parameters listed in table 3 23 The number of the acquisition blocks depends on the number of enabled space vehicles The generated acquisition file is conformed to the format appended to standards 3GPP 34 108 v 8 0 0 3GPP TS 51 010 1v 7 7 0 and 37 571v10 0 Table 3 23 Contents of the generated acquisition file one acquisition block Parameter Description Unit Unit GPS BeiDou GLOANSS Galileo SVID PRNID
438. ubsystem gt ADGeneration MODE A 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration NAVigation CREate enne ne nnne nnne 266 eubevstemz ADGeneraton UTC ChREate nne nnree neret rnt sense nentes 266 subsystem ADGeneration ACQuisition DFORmat sese 265 subsystem APA Tierm ANTennalD nennen nentes nnn nnn ntn n nts t nnns sn tents natns senten 168 subsystem APATtern ANTenna LIST 167 subsystem APDA Tierm CAT alog PR Defined ennemis 167 lt subsystem gt APATtern CATalog USER cc cccccecceeeeeeeeteeeeeeecaeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseceeeeseeeeeeseneeeeees 167 lt subsystem gt APA Tem FIHE sic eege gege SEENEN REESEN Eed AER ged 167 ubevstemz AT Mospberc BE IDoulOhospbercC Al Pacht 252 subsystem ATMospheric BEIDou IONospheric BETA Ch0 sss enne nnne 252 eubevstemz AT MospbercGA Teo IOhospbertc Alczch z nennen 252 subsystem ATMospheric GALileo IONospheric SF chz nennen 253 ubevstemz AT MospbercGbG OhNospbertc AL PHa cchtz eene nere enne 251 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric GPS lONospheric BETA lt ch0 gt us subsystem AT MospberclOhospberckl OBuchar A Pacht 251 subsystem AT MospberclOhospberckl OBuchar BET Acht 251 eubesvstemz AT MospbercIOhNospbertcMODel nnne rennen nennt rennes 251 lt subsystem gt ATMospheric TROPospheric MODel nennen nnne nnne nnn 250 uu pu uc M p MF MFP P
439. ude Sets the latitude of the reference location Longitude Sets the longitude of the reference location The altitude latitude and longitude are only configurable for user defined geographic locations If a value other than User Defined is selected in the Geographic Location field these fields are read only Remote command to enter the coordinates in Degree Minute Second format subsystem LOCation COORdinates DMS on page 172 to enter the coordinates in decimal degree format subsystem LOCation COORdinates DECimal on page 171 PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 71 Satellite Navigation User Interface c OE r4 HH Localization Data YawlHeading Pitch Elevation Roll Bank For instruments equipped with R amp S SMBV K103 sets the angles of rotation in the cor responding direction i e the rotation around the respective yaw pitch and roll axes Yaw Heading Pitch Elevation Roll Bank are defined relative to the local horizon See also figure 2 4 Remote command lt subsystem gt LOCation YAW on page 173 subsystem LOCation PITCh on page 173 subsystem LOCation ROLL on page 173 see also subsystem RT RATTitude on page 280 From Motion From Spinning Enable From Motion From Spinning to extract the attitude parameters from the way point file For scenarios with defined waypoints attitude file this forces the attitude par
440. us gt FNAV AF lt gr0 gt on page 241 a f1 E1 E5A SV clock drift correction coeffi cient ar E1 E5a PE Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 127 Satellite Navigation User Interface Static Multipath Configuration Parameter a f0 E1 E5A Description SV clock bias correction coeffi cient ap E1 E5a SCPI command E5A DVS E5A HS Data Validity Satellite Status transmitted on E5a E5apys Signal Health Status for E5a E5ans lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMES sage PAGE lt us gt FNAV E5ADVS on page 242 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV ESAHS on page 242 F NAV Almanac Scheduling start index lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV K on page 242 3 11 Static Multipath Configuration d To access this settings The parameters of the Multipath Configuration are only configurable for instruments with equipped assisted option R amp S SMBV K92 1 Select Baseband gt Satellite Navigation gt GPS 2 Select Simulation Mode User Localization 3 Select Satellite Configuration gt Multipath The Multipath Configuration dialog enables you to configure the signal parame ters of the selected satellite so that a signal undergoing multipath propagation is simulated The provided settings enable configuration of the number of fading taps and
441. ution of Pre cision of the selected satellite constellation at the beginning of the simulation Return values lt PDop gt float Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example See example Configuring the satellite s constellation on page 210 Usage Query only Manual operation See Initial HDOP PDOP on page 101 lt subsystem gt GALModulation Modulation Defines the modulation mode used for modulating the galileo carrier signal BOC 1 1 modulation can be set with Galileo instead of CBOC 6 1 to reduce the sam ple rate required to simulate a certain period of time Parameters Modulation BOC CBOC RST CBOC Manual operation See Galileo Sat Modulation on page 100 lt subsystem gt GOConstellation Retrieves an optimal satellite constellation for the selected Almanac RINEX file eleva tion mask and the enabled maximum number of satellites Usage Event Manual operation See Get Optimal Constellation on page 102 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 213 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands I JA UQ Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings lt subsystem gt SATellite GRTProjection Glb RT proj gt Forces ephemeris projection for all satellites i e performs the same action as the com mand subsystem SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage RTPRojection Parameters Glb RT proj gt 0 1
442. value Note All Ephemeris pages of an SVID have the same Tb alignment P2 Parameters lt TbAlign gt EVEN ODD RST ODD Example SUR BB GLON SVID GLON NMES EPH TAL EVEN Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 247 Satellite Navigation Remote Control Commands Q H e Navigation Message Configuration Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 subsystem SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE us EPHemeris TINDex lt TbIndex gt Defines the index of the Tb time interval To define the duration of the Tb time interval use the command lt subsystem gt SVID ch GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris AOEP Parameters lt TbIndex gt integer Range 1 to 95 Increment 1 RST 1 Manual operation See GLONASS Ephemeris Parameters on page 123 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GLONass NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TINTerval Queries the Tb Interval in the current day where the Ephemeris set page is valid Return values lt Tbinterval gt string Example SUR BB GLON SVID GLON NMES EPH TIND 0 set Tb index to O SOUR BB GLON SVID GLON NMES EPH AOEP 30 set age of Ephemeris to 30 min SOUR BB GLON SVID GLON NMES EPH TINT Response Tb Interval is the interval between 00 00 00 and 00 30 00 in the current day
443. ve instruments must have the same length and type Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points None The instrument is working in stand alone mode Sync Master The instrument provides all connected instrument with its synchroni sation including the trigger signal and reference clock signal Clock Settings Sync Mode Sync Master x Set Synchronisation Settings Sync Slave The instrument receives the synchronisation and reference clock sig nal from another instrument working in a master mode Remote command subsystem CLOCk SYNChronization MODE on page 291 Set Synchronization Settings Performs automatically adjustment of the instrument s settings required for the syn chronization mode selected with the parameter Synchronization Mode Remote command subsystem CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute on page 291 Clock Source Selects the clock source Internal The internal clock reference is used to generate the symbol clock External The external clock reference is fed in as the symbol clock or multiple thereof via the CLOCK connector The symbol rate must be correctly set to an accuracy of 2 see data sheet The polarity of the clock input can be changed with the aid of Global Trigger Clock Settings Remote command subsystem CLOCk SOURce on page 290 Clock Mode Enters the type of externally supplied clock Chip A chip clock is supplied via the CLOCK co
444. ware mn the Loop lll rot rrt terrre th pte i eS EY ete eerta 190 e GNSS System Configuration essen nennen nnmis 192 e Almanac RINEX Coniguration uns vivinuisavisdianivgeinvsgnnndtsgaiandide 194 e Time Conversion Configuration ucc recuso net rere eet nec elaine 201 Static Multipath Reen e te DE 206 e Satellites Configuration and Satellites Signal Settings 210 e Global Signal Configuration cce tre ree 220 e Power Tuning and Power Seltttigs erre edere 221 e Navigation Message Confgouration EE 227 e Atmosphere Configuration eaaa kaana ANANE AKANE ANA 250 e Assisiance Data SeuingS eege EES 253 e S P O T Configuration and Real Time Commandes AA 267 v Dogger SEUNGS EE 282 DER uideo cp PEE 287 e Cleck Selliis ii e et e e Ram D Ea ar aa dam eg 290 Programming Examples The following sections provide simple programming examples for the R amp S SMBV The purpose of the examples is to present all commands for a given task In real applica tions one would rather reduce the examples to an appropriate subset of commands The programming examples have been tested with a software tool which provides an environment for the development and execution of remote tests To keep the examples as simple as possible only the clean SCPI syntax elements are reported Non exe cutable command lines e g comments start with two characters At the beginning of the most rem
445. y to dynamic range is enabled the setting range is restricted to the dynamic range In this range the delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and sig nal Remote command subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay on page 285 Current Range without Recalculation Displays the dynamic range within which the delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and signal The delay can be defined by moving the setting mark Remote command subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay MINimum on page 285 subsystem TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay MAXimum on page 285 Fix marker delay to current range Restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range In this range the delay can be set without restarting the marker and signal Remote command subsystem TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed on page 286 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 151 Satellite Navigation User Interface es UU PM Trigger Marker Clock Settings 3 14 4 Clock Settings The Clock Settings is used to set the clock source and a delay if required Sync Mode Selects the synchronization mode This parameter is used to enable generation of very precise synchronous signal of sev eral connected R amp S SMBVs Note If several instruments are connected the connecting cables from the master instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive sla
446. y to configure a near environmental model for simulation of obscurations and multipath effects caused by ground and sea reflections The ground sea reflections model is available for ship aircraft and spacecraft vehicles and describes canyon vertical obstacles parallel to the motion direction of the user direction axis E amp GPS Obscuration and Auto Multipath Type fuserDefined zl Physical Model Obscuration amp Multipath zl Material Property Koma zl Surface Type Sea Water zl Ground Permittivity 200 Ground Conductivity 4000000 1 5000m al 1 000 0 km zl ai 500 0 m D h2 1 000 Ofkm Ground Level Ground Altitude 0 0 Im Material Property Define whether the material is defined by its permittivity conductivity or power loss characteristic The material properties depend on the selected surface type Remote command subsystem OBSCuration GSR MPRoperty on page 187 Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 84 Satellite Navigation User Interface uU Obscuration and Auto Multipath Settings Surface Type Describes the surface Available are Dry Ground Medium Dry Ground Wet Ground Fresh Water and Sea Water The different surfaces feature different reflection characteristics Remote command subsystem OBSCuration GSR STYPe on page 187 Ground Permittivity Conductivity Power Loss Displays defin
447. ystem ADGeneration GNSS SYNChronize sse eene enne nnne 259 subsystem ADGeneration ACQuisition ChRtate enne nre 265 ubevstemz ADGeneratton Al ManacChRtate eese enne tenente nennt nennen 266 subsystem ADGeneration BElDou LOCation COORdinates DECimal sss 260 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou LOCation COORdinates DMS eene 260 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou LOCation SYNChronize essen 259 ubevstemz ADGeneraton BEIDou LOCaton URADus eene nennen nennen 262 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou SVID SYNChronize essere nennen 259 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou SVID ch ACQuisition BLOCKO eene 256 subsystem ADGeneration BEIlDou SVID ch SAData sss eene 257 eubevstemz ADGeneratton BE IDou GVlD zchzs GTATe rennen neret enne 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration BEIDOu SYNCHYIOniZe eene enne 259 ubevstemz ADGeneratton BEilDou TOAData DATE 262 eubevstemz ADGeneraton BE IDou TOAData Daten 264 ubevstemz ADGeneraton BEilDou TOAData RE Golugon 264 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData SYNChronize sss 259 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData TBASis essen nennen nennen 262 subsystem ADGeneration BEIDou TOAData TIME essent enne nennen 263 ubevstemz ADGeneraton BEilDou TOADataTOwWeek nennen nnne nnns
448. ystem ADGeneration GPS All satellites configuration and of the refer synchronize on page 259 ence location configuration blocks as well as the time configuration parame ters with the settings made in the Sat ellite Configuration dialog and in the GNSS Main Dialog Note Synchronized are only the satel lites of the corresponding entry stand ard all other satellites are disregarded Synchronize Synchronizes the settings of the corre lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS SVID sponding parameter group SYNChronize on page 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS LOCation SYNChronize on page 259 lt subsystem gt ADGeneration GPS TOAData SYNChronize on page 259 Space Vehicle State Enables disables a space vehicle with the selected SV ID for generation of assistance data Use the Synchronize function to retrieve the SV ID belonging to the selected naviga tion standard Assistance Mode as configured in the Satellite Configuration dialog Remote command subsystem ADGeneration GPS SVID ch STATe on page 259 Reference Location The reference location section provides access to the parameters for setting the coor dinates of the reference location Operating Manual 1173 1427 12 08 132 Satellite Navigation User Interface O OBBCHU m C Gn Assistance Data Generation Parameter Description Position Format S
449. ystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TOE lt ToE gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TOE lt ToE gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris TOE lt ToE gt Time Of Ephemeris Parameters lt ToE gt integer Range 0 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt lt GNSS gt NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris URA lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt BEIDou NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris URA lt Ura gt lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GPS NMESsage PAGE lt us gt EPHemeris URA lt Ura gt SV accuracy URA Index Parameters lt Ura gt integer Range 0 to 15 Increment 1 RST 0 lt subsystem gt SVID lt ch gt GALileo NMESsage PAGE lt us gt FNAV AF lt gr0 gt lt Af gt Defines the SV clock drift rate correction coefficients ap r aj E1 E5a of the freely accessible navigation message F NAV provided by the E5a signal for Open Service Suffix lt gr0 gt 0 1 2 Parameters lt Af gt integer Value range af2 2 5 245 1 af1 2 20 2420 1 af 2 30 2430 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Galileo FNAV Parameters on page 127 subsystem SVID ch GALileo NMESsage PAGE us FNAV BGD B GD Defines the E1 E5a Broadcast Group Delay parameters BGD E1 E5a of the freely accessible navigation message F NAV provided by the E5a signal for Open Servic

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

T'nB DCCOS1XL  Configuring and Troubleshooting Windows Server® 2008  StarTech.com 120x25mm Dual Ball Bearing Computer Case Fan w/ LP4 Connector  Horizon Series  MODE D`EMPLOI  Sony VPCW11S1E/W netbook  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file